^ ^

.#

"^

g i
%a3AiNamv*
^llIBRARYQr
i?

r?

%13DNV'S0V^

^tUBRARYQ/r ^,
-:3

<*^

^
< m 50
t
^,

5
;nc uirc

i^

33

(
^OF
.U-J

%a3AiNn-3WV^

^OJIIVJJO-^

^!/OillVJJO^

-r,*

'%

CAIIFO/?/!^

r^-

CO'

>

C3

-3.

%a3AINf)-3\\v

^ ^ ^^AdVMll'l^

?"

^\UUNIVERV^
cxz.

<,

^\-lOSANCElfj>

<
.^

o
n
s.

"

(_:.

uj

CO
>

C3

*^-

-<

%a3AiNa-3WV^
,~^OF-CAIIFO%,

^UEUNIVERS/A

s^
^CAaVMIl-#
^TiiJONVSOl^"^

vr.

%^3AINn3\\V

^V^OSANCElfx^
CO
<3:

^^^tL!BRARY^^

^vMUBRARY^r
>-

tr 5
^.^OJIIVO JO"^

>
)

<

%a3AINfl-3^V^
.VtOSANr,Elr^
Or O

0.OFCALIFOP4A
f\

.A;OFCA[IF0%

..%

/O. s

>

>-

<

;53

u-

-<

^
:^l-UBRARYQc.

.^X\l-1?BRA?>Y6?^ >*

55 to
;=3

30
4r)

%0J11V3-J0^

%0:inV3-JO-^

''^1% >T1

.^;OF-CAIIFO% ^4
CSC
(^

^ ^.QF-CAliFOfi'^

SV
^ ?7 ^ i^<?Aava8ii-#
'

^lOS-ANCFlfj^

o
o=

1~

'^Aa3AINa-3WV

^
C-5

^.0FCAIIF0%

i
C~>
.

CD
''
,

'

O
%a3AINn-3V\V

^
:^

^yommn-i'^

^VlOSANCElfj^

C
DO
-n

A^^lLIBRARYOc 3 ^
**j

,<
d-

>
33
Sri

^A

"^mum-i^^
^OfCAllFOto

5^
-r,

^lOSANCElfj-^

.^OFCAIIFO/?^;.

,-."

r^

CO
1>-

ii

CD

ANTHON'S SERIES OF CLASSICAL WORKS

FOR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES.
From H. Humphrey,
herst, Mass. 1 am very happy to

D.D., President of Amherst College, at Am-

From

the Rt. Rev. Bishop M'IlVAiNE, President of Kenyon College, at Gambler, Ohio.

see that you have undertaken to furnish uniform editions of the Latin classics for the use of our grammar schools and higher seminaries

I anticipate the greatest benefits to our schools and colleges from the admirable
edition of the classics ivhich

you are now

of learning. and will receive the thatiks of the public for the labour which he has so judiciously and successfully bestowed upon Sal-

Professor Anthon deserves

The explanlust, Cassar, and Cicero. atory notes or commentaries are more copious and comprehensive than those of
any
other edition

publishing, under the superintendence and illustrated by the copious and learned notes of Professor Anthon. What your accomjtlishcd editor has aimed at in his Horace, Ccesar, and other volumes of the series, few can have been much connected with classical institutions in
this country xcilhout lear7dng to be pre-

I have

seen, ayid

much

wants of yoang students. Among the most valuable oj these notes are those which divert attention to the beautiful uses of the moods and tenses, and explain the delicate shades of meaning and peculiar beauties that depend upon them, which our language often expresses imperfectly and with difficulty, and which young learners rarely regard. The explanations of the force and meaning of the particles
'tetter

adapted

to the

cisely the one needful thing to their students. The object is most satisfactorily

attained.

The needed books wc

series
to

have,

has yet been pubwhat are yet to come, ive have learned from what we have, if I may use the words of one of your authors,
so

far as your
;

lished

and as

qua3-a

summa

virtute

sumnKjque

in-

genio

expectanda sunt, expectare. Wishing you the most abundant encour-

are also very useful.

The historical, geographical, and other hidexes are also ki'j:hly valuable, furnishing the student, as they do, with felicitous illustrations

agement in your important enterprise, remain your obedient servant, Ch.\s. p. M'Ilv.\ine.

of the

text,

andmuch

From William

general information.

The text seems to be settled loith much care and ability. The editions adopted as the basis or referred to as authority are those in the highest repute among scholars. The typographical execution is very fine, and this is a high merit.
The wretched reprints offoreign
editions

A. Duer, LL.D., President of Columbia College, in the City of New-York.

From the manner in which this undertaking has been so fur executed, as well as from the established character and
reputation of Professor Anthon as a scholar, his experience as an instructer,

of the classics, got up in cheap offices, on wretched paper, with incompetent proofreaders and no editors, to which,
until within a very

few years, our students have been universally condernned, have, by taking them young, been as successful innuiking them uncertain and inaccurate scholars as if that had been one of the main objects of the publishers. School books of all kinds, instead of being the worst (as they often are), should
be the 7nost carefully printed books have.

and judgment previousby him as an editor and commentator, I can entertain no doubt of the success of the enterprise, so far as his editorial labours and your own skill and experience as publishers ari concerned ;
the accuracy
ly evinced

and

and I
tion

trust that,

from

the iiicreasing

value of classical studies in the estima-

of the public,

this judicious

ited effort to facilitate

and spirand promote so im-

we

portant a branch of education will be duly appreciated and liberally rewarded. I remain, gentlemen.

Your

obedient servant,

H. Humphrey.

W.

A.

Duer.

anthon's series op classical works.

Letters of Recommendation

continued.
'

From

the

Rev. B. P. Aydelott,

From

personal much more from general reputation, I a high opinion of Professor very formed Anthons abilities to prepare a fall series of Latin and Greek Classics for the Accorduse of schools, colleges, <^-c. the vaingly, as soon as I could obtain rious authors edited by him, I procured a examination, careful them, and, upon was so impressed with their supjerior character, as to introduce tliem as fast
as possible into the different departments

President of the Woodward College, at Cincinnati, Ohio. From some acquaintance, but

the Rev. J. S. Tomlinson, D.D., President of Augusta Col-

lege,

Kentucky.

this opportunity to acknowledge the receipt {some time since) of four volumes of the Classical Series of Profes-

/ take

sor

Anthon of New- York ; and, after a careful examination of them, I can truly say that I am more than pleased ;

I am

delighted with them.

The avowed

that offurnishobject of the publication, ing accurate and uniform editions of all

the classical authors used in colleges and schools, is one that, in myjudgmeyit, has long been a desideratum in literature,

my charge. are very Delphiii editions good,so far as ancient geography, mytholconcerned are ; but in ogy, usages, 4'C-,
The various
respect to critical remarks ical illustrations they are of

of the institution under

am gratified to -find is about to be accomplished, especially by one so entiretask as Professor Anly equal to the thon has shown himself to be.
and I

and grammatlittle

The
taries,

worth

biographical sketches, commenand annotations with which the

re-

the best they were, in gewral, however,

volumes are accompanied, while they

we

had.

BvX besides being abundantly full and

fessor
clear in everything archaeological, ProAnthon has done more, in the

the erudition and flect great credit upon research of the author, cannot fail to ento the student, in a high degree, the attractions and value of classical reading. As an evidence of the estim ate

hance

editions of the classical authors prepared strucby him, to unfold the grammatical ture, and thus throw light upon the mean-

we place upon
to

ing and spirit of the original, than any other commeutatur whom I have consultIt is a striking, and, I think, decisive, proof of their superiority, that the
ed.

the series, we have hitherused it as far as it was attainable, and with shall, great pleasure, avail ourselves

students show in their recitations that they have read his notes and profited by them, which they never seemed to

of the opportunity now afforded to adopt Allow vie to add. that the whole of it. the neat, tasteful, and, at the same time, substantial style of the niechanical execution of the work, fully sustains the well-earned reputation, in that respect, of
the enterprising establishment wlience
it

me

to

have done when using other edi-

tions.

emanates.

Some time ago I commenced a careful collation of the Greek Grnmniar of the same author with those of Butmann, Valpy, kSj-c, making full notes as I went
along, with the design of preparing a re-

Respectfully, Your obedient servant, J. S. TOMLINSOiY.

,

From Alonzo Church,

P.D., Pres-

view of

it

at the request

of the editor of
periodical,

an extensively circulated

and

ident of the University of Georgia.

such xvas my conviction of its peculiar fitness fur the use of schools, that I have since recommended no other to our pupils.

As far as time and a press of business would permit, I have examined these volumes, and am much pleased with them. They are, I think, well

and adapted to the wants of, particularly, I doubt not, Professor Anthon's young students, and mil, classics are got up {though they are far furnish what has long been a desideraour preparatory schools, viz., cheaper than the Delphin editions) ought tum in to form no small recomme7idation of cheap, yet correct editions of the common Our students purchase, study, classics, accompanied with judicious them. and preserve them with manifest pleas- English notes. I do not hesitate to and whatever has these effects upon say that, U'ere I engaged in giving inure ; struction to youth from these authors, I the pupil, will certainly do much to promote the cause of sound and thorough should prefer the editions of Professor Anthon to any xvhich 1 have seen. classical

J would add

that the neatness

taste

with which

learning,

B. P.

AVDELOTT.

A.

Church.

anthon's series op classical works.

Letters of

Recommendation

continued.

From

Ihe Rev. M. Hopkins, D.D., President of Williams' College, at

Williamstown, Mass.
Professor Anthon has unquestionably done much service to the cause of classical learning in this country by his editions of the Latin classics, to the

From the President and Faculty of Miami University, at Oxford, Ohio.

These three volumes, enriched by a copious and valuable apparatus of critical notes, and judiciously arranged historical, geographical, archceological, and legal matters, furnished by so ripe a scholar as Dr. Anthon, are specimens well calculated to recommend ihe series of which they are the commencement. They are well adapted to promote thorclassical learning, and are entitled a high grade of popular favour. By order of the Faculty, R. H. Bishop, President.

given

public with unusual accuracy

and

ele-

gance from your press.

CcBsar,
their

His

Satlust.

and Cicero cannot fail to find way iyito very extensive use, and to
invitirig

render the entrance upon classical studies

much more

and profitable.

ough
to

M. Hopkins.

From Wilbur /
that
in our
office

Fisk, D.D., President of the Wesleyan Umversity, at Middletown, Conn.

ain highly gratified to notice that

From RuFus Babcock,

late President of

Jr.,

D.D.,

you have commenced a series of the classics under the editorial

accomplished
scholar,

WaterviUe Col-

lege, in Maine.

supervision of

Anthon of Columbia

Professor

/
care,

College.

No man

have examined luith considerable and with high and unmingled sat-

m what estimation he

only be known that an edition of his " Horace'" has been published in London, a?id the publishers informed me that the entire ediit

as a classical scholar,

country is better qualified for this than Professor Anthon. To show is held in. England
jieed

isfaction, your recent edition of Professor Anthon's Latin Classics. The dis-

tinguished editor of Horace has rightly judged, that in order to elevate the range and standard of scholarship in this country,
it

is

requisite to facilitate the thor-

tion
that,

had met with a ready sale ; showing notwithstanding the numerous ediof
this

tions

standard work by the first

scholars in England, the credit of the work by our Ainerican scholar had carledr
it successfully through the English market, and that, too, by virtueof its in-

trinsic merit.

sar, Cicero,

me, and show that there

Your cditio7is of his Caeand Sallust are now before

is

thoroughly quainted with those three prime authors, Ca:sar, Salkist, and Cicero, than by any other helps within my knowledge. I need not minutely the various
specify

ough acquisition of those elementary tert-books which are usually first put into the hands of pupils. By the beautiful volumes which you have now given to the public from his pen, more has bee-n done to inake the student ac-

from
ace. ries

Alloiu me, gentlemen, to uponthemiiidofthe young student, and tender, will co>itnbute much, I through you, my hearty tJianks to Protrust, to foster in the rising generation Anthon the fessor valuable servery of scholars a taste for vice he has performed in aid for the ancient classics. of the great cause of classical Wilbur Fisk. learning. May he continue his labours for the public good.

copious cannot fail to shed a flood of light

falVmg off the reputation of the edition of HorThe notes and commenta-

no

points of excellence by which these books are distinguished, their practical value
will

ers

and

immediately be appreciated by teachlearners.

From Silas Totten,

D.D., President of Washington College. The volumes which I have examined I entirely approve, and think them better adapted to the purposes of classical instruction than anij edition of the same
authors yet published in this country. The well-known ability of the learned editor admits no doubt the excellence of

RuFus Babcock,

.Ik.

UZP Highly complimentary letters have also been received Iroiu Jere-

miah Day,
College
;

I) D.,

President of Yale

of the volumes yet

Josiah Quincv, LL.D., President of Cambridge Coland from several other distinlege ;
guisiied scholars,

from

to be puhli.shed.

some of which

will

S.

ToTTEN.

be published hereafter.

anthon's series of classical works.

Commendatory Notices
"

continued.
;

The

teaching
is

great problem in the art of is, that the teaclier should

forget that he
ber that
is all
pil.

knows himself what he

;

teaching toothers

should remem-

what Cimmerian
is

clear as

day to him darkness to his pu-

" Mr. Anthon is essentially aiding the acquisition of the ancient tongues and we trust that he will enjoy all the success which his valuable labours so justly merit."
Christian Intelligencer.
.

This problem, long since proved, Professor Anthon has, in our opinion, been the first to put in practice and, in consequence, his are, we may well believe, the best classbooks ex;

tant."

Knickerbocker Magazine.
"To
relieve

youthful burden we count no small praise. We hold it, indeed, to be among the noblest ends to which true learning can ever devote itself. We are sure it never apsuch conpears more pleasing than in descension and, what is still better, we know no labour more useful to

the

mind from

this bootless

..." So correct in text, so elaborate in commentaries, so vastly superior, in clearness, depth, and variety of information, to any which have gone before, that no man, however thoroughly imbued with-classic lore, has any right to consider these admirable works beneath his notice, or suited only to the half-formed intelChristian lect of young beginners." Advocate and Journal. " Teachers owe an incalculable

the community. This meed of praise, whatever il be, belongs unquestionably to no scholar on this side of the Atlantic, and to few on the other, more truly than to Professor AnChurch Quarterly Review. thon."

debt of gratitude to this accomplished and patriotic scholar, for the masterly and successful effort that he has made to put them in possession of the means of raising themselves and pupilsto a high standardofscholHe has laid a sure Ibundaarship.
tion,

on which, with ordinary labour,

they
will

may

rear a superstructure that

these points Professor Anthon's schoolbooks if it be not a sin to caH those schoolbooks which clever men might study to advantage are surpassmgly excellent and able ; while exercising the
all

"In

throw its shadow across the Atlantic waves, and win for America the veneration of those who have hitherto looked to us as moving sluggishly on in the paths of Grecian and Roliterature." Family Magazine.

man

" Professor Anthon deserves the most painfully critical research, he thanks of the country for the zeal with has not disdained the lucidus ordo ; which he has undertaken, and the he has remembered that he was wriability with which he has thus far exting for the education of the young Rochester Repubhis task."

ecuted, unpractised mind, not for the culti- lican. vation of the ripe and ornate intellect " This is a beautiful edition, with and hence, while his English notes, hand every whether critical or explanatory, are very valuable notes, by a It forms a most as copious and comprehensive as the way competent. to the stock of addition valuable most abstruse commentary, they are, classics published by the Harat the same time, so simple and so useful luminous as to be within the scope pers." N. Y. Ajnerican. " As a philologist and a classical of the earliest and feeblest reason. have only to say in conclu- scholar, Professor Anthon has no su.... and his at once school that ought sion, every perior in the United States to adopt this series of works, which schoolbooks are deservedly popular, may, *n truth, be looked upon as in- both in England and in this country." iV. i''. Times. troducing a new era into the educa" On this side of the Atlantic at tion of our country, and as reflecting much honour on the talent of the least, and to some extent beyond it, learned professor by whom they were Professor Anthon is equally known prepared." ilmeriC(i?i Monthly Mag- as admirably qualified to edit and enazine. rich a version of the classics for our " They go beyond any of the ele- own times and the higher seminaries scattered mentary works printed here, which of learning now so thickly The NewBoston Ad- through our country." is saying a great deal."'
;

We

vocate.

Yorker.

anthon's series of classical works.

Commendatory Notices

continued.
in the

To all classes the matures! scholar and the merest tyro, the man of elegant and easy learning and the these admirable laborious student works will prove a most invaluable

"

"

There are few scholars

civilized world, comparatively speaking, possessed of the critical acumen

acquisition."

Commercial Advertiser.
scholar

"

The profound

under

whose supervision these excellent works are put forth to the world is
as well

known on the Continent of Europe as he is on our own shores and is, perhaps, theonly son of Amer;

who has ever attained that degree of fame for classical attainments which should constitute him an authority second, if second, only to the great names of Knglisli or of German criticism the Heynes and Bruncks, the Elmsleys and the Porsons, and the Bentleys, who have devoted so much time and labour to minute investigation and clear exposition of the great works of old." N. Y. Courier and Enquirer. " The notes are all that notes
ica

and deep insight into the minutiaj of the Greek language, which alone could enable them to produce the matter with which the pages of these admirable works are stored there are still fewer who, possessing the requisite degree of knowledge, are at the same time gifted with the tact and skill in the science of education which are so eminently visible in N. Y. Express. their manner."
:

high character of Professor Anthon's scholarship, and the universal favour with which his books of elementary classics have been received, render any other notice than an announcement of their publicaThe present voltion unnecessary.

"

The

ume

can be

; copious but not diffuse, learned but not pedantic, luminous, and replete with varied and most enN. Y. Eventertaining knowledge."

exhibits the same untiring research, and the same accurate learning which have characterized all his labours."- iV. Y. Gazette. " There is a very prevalent and very mistaken idea current, that schoolbooks are, for the most part,

mere

compilations.

Truly

good

ing Star. "

.
. .

production of a learned philologist, and one of the soundest classical scholars of the age, and one who, to his learned researches, adds the qualification of a most sucNo stucessful practical teacher.
.

The

schoolbooks are the most difficult things in the universe to produce, and these are such par excellence." The Sun. " Professor Anthon is acknowl-

dent can listen to him without admiTo this ration and advantage high praise his editions of the classics bear ample testimony and, judging from the experience and opinions of educated men in our country, and particularly in Europe, we have no fear that their claims will not be admitted and awarded to him when once clearly and thoroughly under;

edged by the best judges, not only in this country, but m Germany and England, to be one of the ripest clas-

And this sical scholars of the age. series of books will be used in all our
academies and colleges. The editor and the publishers will by this effort do a good service to American as
well as ancient literature." Common School Assistant. " Professor Anthon's classics are
too well
to require any comHis editions of Sallust, Caesar, Cicero, Horace, Otc, have gained him a reputation for deep erudition and correct criticism which has been by no means confined to

stood." 0/ieida Whig.

"

known

mendation.

The

series of classical school-

books published under the superintendence of Professor Anthon has already obtained a celebrity to which our own commendation would add
little

this

extension. These works all appear to be collated and edited with unusual care, and they are published in a style of elegance too rarely characterizing our schoolbooks, in which it is important that the eye and the taste, as well as the understanding, should be allured." N. Y. Mirror.

country."

Providence

(R.

I.)

Journal.

lO" In addition to the above, numerous fax^ourahle notices of Anthon'' s series htivc been received from the 7nost respectable sources, from soine of which the publishers may hereafter present brief extracts.

SYSTEM
OF

GREEK PROSODY AND METRE,

FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES;

TOGETHER WITH

THE CHORAL SCANNING

OF THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS OF ^SCHYLUS, AND THE AJAX AND (EDIPUS TYRANNUS OF SOPHOCLES.

TO WHICH ARE APPENDED

REMARKS ON INDO GERMANIC ANALOGIES.

-

BY

CHARLES ANT HON,

LL.D.,

JAY PROFESSOR OP THE GREEK AND LATIN LANGUAGES IN COLOMBIA COLLEOK, NEW-YORK, AND RECTOR OF THE GRAMMAR-SCHOOL.

N E W-Y O R K
HARPER
&.

BROTHERS,

62

CLIFF-STREET.

18 39.

Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1838, by

Charles Anthon,
in the Clerk's Office of the Southern District of

New-York.

"FA
CO

o 9

TO

on

THE

REV. JOSIAH W. GIBBS,

IN

PROFESSOR OF ORIENTAL LANGUAGES

YALE COLLEGE,

THIS WORK
n
f

JJnscribcU

AS A MEMORIAL OF FRIENDSHIP,

AND A TOKEN OF HIGH RESPECT FOR ONE WHO

j3

IS

EQUALLY CON-

iSPICUOUS

FOR HIS ATTAINMENTS IN ORIENTAL LITER-

r>

<c

ATURE AND COMPARATIVE PHILOLOGY.

PREFACE.
An
accurate acquaintance with the Prosody and

Me-

tres of the

Greek Language

is

so necessary an accom-

cate

paniment of true scholarship, that any attempt to advoits claims to the notice of the student would be entirely superfluous.
It

must be admitted, however,

to

that,

while

all

among

us are very ready

acknowledge the
only a
to

importance of

this

branch

of learning,

small
it

number, comparatively, have been induced and the result is, subject of careful study
;

make

that, in

mat-

ters appertaining to

Greek Prosody and Metre, many

to

of those

who ought

be better acquainted with these

topics display oftentimes a very lamentable want of ac-

curacy.

What

renders this the more provoking

is,

that

they

who come among

us from transatlantic seminaries

studies are

of learning,

where metrical

much more
sit

care-

undertake to fully pursued, frequently

in

judgment

upon our violations of the laws of prosody and metre, when they themselves are at best but very poor representatives of the metrical
their

knowledge which

exists in

own

countries.

One

great obstacle to the successful cultivation of

VI

PREFACE.

prosodiacal studies

among us has undoubtedly been

commencement

the

want of a proper
encumbering

treatise

on the subject, which, without

of his

the student, in the

career, with any unusual burden, might, nevertheless, lay

before

him such

a view of matters connected with the

prosody and metres of the Greek tongue as would enable him to pursue his investigations in this department

with satisfaction and advantage. has been prepared with this view.
all

The

present treatise

Its object is to give

the

necessary information appertaining to Greek

in

prosody

a simple garb, and one which

may

invite

rather than repel.

The more

intricate questions con-

nected with the subject, and on which the ingenuity of

European scholars loves

to exercise itself, are here puris

posely omitted, and nothing

offered but

what may

prove immediately and permanently useful. The Choral Scanning is intended to initiate the young
scholar into a department of metrical study, which, to

the inexperienced, bears a very formidable

in reality, with the exception of a

name

but

is

few knotty points that occasionally present themselves, a very pleasing branch of investigation, and a very inviting field for the ingenuity of the student.

Choral Scanning has hitherto

as a
to

been regarded by many among us chance-work, with no certain rules

us when

mere piece

of

guide or inform
that the aids af-

we

are correct.

It is

hoped

forded in the present treatise on this part of the subject

will tend to
tainty,

show

that there is

even here

much

of cer-

and much that

may

lead to satisfactory results.

PREFACE.

Vll

The

introduction of remarks on Indo-Germanic Anal-

ogies into a

explanation.

work on Greek Prosody may require some The observations in question were intend-

accompany a Greek Grammar recently published, but were withheld from the fear of making that work too
ed
to

voluminous and expensive.

They

are given here, at

may

the end of the Prosody, partly because no other avenue itself for years by which they can be

present
4

brought forward, and partly out of compliment to the

distinguished philologist
cation of this

whose name graces the dedivolume, and who has done more for comAmerican
scholar.

parative philology than any

Had

he undertaken

to write

on this subject, the remarks ap-

pended

to the

present work would never have appeared.

it

The
of

Sanscrit Question, as
fair
all is

has been termed, has

us.

never obtained a
its

hearing

among

On

the part

opponents

mere

idle assertion,

and the spe-

cious, but most erroneous and unscholarlike, theory of

Dugald Stewart appears

troversy completely
youth, too,

to

them

to

have

laid the con-

at rest.

Many

of our half-learned
;

have caught the infection

and believing, of

course, that

what

is

delivered on this subject with orac-

ular gravity, sometimes even from a professor's chair,

must be

the result of careful investigation, and in every

almost regard point of view deserving of being followed,

the term Sanscrit as a species of by-word and mockery.
It is

hoped

that the observations

appended

to the pres-

ent volume will

make

the matter in controversy

more

clearly understood, until

some

abler pen shall present

Viii

PREFACE.
with a complete and overpowering view of TndoIt is

lis

Germanic Analogies.
that

mortifying, indeed, to think

any remarks

at all
is

should be

now needed
our

to

prove

that the Sanscrit

not a mere piece of patchwork from

it

the Greek.
is
still

Yet so

is.

What

in

own country

and conclusive regarded as a most ingenious

continent of Europe, subject the

theory, would, on the

individual,

who might be

bold enough to advocate

it,

to

direct imputation of lunacy.

Columbia College, Aug. 20, 1838.

iWV\'WV\^'Wi\^'\i^%'%^^^'V%'WV\ W%/\'WWV^VA'W/\X^W^^/V\/V'WWX^^/VX WVXS/Vl^

PART

I.

PROSODY
<WV*WV* VW%XiW^

GREEK PROSODY.
I.
I.

Prosody

(TrpoGcpSia), in its

common acceptation

at the

of syllables, or the time present day, treats of the quantity

occupied in pronouncing them.

II.

The

ancient Greek grammarians, however, connected

much more comprehensive meaning, and made it refer to everything by which the sound of a syllable was affected. Hence prosody, with them, included also the
with the term a
accents and breathings.'
III.

Hence

it

is

clear

how

the ancients

came

to

speak

of seve7i proper prosodies, for they included the threefold accent, the twofold breathing, and the twofold quantity.^

IV.

To
it

what are called the upon

V.
[ndO/j),

these seven proper prosodies the ancients added affections of a word, or the influences
three improper prosodies

The

and denominated these improper prosodies? were the apostrophe,

hyphen, and hypodiastole.* VI. Hence prosody, in

its strict acceptation, is tenfold^ the seven of consisting proper and the three improper kinds. In the present treatise, however, we will confine ourselves

merely

to the consideration of

Quantity and Metre.

1. Bekkcr, Anecdot. Grac. 676, 16. 'OpH^ovrat ovv ttjv irpoaudlap ovTug, K. T. A. Compare Spitzner, Pros. Gr. <J 1. 'lareov on rpix^S ^^J2. Chcerobosciis, ap. Bekkcr, A. G. 703, 24. erai rj npoaudia, k. t. /I. Ijtl to. nddij ovk elal KVplu^ 3. Bekker, 683, 22. 6e Xpr; yLvuaKEiv

"irpoaotSiai,

oAAa

Karaxpri'^TiKu^, k. t.

/I.

4.
5.
liivT},

Bekker, I. c. Bekker, 674,

1. Tlpom^cUac elal dsKa, o^ela, (iapcia, KEpiaizidnaKpd, ftpaxeia, daaela, ipiXrj, dn6aTpo<j)OC, v(plv, koL virodiaaTok'^.

GENERAL RULE.
II.

Every syllable is either long or short or, in other words, requires a longer or shorter time for its pronunciaI.
;

tion.
II.

To these two
is

kinds of syllables a third

is to

be added,

which

called the

common

a syllable which

may

or arbitrary. By this is meant be used as long or short as, for ex;

ample, a short vowel which may be short or long before a mute with a liquid, or a short final syllable which may be

lengthened by crasis or otherwise.'

III.

GENERAL RULE.
In Greek, the vowels e and o are short by nature,
0)
ij

and

are long by nature, and a,

1.

i,

v, are doubtful.

ing

said to be short by nature, the meanby its natural pronunciation, being On the other hand, equivalent merely to one short time.
is
is,

When
that

a vowel
is

it

short

a vowel long by nature being

equal to

is

long by

its

natural pronunciation,
7]

two short times.

Thus

is

equivalent to

ee,

and
2.

0) to oo.

Hence

it

follows, that the short

;

vowel

has

tj

for its

and the short vowel o, in like corresponding long one manner, has w for its long. But in the case of a, i, v, there
is

no distinct mark or

letter

by which the eye can

tell at

the instant whether these vowels are long or short, and hence they are called doubtful.^
1. It is evident, that, in proper metres, the syllable, in itself arbitrary, has always the definite quantity of a long or short. Compare the lan" Qxtum in numeris guage of Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr. c. 9, () 1. tempora omnia ceria ac dcfi.nita esse dcbcant, facile intclligitur, in numeris ipsis nihil usqiiam posse anceps esse ; itaque, si quce inveniuntur
i. e., guce breves sint, quum longeB esse debeant, vel deheant breves esse, eas, quod ad numcrum altinel, pro talibus numerari, quales debeant esse, etsi non siid tales." 2. The doubtful vowels were called by some of the ancient grammarians 6!xpova, i. e., double-timed by others a[i<^L^o%a, i. e., indefinite. Comparo Bekker, An. Gr. 800, 27.

ancipites syllahce,
longcE,

quum

RULES FOR
3. It

LOlSfG

VOWELS,
that,

3
by

must be carefully borne in mind, however,

actual usage, every syllable in any particular case always has a definite quantity, either long or short and that, when
;

we do not mean that they speak of doubtful syllables, have anything doubtful in their nature, or wavering between

we

the same word long and short as regards

but only that they

have no corresponding long or short marks by which the at a glance. eye can detect their quantity
IV.

RULES FOR LONG VOWELS.

1.
I.

Nature.
t?

Every

syllable

which has an

or

is

long by nature

as, Tifiepa, c^ixog, &ic.

II.

Every diphthong,
;

or double vowel, likewise

as, alpo),

makes a

syllable naturally long

avpa, relxog, evpog, oUog,

ovdaq,
III.

[.irjTpvtd,

When
for

one, the syllable

dyopa, Sic. two vowels are combined by contraction into becomes naturally long as, adoj for deido ;
;
;

dpyog

depyog

Ipog for lepog.

is

IV. Every circumflexed vowel

Kvloa, pvfia.^

long

as,

dpa^a, ndaa,

Exceptions.
1
.

Every

final syllable,

which is long by reason of a vowel

;

or diphthong, can be made short if it stand in the thesis,^ and the next word begins with a vowel and in the epic

writers this shortening amounts almost to a constant rule

1.

;*

This will be again considered under the head of accent. thesis is that part of the foot on which the stress of the voice does not fall, and is opposed to the arsis ; thus, in ji/xevv, the first syllable has the arsis, the remaining two are in the thesis. 3. The principle on which this exception depends is easily explained. The 7? in r/ii^vTj, for example, is equivalent to se, and one of these epsilons being supposed to be elided before the initial vowel of the follow2.

The

of course, short by nature. In other ing word, the other epsilon remains, words, the final vowel of 7//ievt} loses, as it were, a portion of its natural by the sinking of the voice and by the vowel immediately followlength,

EXCEPTIONS.
358) afjicpio 6/zwf [lb. KXvdi. fiev 'Apyvporo^' [lb.
;

as, -qiiivfi kv fi-evdeaacv [Horn. II. 1,

23)

dexdal dnotva 177), &c.

;

[lb.

57)

2.

On

measure when

the contrary, the long vowel retains its natural it falls in the arsis of the foot. The follow-

ing Homeric verses contain examples of both kinds.'

'HfiSTepu kvl oiKiJ, kv 'Apysi,
TZef, 6 filv KreaTOv, 6
6'
rrj'kodi. Trdrpj^f.

(//. 1,

30.)
{II. 2,

up'

Evpvrov 'AKTopiuvog.

621.)

Nevertheless, the epic, and, after their example, the elegiac poets, sometimes permit the long vowel or diph3.

thong
4.

to retain its quantity

even in the thesis of the

foot.'^

long vowel or diphthong, with a vowel following, is sometimes shortened in the middle of a word as, einralog,
;

OLog, vtog, roTovrog, rovTOv'i^

ing
it

&c.

it. So the d in ajifo is equivalent to two omicrons, one of wliich loses before the following vowel, while the other remains short. In like manner, the diphthongs ai. in dcxOai., and ev in are

(lev,

supposed

each
1.

to lose a vowel.

one of the vowels has been supposed to be elided, and Here, a single short vowel remains, this latter, being in the arsis of the foot, receives the stress of the voice, and becomes long again. Thus, in the foot pw EVL, the syllable pu is in the arsis, and hence, though one of the omicrons composing the omega is supposed to be cut oif before the initial vowel of kvl, and only a single omicron remains, that omicron is nevafter

ertheless lengthened by the stress of the voice falling upon it. On the other hand, in the foot oltid ev, the omega is in the thesis, and hence, after this vowel has lost one of its component omicrons before the next word, there is no stress of the voice upon the other omicron, and therefore
2.
it

remains short.

is not correct to say that this mostly takes place only in words which a digamma was originally prefixed. Passages frequently occur these are found without the support of the digamma. in which lengthenings 3. Homer only shortens certain forms, of which kfiiraTog and oioc are two instances. With the Attic dramatic poets, the shortening of the diphthong at is much more rare than that of oi, and occurs principally in the words rfet/latof, yEpalo^, Kpv(^alog, and that, too, mostly in anapffistic and dactylic metres. (Compare remarks under the head oi Hiatus in the iambic trimeter, page 67 of this volume.) The comic, later epic, and epigrammatic poets have proceeded the farthest in this shortening of long syllables. Upon the whole, it must be remarked, that the shortening here referred to takes place most frequently in the diphthongs 01, and ai, which the grammarians never regarded as a full long quantity

It

to

in the thesis of the tone.

al,

only

time.

Hence the ancients attribute to the article Bekker, An. Gr. 821, 29. Spitzner, Gr. Pros. p.

of,

8.

POSITION.
II.
I.

Position.

short or doubtful
letter (^, ^,
i/))

vowel before two consonants or a

almost always long
;

double
Ofifia,
II.

is

as,

areXXd),

avTciyo), rpdnei^a, afid^a, dlxpa.

These two consonants may belong

;

to the

same word

with the vowel

to the
as,

same Twv dfiodev ye,-&ed dvyarep

as, eanepog, or one of them may belong word, and the other to the succeeding word
;

AiOf, or both
;

may

be found
-^vrirbv

at the

beginning of the following word

as,

dvdpd

Eovra.
Exceptions.
1.

short

H, V, p), to

vowel before a mute, folloAved by a liquid (A, remains short, provided the mute and liquid belong
syllable."
li-

one and the same

2.

This

rule,

however, of a A^owel before a mute and

following limitations
:

quid, is itself subject to the

I.

the oldest Greek poets mostly avoid the of syllables before a mute and liquid, and shortening generally permit it only when the form, followed by p

Homer and

or X, could not

otherwise be adapted to the verse.

usually shortens the preceding syllable only before (ip, 6p, &p, Kp, up, rp, (pp, XP, and before
kX, nX, tX, x^In scanning the dramatic writers, the following cases must be carefully noted.
(a.)

Hence Homer

II.

short

vowel before a

soft

mute

(tt, k,

t), or

an

aspirate ((/>, x^ ^) followed by a liquid, is much rather left short than lengthened by the Attic poets.^
{(3.)

short

vowel before a middle mute

(/3,

y, 6), fol-

1. The syllable, therefore, always remains long, 1. When the liquid 2. In compound words, whether stands before the mute as, 6epKu. 3. When a word ends the liquid precede or follow ; as, EnTiajiCmvu. with one of the two consonants, and the next begins with the other ; as, 4. When the vowel is long by nature ; Iplc; jneyulrj, Myovalv nuvTee;.
;

as, I'Kdd'kov, firjvvrpov. 2. Porscn, ad Eurip. Orest. 64.

A2

Erfurdt, ad Soph. Aj. 1109.

RULES FOR SHORT VOWELS.

lowed by
tragedy
(y.)
is

p, is short in the

comic writers, but in

mostly long,

short

vowel before a middle mute, followed by

is almost always long. In such are in but Euripides syllables always long are and iEschylus, Sophocles, Aristophanes, they

any

liquid except p,

sometimes
(d.)

short.'

The

tragic writers occasionally leave

a vowel

short before the

III.

two

liquids fiv.^

As
the

the epic writers, according to

(2,
1),

what has

just

been

remarked

employ
in

this shortening chiefly

when
to

word cannot

any other manner be adapted

the measure, this circumstance explains why sometimes even two mutes, as an, and the double consonant
4',

vowel short

neglect length by position, and leave the preceding as, for example, before ZaKvvdog, ZeJieia,
;

'LKanavdpoc, OKenapvov, &c.*

V.

RULES FOR SHORT VOWELS.

I.

vowel before another vowel or diphthong

Still,

is,

gener-

ally speaking, short.

exceptions to this rule, course of the work.

II.

however, there are numerous which will be mentioned in the

Every

syllable

which has an

or o is short
;

by

nature,

unless lengthened by position or crasis

1.

as, endg.

Porson, ad Eurip. Hec. 298. Elmslcy, ad Eurip. Med. 288. This is opposed by some critics, and among tlie rest by Elmsley {ad Eurip. Bacch. 1132), but the rule is successfully defended by Por2.

son.

these shortenings, Knight {Prolog, ad Horn. 79) writes Kdjiav^pog, &c., and refers, in support of this opinion, to the coins of Zancle (Messana) of the seventh century B.C., which give the name of the place in the old form, AANKAH. Thiersch {Gr. Gr. () 146, 8) thinks that this form for the name of Zancle may have arisen from the defective orthography of ancient times. This, how3.

To remove

AaKVvOoc,

Ai'?i,eia,

ever, is very unlikely ; and we may cite, in support of Knight's opinion, the ovxi /iupaydov of Asclepiades {Anthol. Pal. vol. ii p. 501).
,

LENGTHENING OF SHORT SYLLABLES.

Exceptions.

The Greek

peels, especially the epic, often avail them-

selves of the aid of the arsis in lengthening a short syllable. This takes place, I. At the end of M^ords ; II. In the beginning of them III. In the middle of compounds.
;

I.

Lengthening of short syllables at the end of ivords.

1.

A
;

ened in
quid

short syllable at the end of a vi^ord is often lengththis manner, when the next w^ord begins vf'iih. a li-

as,
;

Kara

XiTcdpriv {II.
{II. 7,

6,

64)
;

de [xeXirjv

{II.

20,

322)
2.

vdarl VL^ovreg

425)

d-rrd

piov
is

{II. 14,

154).

A short syllable

at the

end of a word

also

sometimes

lengthened in a similar manner, when the next word begins with the semivowel a as, Kara, GV(peoloiv {Od. 10, 238).' 3. The Attics, in iambic trimeter verse, sometimes
;

as, Trapd pdOpoiat lengthen the short syllable before p which approach In the measures (Soph. Antig. 704).
;

nearer to the epic dialect, other syllables also occur lengthened.^

II.

Lengthening of short syllables

in the heginn'ing

of words.

Not only

at the end,

but also at the beginning of words,

the epic language lengthens a short or doubtful vowel by And the arsis, especially where two or more shorts follow. here the following cases may be distinguished :
1. It

happens least frequently that a pure short

as,
;

is

made
12,

long;

Ze(f}vpi7j

{Od.

7,

119); enlrovog
v, are far

{Ih.

423)
2.
1.

oiec {lb. 9, 425).

The
all

doubtful vowels a,

i,

more frequently

is observed the most rarely before mutes, and The reason is, that the aspibefore the aspirates 0, Xi & rates never admit of being doubled in pronunciation, whereas the liquids

Such lengthening

Mast of

easily are.
2.

Hermann, ad Soph. Antig.

1)4.

land, ad Eurip. Suppl.

El. Doctr. Metr. 45. MarkElmsley, ad Eurip. Iph. in Taur. 199,

I. c.

Id.

p.

Lips. ed.

RULES FOR DOUBTFUL VOWELS.

made long in the arsis of a tetrasyllable, or longer word as, for example, in such forms as dddvarog,
;

dKa^arog,
fiai,
(fee.

dve(pE?iOg,

The same usage

t

dndXaftog, dTTOveeoOai, dnodiu)occurs in many polysyllaIn proper names, as Pri-

bles,

with

and v

as, Aloyevrjg, IlplanLdTjg, 'IraXia,

&vya~epa, vXaKoiiwpoi, &c.

amides, Italia, &.C., the Latin poets have followed the example of the Greeks.
III.
1

Lengthening of short syllables in the middle of verbs.

of

epic writers often lengthen by arsis in the middle compound words namely, when the latter part begins
. ;

The

with a liquid;
{lb.
2.

as, dtdneXeiori.

{Od. 9, 291);

Kardvevuv

490)

KardpiyrjM

{lb. 14, 226).'

have occasionally allowed themselves lengthenings of this kind, especially in proper names ;
tragic writers
as, 'iTTnofieduv, UapOevonalog.'^
3. The lengthening in the middle of the word before other than liquid letters is quite rare, and occurs mostly only in

The

polysyllabic words

as, Ailrtersog {II. 16,

;

174)

Hiocbaveog
{II.

{Anthol. Pal.
329).

1,

502, Appollonid. 6, 2)

aTcoepaeie

21,

VI.

RULES FOR DOUBTFUL VOWELS.

I. The chief object of Greek prosody is to reduce to rule the quantity of the doubtful or arbitrary vowels, a, i, v. II. This is done in various ways, among which the po-

sition of the
aid, as
1.

may

accent affords some, though not very extensive be seen by what follows.

Spitzner recommends, that, in the case of short vowels, the consonant which follows be doubled as, eTiXadov, uXXjikto^ (Gr. Pros. p. It is better, however, to write the consonant 15). singly, and suppose it to be doubled in pronunciation. 2. Compare Herman!), El. Doctr. Metr. p. 28. 3. In cases of this kind, many critics have recourse to the digamma. {S^tzner, de Vers. Gr. Heroic, p. 86.)
;

RULES FOR DOUBTFUL VOWELS.

"Use
I.

of accent in determining quantity.

Every
;

syllable

marked with a circumflex

nature

and, therefore,
it

when
this

this

is long by accent stands upon a

doubtful vowel,
Trpdyfia.
II.

shows

vowel

to

be long

as, KkvQi,

In like manner,

when

the acute accent stands upon

is

the penult of a polysyllabic word, the final syllable

as, ayiog, ayta, dyiov.
III.

long

On

So, also, Traideid, prjTopetd.^ the other hand, when a doubtful vowel stands at

the end of a word, and the penult has the circumflex, the final syllable is short as, KXvdt, Trpdynd?
;

IV.

The

final syllable is also short

;

when

the acute is

on

the antepenult as, rixpdrjTL, 'KepKvpd? V. In dissyllabic and polysyllabic words, when the final syllable is short and the penult has the acute accent, the

penult also is short ; as, Kpiaig (t), XvoLg {v), noXXaKig (a).* VI. As, however, the lenglh or shortness of a syllable can be obtained only imperfectly from the accent, it is ne-

cessary to seek for general rules, the usage of the poets. These
give.

which may coincide with

we

will

now proceed

to

Of the
I.

doubtful vowels in the end of words.

short
;

Final a

is

as, rpaTTS^a, 'ivd,

Imrord, rervcpd.

long vowel being equal to two short ones, and the accent which stood on the antepenult of ujiOi; being shifted to the penult of dyia, this penult becomes, in fact, the antepenult, beyond which the accent cannot be thrown back ; the final syllable being now equal to two vowels, and
1.

compelling, of course, the acute to be transferred to the l. 2. In this case, when we resolve the word, the acute stands over the antepenult, and the circumflex is formed from the union of the acute of the antepenult with the grave of the penult Now as, fidu'Xlov,/j.a?iAov. if the last syllable were long here, the acute would fall upon the fourth from the is to of which one the laws of the acute end, syllable contrary accent. 3. This follows from what has been said under note 1. 4. For, if the penult were long in this case, it would require to be marked with the circumflex.
;

10

EXCEPTIONS.
Exceptions.
1.

But a pure

is

long
;

as, 'Adfjvad, (j)iXtd, oiKvd,

ex-

cept verbals in rpia

;

as, ipaXrptd,
;

and derivatives from

and also Upetd, Kwdeid, as, aXridecd adjectives in rjg but (iaaiXsLd (a kingdom), and jSa(iaoiXeid {a queen) atXetd (adj. fem. royal).
;

2.

The
and

Doric a

for

7]

is

long

as, (pdfxd,

Alveid

and

also the Doric genitive in

7]g
;

a from nominatives

ki ag

as, 'Avvi6dg,

'Arpeldrig, d.
;

3.

da and 0a have the a long as, jSaoiXivdd, Ai]dd, "LiimiOd, except aKavdd and ifXiBd.^
in

Words ending

4.

Words ending
as,

in

pa not preceded by a diphthong

'>

;^

except dyKvpd, yecpvpd, bXvpd, Kspicvpd, and the perfect middle of verbs in pw ; as,
Kapd,
Trijpd,

x^P^

6ce(f)6opd, TTenopd.
5.

Words ending
Tavdypd.

in

pa with a consonant preceding

;

as,

dypd, Trerpd, aKearpd

6.

except a<podpd, GKoXcnevSpd,

All feminine adjectives from masculines in og

as,

Stuaid
7.

except did, Ttorvtd, id,

and

fiid.

Duals

in a, as

novad, and vocatives from nouns in ag,

as Alveid^ or poetical vocatives of the third declension, as Aaoddfid, JloXvddixd.

8.

The

accusative in ea, from the genitive (third declen;

sion) in 0)g
(3aai.Xeo)g
;

as, ll7]Xed,

from

JIr]Xeo)g

[iaoiXed, from

but in Homeric Greek,

jSaaiXrjog.^

TlrjXed,'^

from Urj-

Xrjog
1.

[iaoiXrjd, from

length of the final syllable in words ending in 6a and 6a, apLohcck. ad Phryn. 438. pears to be derived from their Doric origin.
2.

The
For

word traipa
pa.

two
3.

The &c., have the final syllable short. retains the long a, as being formed from 'irapoc, iriipa, EraiAgain, AWpa and '^aii^u'i take the long quantity on account of the consonants that intervene between the diphthong and final syllable.
TTEtpa, fieipu, a<patpu,

But the vocative

In

4.

Homer

(//. 1,

by

synizesis, Qr/aeu. genitive is TwJt'of.

5.

a from masculine nouns in Tjg is short. 265 Od. 12, 630) Q-rjaea is to be pronounced, So also Tvdia {11. 7, 222), of which the Homeric
in
;

Even

in Attic

Greek the a

is

sometimes shortened.

Compare

Porson, ad Eurip. Hec. 870.

FINAL
9.

av.

11
;

Nouns
Xeid}

in eta,

from verbs in evw

as, 7rpo0?/T(a, 6ov>-^'

II.

Final av

is

short

as, dv, TrdfiTrdv,

Aidv, fieXdv,

TToif]-

odv, ervipdv.
Exceptions.
1.

Masculines

in

av are long

as,

Ttrdv, Traidv.

2.

neuter adjective -ndv and hence the Attics aphave taken occasion to lengthen here and there to pear the forms compounded with it as, d^ndv, iTxi-ndv, -rrap;

The

d-rrdv.

But -ndinrdv and TTporrdv are probably everyshort.^

where decidedly
3.

Adverbs in av
trary,

On the conas, Xidv, aydv, irepdv. ordv and onordv follow the quantity of the sim;

ple dv.
4.
first declension, from a long nomfrom as, (piAidv, (ptXid; Alveidv, from Alveid^. But the accusative in av from a short nominative is

Accusatives of the
;

inative

short
TTS^d.

as, Tvorvidv,

from norvid

rpdne^dv, from rpd-

5.

The Doric genitive plural of the first declension in dv, as formed by contraction, is likewise always long ;
as, fisXulv, vvjtcpdv, for
fxeXioyv,
vvjj,(f)(ov.
tj,

So, also,

the Doric forms derived from those in

or produced

by contraction
III.

as, TTOLfj-dv,
;

Uooeiddv, 'AXKfidv.

Final ap

is

short

as, ovdp, vstcrdp, ixdicdp.

Exceptions.
1,

Monosyllables in ap are long

as, Kdp, xl)dp.

;

2.

The

adverb yap

is

properly short

but before ol and

similar

words

it

very often occurs long in epic lan-

the force of the following breathing.^ guage, through

1. For more special rules concerning eia, la, oia, and aia, in Attic and vii. ; of his Prosody, p Greek, consult Maltby, Lex. Pros. cc. v. ix. and Ixv., ed. 2. Bultmann, Gr. Gr. (^ 62, n. 5. 2. Blomfield, ad Mich. Pers. 42. 3. D'Orvillc, Vann. Crit. p. 391, scj.

12
IV. Final af
tpdg, 7indg.
is

FINAL
long
;

ag.

as, Alveidg, Trdg, Ifidg, ^iXidg,

rv-

Exceptions.
1.

Words
tive in

of the third declension not forming the geni;

&c.
2.

avrog as, i:ie?idg, fieydg, Xa^-rrdg, aeXdg, Kepdg, But rdXdg has the final syllable long.
Ttrdvdg, rv-nrovrag, noLnevag, The accudeclension, on the other hand,

The

accusative plural of nouns and participles of the

;

third declension
(ppevac,

as,

&c.

(but fiaaiXedg, from ftaoiXea).

first

sative plural of the

is

3.

always long. Adverbs in ag are short

is

4.

Kg

as, iriXag, drpefidg, ajKag. short in the second person of the difl^erent tenses
; ;

which terminate therein

XeXotirdg, necbvKdg.
5.

as, erey^dg, rey^eidg, olddg,

By

a license of the Doric dialect, forms in ag, othertoo,

;

wise long, are occasionally shortened, and that, even in accusatives plural of the first declension

as,

Moipdg {Theocrit.
(Id. 4, 29).

2, 160)

avrdg

{Id. 3, 2)

vvjicpag

II.
I.

Of Final

I.

Final

is

short

as, l^i, otX, fisXi, TvirrovaT, ridrjfii,

&c.
Exceptions.
1.

But the abridged form Kpl (for with the names of letters in i
;

KpCdrj) is long, together

as, ^l,

m,

&,c.

2.

paragogic t, added by the Attic comic poets and orators to certain pronouns and adverbs, is likewise

The

long
3.

as, ovtooI, vvvl,

ovtmoI, &,c.

So the

similar

in the

words

66l, ravrl, devpl,

i,

&c.

Adverbs ending in
I

either long or short, but

and formed from nouns, have the more commonly short such
;

as d[iox6h

d[jLaxr]Tl, Travdrjixi, iravoiuXi, aTTOVTjTi,

&c.

FINAL SYLLABLES.
But those which refer
to

13
l

nations have the

always

short; as, 'LKvdiorl, 'ApyoXiarl, Bap6api.OTX, &c.'

II.

Final cv

is

short

as,

TvnTOvalv, epXv, irdXlv, ttoXlv,

nplv, vlv, o(plv.

Exceptions.
1.

Final
fj,lv,

lv,

making Ivo^

in the genitive, is long

as, prp/-

Iktlv.

2.

Nouns

that

have two terminations

for the

nominative

as, 6eX({)lv (otherwise deA^if), uktIv, plv, Iv, Xiv.

3.

The

stances Sophocles

datives plural rnuv and v[dv, though in several inmakes rudv and viilv, and the epic
v[j,iiiv.

dialect has also a^iuv,

III.

Final ig

is short

as, dig, rplg, -noXlg, rvpavvlg,

&c.

Exceptions.
1.

Monosyllabic nouns, and those which have two terminations for the nominative as, Ig, Xig, pig, Klg, deX;

(j)lg,

CLKTlg.

2. Dissyllables

which make the penult of the

genitive

long

as, dxlg, (3aX6lg, nXrjlg, Kvrjjilg, Kp7)mg,

bpvlg^

&c.
3.

before the last Polysyllables with two short syllables

as,

&c. Parpaxlg, icaXa}ug, Kavovlg, irXoicaiug, pa(pavlg,

(but (iaaiXlg, itcsTlg).

1. Consult Blomfield, ad Msch. Prom. 216. According to this critic, the adverbs in question ought always to be written with a simple vowel The MSS. fluctuate between t and ei as, afioyr^TC in the termination. and ajioyT]Tei, uvari and avare'c. On the other hand, Lobeck, ad Soph. into the words Antig. 1213, maintains that the diphthong is admissible derived from adjectives ; but in those from substantives he would make
;

the formation conform strictly to the radical word.

p. 48. 2. "Opvtf,

Spitzner, Pros. Gr.

however, has the last syllable often short in tragedy, though In Homeric Greek always long in comedy (Porson, ad Eur. Hec. 204). thinks that we must assume a double is the final
Spitzner long. syllable form, opvir, Idor, Iv, and also opvcoc, favours this opinion.
Iv.

The

yet e.xtant plural bpvciq

14

FINAL SYLLABLES.

4. Adjectives in ig,

compounded from long forms, are

;

likewise long in the final syllable

6vKVT]iilg,

as, dXiKprjnlg, (3a-

&c.
III.

Of

Final V.

I.

Final v

is

short

as, ov,

yovv, yXvKv, daKpv^ aarv.

Exceptions.
1.

third person singular of the imperfect and second aorist of verbs in vfii as, 'idv, ecpv ; also of the sec;

The

ond person imperative

OjJiVV.

in

one of

its

forms

as, SeLKVv,^

2.

The names of
as, V,

the letters

[j,v,

vv

and

fictitious

words

ypv, &c.
is

II.

Final vv

short

as, oijv,

noXvv,

(3padijv,

^evyvvv.

Exceptions.
1.

The

accusative of nouns which have vg in the

;

nom-

inative
2.

as, IXvv,

Nouns
as,

that

have two terminations

;

l^Ovv, laxvv, d(ppvv, fivv. for the nominative

^opKvv (otherwise ^opKvg)

;

or vvog in the geni-

tive
3.

as,
first

noaovv.

The

person singular imperfect and second aorist

vfii
;

of verbs in
4.

as, ecpvv, edvv, edeiKVvv,

e^evyvvv.

Nvv, when equivalent to mmc. 'Nvv, the enclitic, though short in Homer (who uses also vv), is often long in tragedy, and always long in comedy.'
Final vp
is

III.

long

as, Trvp,

ndprvp.
;

Yet, in the ob-

V
^

lique cases, these

1.

make
:

Trvpog, TTVpL
:

fxdprijpoc, fidprvpt.^

The

third

person imperative, dsiKvvTo, follows the analogy of dtinAlcest. 1096.

Id. in Mus. Crit vol. i., p. 73. maintained, however, by EUendt, Lex. Soph.

vvBl.
2.

Monk, ad Eurip.
is

An

opposite doctrine vol. ii., p. 183.

3. The Etym. Mag. 506, 20, considers substantives in vp as scarcely Greek, and admits only such as fiuprvp, TJ'iOvp, Sec, but rejects forms like KepKvp, lAAt'o, to which Arcadius, de Ace. 19, 17, adds also Aiyvp.

INCREMENT OF NOUNS.
IV. Final vg
is

15

short

as, (iadvg, Kopvg, niixv^, Trpeofivg,

Bapvg,d^vg.
Exceptions.
1.

Nouns

in vg,

which have vog

in the genitive

as,

dx-

Xvg, IXvg, Ix^vg, vrjdvg, ocppvg, TrXrjdvg.^ 2. Nouns vv^hich have two terminations in the nominative
3.
;

as, <l?6picvg.
;

Monosyllables as, [.ivg, avg. 4. Terminations of verbs in vju

;

as, 6eiKVvg (second person singular present), dsiKVvg (participle), edeiKvvg, &c.

II.

Of
I.

the doubtful vowels in the increment

of nouns.
;

in the increment of

nouns

is

generally short
;

as,

oCdixa,

drog
;

Kpeag, drog
;

veKrap, dpog
i-iaKap,

jxeXav, dvog

av-

Xa^, diiog
dvog, &c.

"Apaijj, dj3og

dpog

aXg, dXog

rdXag,

Exceptions.
1
.

All increments in avog are long, except rdXdvog, [MsXa-

vog
2.

as,

Ttrdv, dvog

Udv, dvog

'Aviav, dvog

ira-

idv, dvog, Sic.

All increments in aaog, from nominatives in are long

;

a^ pure,
dnog
;

as,

ola^,

dKog

pva^, dKog

(paia^,

cpXva^, dKog, &;c.

3.

A is long in the dative plural of nouns, &c., that have a long penult in the genitive singular as, yiyag, av;

rog, dot

rvipag, avrog, dot

Txdg,

avrog, dot.

But

those which are syncopated in the sing-ular have the a

short
4.

Add

; as, dvdpdai, iraTpdoi. the following examples of nouns .

which have a

in

the increment long

3.

&pKvg.

But KliTvg, Eurip. Hippol. 227, and always so Monk, ad Eurip. I. c.

in tragedy.

Also

16
Kspag,

INCREMENT OF NOUNS.

INCREMENT OF VERBS,
" a lash
,"

17
QprjiKeg al-

(poivi^, iKog.

Homer, however, has

iip,

ways
Ixog
Ixog,
;

short.
I

VI. But

is

generally short in nouns in

;

t6og
;

and

i^,

as, %epvti/), l6og

arC^, Ixog

&pc^, rplxog

fxdoTi^,

VII.

" a gum." T is short in the increment of monosyllables in vg,

as, 6pvg,

vog

6pv6g

^ivg,

nvog.

VIII.
as,

is

also short in the increment of neuters in

SaKpv, vog. IX. T is likewise short in the increment of masculines

;

and feminines in vg and vp as, veicvg, vog IXvg, iXvog noun "nvp, IxQvg, vog iidprvp, vpog and also in the neuter
;

Txvpog.

But 6a6vg^ vdog, and

KU)p,vg,

vdog, must be excepted.

X.

T
;

is

generally short in the increment of nouns in

v^
;

and

vi/)

as, bvv^,
;

vx^^

^dXvif}, v6og
;

except SoCdv^, vKog

;

KOKKV^, vyog

imog

vnog K?)!)^, vKog yvip, virog while Be6pv^ has either vnog or vKog.
Ki]pv^,
as, (bopKvg or <!?6picvv, vvog.

ypvip,

XI.

Nouns

of two terminations, in vg or vv, have v long

;

in the increment

III.

Of the doubtful vowels in the increment of verbs.

I.

The

remains the same through

quantity of the penult in the present and imperfect all the voices and moods as,
;

Kplvo), eKplvov, Kplve, KplvoLfii, Kplvo), Kplveiv, KplVO)V, Kplvojj,aL, eicplvonrjv,

uplvov, &c. Most tenses have the same quantity in the penult as those from which they are formed as, ervnov, tvtto), ervII.
;

7T7JV, TVTTrjOOfiai.,

III.

rervna, erervnei-v, &c. Verbs in d^of, i^o), and v^o), increase short in the
;

fu-

ture
1.

as, dpTrd^cj, dood

vofii^o), lau)

k^.v^cj, vaco.^

but fiaari^, Xxo^, a species of gum. 2. The poets, especially the epic, not nnfrequently lengthen the forms of verbs in fw by doubling the sibilant letter, and that not merelv in the Thus, aixuuc 6' alxfiUGaovat {^IL 4, 324) ; arsis, but also in the thesis.
MttCTTt^, lyoQ,
,"

" a lash

and ETOLuaaaacaT'

'AiT/vy {lb. 10, 571),

&c.

B3

18

INCREMENT OF VERBS.

all

IV. Verbs in aw, when ao) is preceded by a vowel, and verbs in pao), have the penult of the future long as,
; ;

fidw, doo)

opao), doo)

dpdo), doco}

than

V. Verbs in do, when preceded by a consonant other as, andoj, doo) p, have the penult of the future short
;

yeXdiO, dao). VI. Verbs in aao) shorten the penult of the future, dropping one of the sigmas ; as, nXdoao), doco IfidooCi), daw.
;

VII. Liquid verbs, or those ending in Aw, juw, vo, pw, shorten the penult of the future, but in the first aorist active invariably take, either a long vowel or a diphthong;
as,

-ddXXo, ddXd), ed7]Xa

ecjyrjva
;

teXXo), teXo, eretXa

;

(patvoj, (pdvib,

dapOvvG), dapdvvcj, eddpdvva

anetpo), onepu), eo-

irapua?
VIII. Verbs in
loi,

not proceeding from roots in ^o, in; ;

crease long in the future as, icvXlco, loo) eadlo) has the t everywhere short."

kovlg), lao).

But

IX. Dissyllabic verbs in vco are for the most part long in the future and aorist ; as, 6vo), 6vgo), edvaa rpvci), rpvoo), erpvaa. Except irrvit), tttvom, ETrrvaa kvo), kvog), eKvoa
;
;

(3Xv(t),

fiXvoo), E(3Xvaa

and one or two others.

vo),

X. Polysyllabic verbs in

most part long

ioxvo), Icxvoo),

in the penult of the future

on the other hand, are for the and aorist as,

;

daupvo), daKpvao), edaKpvaa, Sic. XI. But polysyllables in vo) are for the most part short ;

loxvoa

as, dvvo), dvvoG)

dpvo), dpvoco

dcpvG),

dcpvao, Sic.
in vim,
;

XII. Verbs in
1.

v(o,
;

which have lengthened forms

for TTfpud),

Except Kepdu, dau and nepdu, aau, in the transitive signification ^^ I pass over,'''' has the a long. Clarke, ad II. 1, 67. 2. The principle on which the change takes place is this in the future the tone rests on -the last syllable, which is contracted, and hence
:

the previous syllable is short. In the aorist, however, the augment increases the number of syllables, and the tone consequently changes and travels back towards the root. 3. Compare Draco, de Mctr. 22, 25 ; 67, l.Etym. Mag. 575, 31.

The

apparent contradiction among the ancients, it being elsewhere Theod. Gaz. 77) laid down, that, except in ka{Const. Lose. 247, 20. 6lu, L is short in these penults, is ascribed by Spitzner and others to Gr. Pros. p. 87. corruptions in those passages.

INCREMENT OF VERBS.
for the

19
;

most part shorten the doubtful vowel

;

as, deiKvvo),

eSeiKvvov

fiiyvvo), e[j,iyvvov.

The

verbs

(j)v(j)

and

SvCi)

are not exceptions they do not furnish aorist. the second in but forms in only vju, complete XIII. Polysyllables in vfxi have the v everywhere short,
to this rule, since

active except in the singular number of the present tense, and voice, and in the third person plural of the same tense

voice

but ^evyvvfiev, ^evyvvre, as, ^evyvvfu, ^evyvvoi ^evyvvTov, ^evyvvvat, Sic. XIV. On the other hand, dissyllables in viu have the v everywhere long as, dvOt, dvvac, edvre, &c.
; ;
;

second aorist penult of the second future and is always short XIttg), XadC), as, ddfioj, eddfiov, eXdKpv6Cd, With the single exception of the 6ov, eKpv6ov, eXlirov.

XV. The

verb nXrjaacj, which, in the epic dialect, retains the long

vowel

in the penult

as, enXrjyov, er:Xr]y7]v}

XVI. The
lordai

third persons plural in aai,

;

and the feminine

participle in aaa, are always long

oi,
;

as, XeXotTrdoL, KEKpvcpdTvipdaa, ypd-ipdaa, &c.^ XVII. The augment, which, in verbs beginning with v or I, consists merely in lengthening this vowel, makes, of

iKe,TevO),

course, the initial syllable of the historical tenses long Ikstsvov, iKerevaa.

as,

XVIII.

The

active strictly follows the

doubtful vowel in the penult of the perfect measure of the root in the presis

ent

hence the middle syllable

in the present
;

short in most forms

which

have a

as, ypdcpoo,

yeypdcpa

but fluctuates

The Attic tragedians retain this in the sim1. Clarke, ad. II. 3, 31. shorten ple form {Eurip. Orest. 487 ; Eleclr. 1148) ; but, on the contrary, In the compounds as, hKnla-yelca {Med. 8), kK7t?Myevre( {Rhes. 287). like manner, besides ir^ayi^v in the passive, we have also lTjn'jyr]v and
;

So in Apollon. Rhod. 4, 1052, uTroTfi7]jVTEc. the like in later authors. the r was 2. The old form of the third person plural ended in -vtl into a and the v thrown out, the syllable, however, afterward changed So the primiremaining long ; as, MJ-oinavTi, TiE^.oinuvai, 'keT.oinuaL.
;

tive form of the feminine participle ended in -vaa, having the previous vowel long, and this afterward dropped the v, but retained the long quantity
;

as, Tinpdvaa, Tvipdaa.

20
in those with
;

^INCREMENT OP VERBS,
i

and v

as, Tpl6cj, rerpl(pa

;

but piTTTCj, ep-

but KpvTrro), KKpv(pa. pl(pa XIX. The perfect miadle, with the exception of those which have a in the root and change it into o (as, Tpe(po),
kvtttco, H,eKv<pa

and again,

e-pdipov, rerpocba), has usually a long

as, ayo) (I break),

vowel in the penult;

;

edya

av6dvo), sdda
;

Kpdi^b),

niupdya

rsTplya (ppioaoj, iretpplfca, &ic. But others are found short and, in old forms, some and 'necppdda the first vowel was shortened by position, after rejecting
piyeo),

epplya

rpci^o),

the intermediate consonant

as, jSedda,
is

yeyda, detdla,

rrecpva.

XX.
nult
;

Perfects, with

what

called the Attic reduplication,

have usually,

in polysyllabic verbs,
;

a short vowel in the pe-

as, dXetcjiOJ, dXt^Xicpa

opvaacx),

opwpvxa.

Still,

how-

ever, in Ionic poets, forms of this kind are occasionally

lengthened;

as, eiX'i)Xovda, viTejivrji.ivKe (II. 22, 491).

is

XXI.

When a

inserted in the third person plural of

the perfect or pluperfect, or of the optative, it is always short as, 6pG)pE'y(,dro, K.e.K,XLd.raL, neLdoidro, &ic.
;

XXII. The reduplication before the

short
;

root of verbs in

jil

is

as,

rWrmi,

dlduifit.

XXIII. In verbs in ^t the a is always short ; as, iorarov, Except in the third person plural in dot, and ujrdnEV, &c. in the masculine and feminine participles as, loTdOL, la;

rag, iardaa.

VII.

Of the

Doubtful Vowels in the Penultimate.

I.

Of a
is

in the penultimate.

I.

Penultimate a

diphthong, or a single consonant

II.

generally short before a vowel or as, dyXdog, Sdeig, kukoc.

;

But penultimate a

is

long in the following cases

DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN THE PENULT.

21

22

DOUBTFUL VOV/ELS
vavdyog,
^evdyog,

IN

THE PENULT.

oidycjv,

rdyog,
Tdyeo),
TteTTpdya,

Xoxdyoq^
(pdyog,
2.

and the

like.

Before 6 in
dndSog,^
OTTddl^,
dSo), ddoJv.

"

io satiate,'"

3.

Before

&

in

evyddrjg, Dor. for evyrjd'^g,

dvpaOev,
4.

eirpddrjv.

Before

ic

in

KVdKUV,
Before A in
veoddXrjg^

AdKWV,^
rpidKaq.

5.

ddXog,

KoddXog, PdXog.^
is

And

in KdXog,

which
Attic.''

long in Homeric Greek, but

al-

ways
6.

short in
jr*

Before

in

dfjiog

{mens),

DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN THE PENULT.

23

passed with the long quantity from the epic dialect to

the tragedians.

On

the contrary, klxo^vo in

Homer

and the epic poets, but klx&vo) in the So (pddvix) in Homeric Greek is long, but
In dissyllables in avoq
v6g, Kpdvog,
;

tragic writers.
in Attic short.'
(pd-

as, ddvoq,

dpdvog, Trdvog,

and compounds, dopvKpdvog, entKpdvoi',

jSovKpdvoc.
veavig,

And

in the following

TToXvdvcop,

(paaidvog,

evdvopia,
Vepjidvog,

edvog

{subtilis)^

lTOLlldVb)p,

'YovXidvog^
'Btdvo)p, (fee.

GTvydvojp, ^iXdvo)p,
8.

Before

tt

in

drrog,

"AvdTTog,

Uptdnog, vdnv, same as

OLvdni.

"Idnv^,
9.

Before p in
&viidpr]g,
fcdpig,

ridpa,

Xdpog,
(pdpog,^

Pdpig,

dpd

(preces)*

tpdpog,

Kardpa, ndpdpog,

ddpov,
evfidpig.

10. Before (Tin KOTndoo), opdoo), Spdoco,

and other futures

from verbs in a pure and

1.

pdo).
;

lieXxiveL,

Epic poets not unfrequently shorten verbs in aivu into avu Horn. II. 7, 64 olddvEi, lb. 9, 554 ; kv(5uvC, lb. 14, 73.
;

as,

2.

3. Later poets, however, sometimes shorten the long forms for the convenience of the verse ; as, 'loiiCTLdv6(, 'Omriuvog. Jacobs, ad Anth. Pal. 396, 582, 955. 1. a 4. 'kpa has three meanings 2. an imprecation 3. misprayer When Homer employs it in the first of these sigfortune, evil, or ruin. When he uses it in nifications, the penult of the word is always long. the second sense, the penult is common. When it occurs in his poems with the third mcaninjr, the penult is short. Among the tragic writers,
:

But uvo^, '^ vcstis." Yet AupSuvoc, liiKdvor, 'Hpidavug.

on the other hand, the penult

5.

is

145.

has Sandford,
<lapof

the penult
is

common

everywhere short. Mallby, ad verb. in tragedy {Monk, ad Eurip. Hip-pol.

notis).

Gr. Pros.

Homer,

the penult

p. 337, in always long.

On

the other hand, in

2^

DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT.

In the third person plural in aoi, and the feminine participle in

aaa

as, rervcpdoi, Lardai, edai, rv-ipdaa.

In the dative plural, third declension, where the penult of

the genitive singular
Tog, Tvipdai.
is

long by position

as,

rvipdv-

In

all

derivatives from verbs in

aw pure and pau

as,

opdoig, TTspdoig,
11. Before
;

&c.
derivatives from verbs in

rin

all

aw

pure and

paw as, opdrog, dedrog, ixepdrog, Idrpog, Kpdrrjp, &c. So iiKpdrog, " unmixed" from d and Kepdo) but uKpd" In like manrog, unrestrained," from a and Kpdrog.
;

ner distinguish between the compounds of dpdojiai and " much wished for" but Thus, noX-vapdrog, epdixaL.
TToXviipdrog, '''much loved."

In

names

of nations and proper

Teyedrrjg.
;

names
also

as,

'Aoidrrjg,

liTTapTidrrjg,

And

in the feminines

formed from them

as, 'Aaidrig,

Midedrig.

Add

like-

wise names of rivers, mountains, and islands; as, EvBut forms of this kind (ppdrrjg, ]>ii.(f>drrjg, AevKdrT]g.
proceeding from short roots have the short vowel
i^aXiJ.d~rjg,
;

as,

TaXaTTjg, "Lapiidrrig, &c. In those words which, coming from Ionic forms, received

long a by Dorism, and passed thence into the Attic and also the common dialect ; as, kadri.
In the following words
or?/.
:

DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT.

II.

25

Of L

in the Penultimate.

I. Penultimate i is generally short before a vowel, or diphthong, or a single consonant as, irevTa, lov, mdog. II. But penultimate i is long in the following cases ;
;

Before a
1.

voioel.

In the following Homeric feminines, which, as the two columns indicate, have the penult long in Homer

and the epic

dialect, but short in Attic*

Epic.
depylri^

Attic.

apyta.
advfxla.

advfUTj,
aTTLCrlri,
diraidtTf,

dntaria.
diraLdla.
drifiia.

dTifUTjj
eoTiT],

korla.

KaKoepylr],
opjilr],
fKjjpCT],

KaKovpyla.
opfiia.
fl(j,)pla.

'npoedplrj,

TravoTrXiT],
Tcpodvfilr],

TTpoedpla. TxavoTrXla.
TTpodvfila.

Tvpavvli],
aiOplr}^

Tvpavvta.
aldpXa.

true reason for this lengthening among the epic writers is to 1. be found, according to Spitzner, in the easily possible protraction of the doubtful vowel in pronunciation, proofs of which are furnished also

The

by The epic as, Surrjp and Sureipa for SoT^p and Soreipa. would allow the more this in readily protraction poets pronunciation, as
other vowels
it
;

adapt a variety of otherwise useit was natural that the Attic poetry should use these forms short for the iambus, which was also, indeed, required for the common pronunciation. If this view of the subject be well founded, it will not be necessary, with Maltby, to explain forms like aKOfiiaTlri by contraction from uKo/iianeri, for which course no sufficient reason can be discovered in heroic verse. Neither is it of any avail to write eia for la in this kind of words, as it contradicts the derivation, and is, indeed, correct in avai6eL7) and some others, but not in uti/utj and the like. Spitzner, Gr. Pros. p. 118. 2. Long in Solon, not found in Homer. Short in Aristophanes, Plui. 1129, but long in the Nubes, 571.
difficulty, to

enabled them, without

less forms to the heroic measure.

And, on the other hand,

26
2
.

DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT.

'Avla and KaXla are long in both Homeric and Attic AnGreek,' the Homeric form being dvCr] and KaXiT]. other term Kovia (Hom. kovIt]) has the penult conunon
in

Homeric Greek, but

in the singular
short.
it

more frequently
the Attic

long, in the plural

always

Among

employs with a short penult, but in the dialogue with a long In the tragic writers it occurs thrice, and each one.
writers, Aristophanes

in the lyric passages

time with the penult short.^

3.

Generally speaking, in alKla, evdlo^, and Xlav, though Xlav also occurs, especially in Attic.
proper names in
;

4. In

io)%'

which shorten

the

vowel in

the genitive

as,

Jlavdiovog.

On

'Ajxcplojv, AoXlcov, Ilavdicjv, gen. the contrary, those remain short

which take the long vowel

5.

in the genitive

as,

Bovko-

Xtcov, 'Retlcov, Olvontojv, gen. Olvomo)vog.^

Comparatives in mv have the i long in Attic, but short elsewhere as, 'yXvicT(i)v, KaKLO)v.
;

6.

Verbs
I

in

m,

not proceeding from roots in

;

^o),

have the

generally long

as, (pOld),

%pi, nplo), kvXco), e^aXlb),

xX'nii,

&c.

root are short

But those which had originally a ^ in the as, arlisi, fiaarto), to which add eodlo)
;

and
1.

did),

though not from such

roots.^

Ka2.i.d stands

once with the short penult

in

Pseudo-Phocyllides,

V. 79.
2.

p. 340, in notis. 'Opluv, gen. -luvog, is of variable measure in Homer and the epic short in the tragedians; as, Eunp. Cycl. 273; Ion. 1153. poets, but And also in Callim. H. to Arlem. 254. 4. KrjKiu has the penult short in Homer, long in tragedy. (Od. 5, 455 ; Soph. Philoct. 783.) With regard to the verb jjjjviu, it may be observed, that the penult of the present is common, but that of the future and first

Malthy, ad

verb.

Sandford,

Gr. Pros.

3.

On ; thus, /irjvlo) or fiTjviu, future firjvlau, first aorist ifirjvlaa. the other hand, the second aorist is ijxrjvlov, or, dropping the augment, In the second book of the Iliad, v. 769, we have fir/vlev, but UTjvXov. this appears to be the imperfect. Among the tragic writers, Sophocles employs the verb five times, but determines nothing respecting the quanRhesus of In the Euripides, v. 494, we have /iijviuv, and in the tity. It is safer, however, to lengthen it in the Hippolytus, V 1141, fiavLu.
aorist long

tragedians.

Maltby, ad verb.

DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT.

7. Dissyllabic

27

for the most part a " an arrow," and "poison ;" long penult as, Kplog, log, but log, " one," and lov, " a violet,'" proparoxytones,

oxytones in cog have

have the
8. I is also

short.

long in the following

Qplov,

Ivy^,
kI(i)v,

'W,
'T-nepluv.

TXlOiV,

7TplO)V,

Before a consonant.
1.

Before

/3

in
dKpl6rjg,
T6tg,

ipvaWrj,
&/il6o),
Tpl6(i),

arlbr].

and compounds.

But

all

derivatives from the second aorist of rpldo) and

;

similar verbs are short

rplbrig.

as, rpldog, diarptdrj,

nepi-

This remark holds good of napaipvp^r} and

similar formations.'
2.

Before

in

28
4.

DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT.

Before

&

in

epWog,

Ppldb),

and derivatives,

Wvg,
KpWri,
6.

dyXWeg.

Before k in
vIkt],
<pplK7],

KLKvg,

and derivatives, and compounds,

KOtKOg,

filKpog, or

TpdvLKog,
6.

ofMiKpog.

Before

in

apylXog,^ veoylXog,
veoylXrjgf
ofilXog,

aiilXa^,

GTzlXog^
ij)lX6g^

iXvg,
iXrj,

X^Xog, and compounds, Grp66lXog,

[laplXr],

TridlXov,
7. Before
fi

fivaTiXi].

in
Giiiog,
BpTfiTj,
(plfiog,

l(pdliiog,

Xlfiog,
Tijit?/,

and compounds, and compounds,

fill^og,^

fiovXlfxidC)}.

8.

Before v in verbs in
dplvo), Gcvo), (hdlvG),

ivo)

as, kXIvo), Kplvco, ttIvo)^

Sic.

Except

rivo)

and

(pOcvo),

which
870.

are long in

Homer, but

short in Attic.

But aid?], " a water-plant," has the short penult. Th. 887. Yet the diminutive of the former, auhov, has the i short {Aristoph. Nub. Nicand. Alex. 276. 881), and, in like manner, the adjective cldoeig.
Th.
1.

17.
It

a general rule, that t is long in the termiSo in similar forms, as proparosytone. Draco de Metr. 76, 28. 'ACi7u(, and so, also, in the like neuter, ntdlXov. 2. Yet amXog is also found. Compare Lycophron, 188, 374. 3. The ancients, as a general rule, give o.xytone forms in Aof as long ; Draco de Metr. 35, 21 ; 101, 3 163, 17. as, x^^'^C> >pl/\.6g, &c. 4. Compare page 27, note 3. Draco de Metr. 63, 10. 6. Most oxytones in [io( have the long penult.
nation tAof,
is
:

may be laid down as when the word

DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT.

In the following words
yvplvog,
iplvog.
:

29

30
11

DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT.

Before a in
'Bplaevq,

laog in Homer,'

Kvlaa,
12.

Before r in nouns in

itt], irTjg,

crig

as, 'Aippodlrrj,

'Aficptrplrrj, dcofiarlrtg, iroXlrrjg, dnXlTTjg, rroXlrig,

&c.

Except, however, Kplrrjg and other derivatives from the perfect passive with a short penult.''
In the following words
uKovtrov, KXiTvg,
Xlrog,
dixrjvlrog,
:

GtTog, with

com-

pounds,*

Tlrdv, TptTOV,
(plrvg.^

ddrjplrog,
13. Before
<^

in

ypl(pog,
i,epl(pog,

oldov,
T:i(j)vg,
vl(p(,),

but vl(pdg.

GTlcpog^

14. Before

in
III.

i%wp and rdplxog.

Of V
is

in the penultimate,

1.

Penultimate v

generally short before a vowel or diph;

thong, or a single consonant

1.

as, vog, kvei,

Xvyog.

is long with Homer, but short with the tragein laodsoc, however, is long in tragedy, on the that the a is same principle lengthened in uduvaroc, aKufj-aror, drrapdfivdog, namely, in order to allow of such forms being introduced into

dians.

The penult of Zcrof The first syllable

the verse.
2.

Compare
E^a?uv6G).

From

form

k^a7uC,(j

3. On the the short penult as coming from the third person singular of perfects passive with short penults in iraL or vrat ; thus, dupcTOQ, from d and KEKptrat ; ukvTog, from d and T^tXvTai, &c.

^sch. Pers. 81 and Burney, ibid. Compare Elmsley, ad Eurlp. Heracl. 404. The would make t^a/uaa^. same principle with uptrrjg, verbal adjectives in to^ have
Blomlield, ad
;

7,

4. 'AaiTOQ occurs in an epigram of Diogenes Laertius {Anthol. 118, 2), but this is a late innovation.
5.

Pal.

So

<^l-evu, (fl-vfia.

On

the contrary, ^vtevu, (pvTsvfia.

4,

This dis-

tinction

was made by Bnmck, ad ApolL Rhod.

807

Soph. Antig.

645.

The
1, 4,

Cyn.

conflictmg passages, as Eurip. Alcest. 306, 1 147 ; 0pp. are altered in the latest editions, partly with the consent of

MSS.

DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT.

II.

31
:

But penultimate v

is

long in the following cases

Before a vowel.
1.

In
'Evvcj,

Qvag,

iyvvrj,
Txvot;.

With regard to verbs in vu), the safest rule is to regard the penult of the present and imperfect as common.' Some, however, occur more frequently with
the long penult as, laxvio, daKpvcJ, ^v(t), diuo), XvcJ.^ are oftener found with the penult short, Others, again,
;

of

which the following '&

Ppvd),
dpv(t),

is

list.

KVO),

eXKVG),
epvG),
fiedvo),

dprvd), dvvo),
d(pv(x),

ttXtjOvO),

detKVVG),

kXvo).

And

so, likewise, all others

besides kXv(o and decKVvu),

which have

also vfit in the present.

Before a consonant.
1.

Before

/3

in v[i6g.

1. The question is ably discussed by Spitzner, Gr. Pros. p. 91, seq., and Malthy, Lex. Pros. c. vi., p. Ixiii., 2d ed. 2. Still it must be borne in mind, that derivatives from the perfect v short With regard to the as, Tivaig, Xvtoq, &c. passive have the
;

verbs quoted here as having the long penult, it may be observed, that Homer sometimes makes it d-vu, though generally i?()w. In Attic Greek Brunck considers the penult to be always long. Yet all the derivatives have short v except ^v/ia as, -QvTr'jp, -dvaia, ^vuS/ig, d-vaLfxo^. So, Another again, Tmu sometimes occurs in Homer, but Avoi in Attic. verb, not cited above, kuTmu, has the penult long in tragedy, but sometimes short in comedy. And yet the future is always Ku'kvau. Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 346, in notis.
;

32
2.

DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT.

DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT.

as, -dviia, KVfxa, Xvfia,

33

dprvna,

Sic. ixrjvvna, i6pv{ia,

Except, however,

epi)jita, 7rXv[j,a, pv[j,a,

"a

river

"^

&c.,

which
In &vii6g,
[iog,

are invariably short. " and its

animus,^''

compounds,

adv[j,og,

pddv-

&c.
first
;

But

"
Svp^og,

In the

person present

the penult short. thymus,'' has indicative active of all verbs

in vjxt

as, deUvvfit, ^evyvviii,

&c.

But the v
part
;

is

short

in the passive and middle of the

vvi^aL, ^evyvvfj.ac.

same

as, deiK-

In the plural cases of the pronoun ov

vfilv, vj^dg.

as, vfielg, y/iwv,

In the following words

Kpyfiog,

drpv^cdv,
AlavfiT],
pyfiT],

il>vjj,og,

Kdrrvna,
Xv[iif],

dtppvfiog,
dpviJiog,

EyKV[l(j)V,

KaTddpvfxa,
8.

eXvfia.

Before v in the present of verbs in vvo) as, evdvva, but when they terminate in ew oTpvvcj, ttXvvcj, &c.
;

the V

is

short

as, TrXvvio),
:

&c.

In the following words

rvvTj,

ajxvva,
KOpVVT],^

ALKTVVa,
svdvvog,

ropvvTj,

Kivdvvog^
opKvvog,
jSodvvog,

X^Xvvrj, aiaxvvT],
p,VV7],

^vvog,
1.

Btdvvov.

2.

But ^vfia, " draught," "protection." Herm. Orph. Hymn. 10, 22. But 'AkIv6vvoc, as a proper name, is shortened. Anth. Pal. xi.,

429.
3. As a general rule, it may be said that trisyllables in vvi] have Draco himself, who Yet there are exceptions. the long quantity. and Topvvn as shortengives the general rule, quotes Kopvvri, rafivvr), ed in the epic and lengthened in the Attic writers. Kopvvri, however, 143 ; Apoll, already fluctuates in the epic ; thus, short in Homer, B. 7,

34
9.

DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT,

Before
tt

in Xvttt], ypvnog, ravvirovg,

and in the ob-

lique cases of yvip, vnog, and ypvijj, vnog. 10. Before p in all verbs in vpo) as, 0vpa), ovpoj, ddvpco,
;

Kvpd), [ivpod,

&c.

but

when they

terminate in ew the

is

short

as, Kvpeo), fiaprvpeu), rropcpvpeui.

:

In the following words

^^

ajKvpa,^

rvpng,

cheese" (but

yi^vpa,
Kivvpa,
?idcl)vpa,

Tvpog,
TTanvpog,

"

Tj/re"),

yvpog,
oii^vpog^

bXvpa,
Kep/cvpa.^

iaxvpog,
TTtTVpOV,*

KoXXvpa,
Gfpvpa,^

XeiTvpov,
7TX7]p,fivpig,^

Kvpog,

ovoyvpoq,
Txvpoq, ''wheat''' (but

avpiy^,
ovpc^o),
Trvp),
is

TTvpog,
1 1
.

from
it

Xepi^vpng.
;

Before o

almost always long

as,

Aiovvoog,

Xpi'oog, "Kpxppvaog, Kafidvorjg, in vaig as, Xvoig, avvaig, Sic.

;

&c.

Except verbals

in Theocrit. Id. Notwith34, 3. etanding, however, that the long quantity in vvtj predominates with the that has as Draco observes, Eupolis always Attics, it is remarkable, But bdvvi], as sprung from a short root, is always shortened
;
:

Jthod. 2, 99, 115

;

Thcocril. Id. 7, 9
;

9,

23

and long

25, 63

Ntcand. Alex. 409

Leomd. Tarent. Epigr.

ropvvr].

short in the middle syllable, and so its derivatives ; as, i'Kudvvoz, nept(idwof, &c. Spilzner, Gr. Pros. p. 122. 1. The rule appears lo be, that the proparoxytones in vpa of the femOn the other hand, paroxytones in vpa inine gender have the v long.
are mostly short as, iy) mentioned above.
;

nopfvpa

{v),

<j>Mpa

{v), &,c.

Except KoXlvpa

2.

Most

&vpa, together with

3.

the penult short ; as, Ivpa, dissyllables, however, in vpa have their derivatives ; as, dvpaloQ, XvpiKOC, &c.

short among epic writers, but always Mallby, ad verb. other 4. Neuters m vpnv, derived from liquid verbs or long roots, but those not so derived have the penult short ; as, have the v long uxvpov, evtxvpov. 5. have n/i^/xfivpic in Homer, Od. 9, 486, and so, also, ApoU. Rhod. 4, 1269. But Blomfield (G/oss. ad Choeph. 180) supposes both these passages to stand in need of correction, and Knight actually reCompare Spitzner, jects the former. Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 348. Gr. Pros. p. 123.

Always long in Homer and the

the Attics.

We

DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT.

12. Before

35
;

r in derivatives in

vrrjp, vrrjg,

and VTt^

as,

[iTjvvTTip, iiTjvvrrjg, 7Tpea6vT'fjg, 7Tpeo6vTig.^

In adjectives in vTog, derived from long verbal roots in

vu)
;

as,

ddaKpvTog, TToXvdaKpvrog, aXirpvrog, arpv-

rog,

&c.
preceding

In trisyllables in vrog, which lengthen the

syllable
;

Kwkvto^, fec. But names derived from adjectives in vg have the short
as, Bi^pvrog, yutpvTog, as, Kl-nvrog, YiVpyTog. penult In the following words :
;

pvroip,
pvTrj,

OKvrevg,
(3pVT0V,

pvTog,
aicvTog,
13. Before

ycopvTog, and sometimes

XvTG)p.^

in
Tvcl)og,
TvicpCJ,

Kv(ji6g,^

KV(pO)V,

arvcpog,

ovcpap,

KeXvcpog.
14.

Before

in verbs in
;

v%w

as, (3pvx(o, Tpvx(>if

and

compounds but v In the following words

their
:

in jBpvxtog is short.

ipvxr],

tiiipvxog,

ipvxog,

Karaipvx(^-

But
its

TTapail}vx'>],

being derived from a second

aorist,

has

penult short*

In like manner, nouns in vtt]^, 1. Yet &VTTJP has the short penult. from adjectives in vf, ela, v, are short ; as, (3pa6vTric, oivrrj^, TaxvTjjg. The verse quo2. This long penult in Ivrup is extremely doubtful. Anted in support of it from the Anthology {Lcomd. Alex. Ep. 29, 4. thol. Pal. ix., 359) has now ()VTopa, which also stands in the Palatine MS. Hence IvTT/pioc, besides the usual XvrfjpLOC, will also admit of

great doubt.
3.

SpUzncr, Gr. Pros.

p. 161.

v short. upyvipo^, Koaovfog, &c., have the On the same principle we have 4. Porson, ad Eurip. Orest. 62. it 6taTpl6^ with the short penult, although the verb is SiaTplSu, because

But

is

derived from the second aorist durpiSov.

36

DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULT.

VIII.

Of
I.

the Doubtful Voioels before the Penultimate.

I.

Of a

before the penultimate.

is

before the penult

generally short

as, deiKrjg,

ddoXog, PdaiXevg. II. But a before the penult

is

long in the following cases

A
A
privative,

privative.
short,
;

though naturally

may
as,

three short syllables follow fiarog, diroXeiiog, &c.'

when

be lengthened dddvaTog, dKa-

A
1.

before a vowel.

In

aevaog.

DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULT.

it

37

is

generally a dissyllable

or else,

when

a trisylla-

ble,

has the a

short.'

Before a consonant.
1.

Before

in
e6SofidyETrjg,

vavdyeiii,

Evdyopia,
Q7]6dyevrjg,

vavdyiov,
Iddysvrjg,
2.

Kpdyiri]g.

Before 6 in
avdddia, as in
avddSrjg,

pddtog,

ddoXeoxLa, dddov, from 6atg, iKETddoKog,

KapddoKect).

ddoXeaxfjg,
3.

Before

&

in pddvuog.

4.

Before k in
SidKovog,
XdKEi,}^
&dK^(t),

^VpdKOOLOL,
l3XdKLKu)g,
-dicog,

from j3Xd^,

oldKoarpocpog,
(pevdKi^d),
cjpdictdo),

rpidKovra,
didfcooioi,

rpidiioaLot,^ Sic,

dKovaiog.
5.

Before A in
dXi^G),
(bdXaivT],

IdXejiog,
1.

dXi6ag, dvdX6(o, avdXioKOi,

In Euripides, Hec. 31,

301) would read avainau.

2.

we have ataaw where Pierson {ad Mocr. But consult Person, ad loc.

p.

participle diaXaKijaaaa lengthens the third syllable in ArisThe subjunctive \aKi]ai)q shortens the first in antophanes, Nub. 409. of the same author. Pax. 381. {Elmsleij, ad Eurip. other comedv "

The

Med. 147.)
as, TpLuKOVTai^vyo^. So, also, in the compounds (Thcocrit. Id. In the hundreds, the only ones with long a are dtdKoatot and as, TeaTapuKoaioi, tcevTpiaKoaioi, the others having the syllable short
3.
;

13, 74.)

TuKomoi,

&.C.

So, also, TeaGepuKovra.

;

{Horn.

II.

2,

524, 534.)

The

Later authors, as, TrcvTr'iKnvTa, t^r'/Kovra, &c. remaining tens have ?; however, said also -puiKovTa, according lo tlie analogy of other numerals. ad 806. Gr. Pros. p. 67. Anth. Pal. Jacobs, 617, 705, Spiizner,

38

DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULT,

KodXefiog,
OKtfidXi^()>,

dXoavvT],
6.

1.Tvii(pdXi6eq.

Before

ft

in
'Aficoog,
'ATrafXEia^

dfido),^

dfiTjTog, dixrjTdg,
7.

^tXovdnaTog.

Before v in
Kpdviov, TLTdvtog, vedviag,
Evdv[j,og,

Kardvofiat,
Kpedvofiog,

Xvoodvcog, ovvdpdvoo),
TTaidvtKog,
TzaLdvl^Ci).

evdvopia,
dyopdvojiog,
8.

Before

in dpdTrerrjg, vdrreXa, dnvo)

9.

Before p in
dpdofiai, Homeric,'^
dprjrrjp,
!

(pXvdpeo),

dpLOTOV,
dpiardo),

KdpLCOV,

Adpioaa,
Kdpa6og,
dfidpaKog,
10. Before

ddpeiKog,
dedptoi',

Xdptvog.

o in

'Aoionog,
ETrapdaifLog,

Kdadvdpa,
"Aaidog,'^

evKpdaia,
Kopdat-ov,

irdoaodat, "possidere,
Jldaicpd^].

"4

1. According to Maltby, afiuu, in the active voice, and the nouns derived from this verb, such as u/xrjr/ip, ufXTinjg, and u/j.7jt6c, have the a On the other hand, ufiuojuat. in the middle long in Homer and Hesiod. voice, and the compound forms hivafiijaaTO, Karafif/aaTo, as well as the form diufi7]os in the active, have the a short. In later epic writers it is

common. 2. But in Attic updofxac, contr. 3. So 'AouldTjc, with the long

"

upcj/iai.

have also 'AtTiOf, initial vowel. " Asian," with the long vowel, and liffior, slimy,'" with the a short. The long quantity, however, in the former, and in other words of the kind, cannot be determined with perfect certainty, since the length may be occasioned by the arsis. Hermann, H. H. in Apoll. 250. " 4. But nuaaadai, vesci," has the first syllable shoit. Blomfield, Gloss, ad uEsch. Agam. 1380.

We

DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULT.

11. Before

39

in

Iliadrtdag,

^ideuTtdog,

dcSv^droKog, ddrepov,
;" as,

And

in

words compounded of Xdag, " a stone

Aa-

rofiCa, XdTOfioi, Xdrvrcog, Sic. in oeipdcpopog. 12. Before

13. Before

in

rpaxovpog, pdxia, aKpa^oXog,

II.
I.

pvaxerog, dxsrag, Doric for

Oft

before the Penultimate.

;

before the penult is generally short

as, Upiafiog,

Imeifiivog, iKOfxat, &c.

II.

But

before the penult

is

long in the following cases

40

DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULT.

UlepLa, niepiog
niepideg,
ppax'tovog,
TTLatVU),

<^dlu)Ttg,

EvdplovoOai,
dvldo),^

A\]^ in the
loxsaipa.

compounds

of log, "
lov,

aji

arrow ;"

as, lolSoXog,
it

But those from

" a violet" have

short

as, loecdrjg, loOTEcpavog.

Before a consonant.
1.

Before

/3

in icXl6avog, Kpl6avog,

and

Kl6(i)T6g.

2.

Before

almost always

DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULT.

ttIXeo),

41

42

DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULT.

;

10. Before p almost always

11. Before

as, l,snlpa[j,ig, fec.

a in
alav^dpLov,
Tlat(p6vr},

KovlaaXog,
filaeo),

Xaplawg,
<pdiO7']V0)p,

'A(ppodlaiog,
;

And

in

compounds and derivatives from caog

as, ladv-

Spog, laodeog? 12. Before t in

TpZTO)vcg,

TcTvpog,
13. Before
14.

in dlcpdoj, dlcprjTOjp,

al(p(jjvc^0).

Before

i^
oiJ,iX(^,

Kix(^pa,

Ktx(^psov,

raplxe.v(>).

III.
I.

Of V

before the penultimate.

is

before the penult

generally short

as, 'AarvoxTj,

apyvpeog, &c. II. But V before the penult

is

long in the following cases:

Before a vowel.
In

'EvvdXiog,
Kvdveog,^

liveXog^
[ivovpog,

JEsch. Prom. v. 529. On the other hand, Tuivog, ^^ fat,''^ though considered as long by some grammarians, is probably always short. 1. The measure 'Llav^o^, formerly in Theognis, v. 522, has been altered by Jortin, Dissert, vi., p. 229, and Person, Advers. p. 313. The Modena MS., collated by Bekker, verifies the proposed change. 2. Consult note 1, page 30.

and

also, iTeivoc, Theocrit. Id. 16, 79. a surname of Minerva, Apoll. Rhod. 4. Consult note 5, page 30.
3.

Hence,

But
1,

"Ituv,

II. 2,

696,

'Ircjvi'f,

551, fluctuate.

5.

But the

first

syllable is

sometimes short in Attic Greek.

jEsch.

Com75.

pare Blomfield^ ad Aisch. Pers. 83.

6.

Long

in

Homer,

short in the tragic writers.

Agam,

Soph. Track.

783. Eurip.

Hippol. 255.

DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULT.

[xvodo^og,
Ttverir],

43

TT?iaTvd^(i},

vsTog,
(Spsvdvonac.

Before a consonant.
1.

Before

(3

in 7)jutv6iov.

2. Before

in

fivyaXirj,

dpvyavdo),
3.

Xvyalog, (ppvyavov.

Before 6 in fivdaXiog, fivdaivo), and in the compounds

and derivatives of kv6oc

4.

as, KvSdXifiog, Kvdifiog.,

&c.

Before

t^

in epvOpido),

epvdidu, and irapanvdionai,

5.

with other compounds of p.vdog. Before k in epvicaKso), and other compounds of kpvKO).

In the following:
[ivKdojxai,
(pvKLoeig,
I
_ '

KapvKOTTOioJ,
Kr]pvKevo),
icrjpv^,

And
6.

other derivatives from

vKog.

Before A in

&vXaKog^
KoyxvXiov,
JlajicpvXLa,
OKvXojJbaL,

ovXdo), GvXevG),

vXatog,
(l)vXomgy
livXi,d(ji.

OKvXevd),
7.

Before

p,

in

vperepog,
Kvpalvo),

Xvfieuv, pvpoG),
TTsnvviievog,
-Bvp^og
;

Xvpalvo),

And

in

compounds and derivatives from

as,

dvpcJ67]g, -dvpTjprjg, &vp6opat, &,c.

1.
vii.,

Long

in

Homer,
II. 5,

short in Attic.

Aristoph. Pax. 843.

the second aorist.
first

A)ith. Pal.

166, 3. 2. In Homer,
3.

749, fivKov
to

is

But &vAdKiov seems Maltby, ad verb.

have the

syllable

sometimes

short.

44
8.

DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULT.

Before
tt

in

Xvirid),

Tpvnavov,
KVTTOO).

Tpvndui,
9.

Before p in
yvpocj,
KVpOG),
(pvpdct),

Iiivvpofxai, (Mvpcog,
fj-vptoi,

Kvptog,
Kvpofiai,

Mvpaiva,
TTvpafiig,
TTvpiixog,

aKVpCOTOC,
Kivvpofiai,

TrXrjiinvpLa,
TrXrjiiixvpEOJ,

odvpofxai,
KapTvpo[j,ai,

KvprjvT].^

10. Before

is

generally long
;

as in (pvado, and
XvGcp^eX'^g,

some
&c.

compounds of Avw
In the following
:

as,

Xvomovog,

PART

II.

E T E E.

^/

METRE.
I.

Metre,

in its general sense,

means an arrangement
;

of syllables and and, in this sense,

feet in verse, according to certain rules

it

applies not only to an entire verse, but to a part of a verse, or any number of verses. II. But a metre, in a specific sense, means a combination

of two feet, and sometimes one foot only. III. There are nine principal metres:

1.

Iambic.

2.

Trochaic.

Anapaestic. 7. Ionic 6. Antispastic.

Paeonic.

3.

4.

Dactylic.
8.

5.

Choriambic.

k Majore.

Ionic k Minore.

9.

which prewould seem of verse originally species to have been composed of those feet solely from which it
IV.

These names
them.

are derived from the feet

vail in

Each

and other feet, equal in time, were not adit name mitted until afterward, and then only under certain restricderives
;

tions.

* V.

It

in the iambic, trochaic,

must be carefully noted, that two feet make a metre and anapaestic measures, but that
all

one foot constitutes a metre in

the rest.
it is
;

VI.

When
;

a verse consists of one metre,

it

called mo-

nometer

when

has two metres, dimeter

three metres,

trimeter; four metres, tetrameter

six metres, hexameter
;

; five meXxe^, pentameter , seven metres, heptameter, &c. VII. From what has just been remarked, it follows that,

in iambic, trochaic,
sists of

two feet
all

and anapaestic verse, a monometer cona dimeter oi four ; a trimeter of six, &c. ;

whereas, in

the other kinds of verse, a

monometer con-

sists of one foot,

a dimeter of two, a trimeter of three, &c.

48

METRE.

VIII. Verses are also denominated Acatalectic, Catalectic,

IX.
parts,

Brachycatalectic, and Hypercatalectic. An acatalectic verse is one that is complete in all

its

and comes
is

to

full

termination
:'

as the following,

which

iambic trimeter acatalectic

X.

catalectic^

verse

is

one that wants a syllable

;

at

the
is

end

to

complete the measure

:

as the following,

which

iambic trimeter catalectic

XI.

brachycatalectic^ verse is one that

wants two

syl-

lables at the end to complete the

ing,

measure

as the follow:

which

is

iambic trimeter brachycatalectic

XII.
the end

hypercatalectic^ verse is

one that has a syllable

;

at

which

beyond the complete measure as the following, is iambic trimeter hypercatalectic

:

"r-'ir-r-ir-r-r
XIII.

There

is also
is

what

is

when

a syllable
is

wanting

at the

called an Acephalous^ verse, beginning as the fol; :

lowing, which

acephalous iambic trimeter

XIV. Verses arc

TTjrot),

when

different

also denominated Asynartete (davvdpmeasures are conjoined into one line

1. Acatalectic, from uKaTaT^TjKTLKoc (i. and KaTa2,r/yu), i. e., not having an abrupt termination. Compare Hcphcestion, c 4, p. 24, ed. Gais'AKardTiriKTa Kalelrai /XETpa, baa tov re'XevTaiov Tzoda oXoKXripov ford.
.

eX^i2. Heph(Bstion, I.e.

TievTolov n66a.

Kara'XTjKriKa 6e, ocra fie/ietunevov exec tov tis derived from naTaTJjyu, and denotes verses that stop before they reach their full ending. 3. Hcphastion, 1. c. BpaxvKara?,TiKTu Se KaT^Elrat,, oca and Slttodiar enl teaov( oAu noSt fjit/iEiurai.

The term

4.

HephcBstion,
[j.fpor

1.

c.

'TTicpKaraXTiKTa

de, ocra

npbc

riji

Te'^eio) irpo-

cekade
i.

TrotJo^-.

Some

call

it

Hyperacatalectic, VTzepanaTaTlriKTOC,
i.

e.,

5. Acephalous,

going beyond acatalectic. from a and Ks^aTirj,

e.,

wanting a head.

OF FEET.
at the pleasure of the
;

49

poet and they are so called because union between the two measures is comparatively as slight, the hiatus and doubtful syllable being admitted
the
;

in Horace,

Epode

13.
|

Fervidiora mero*

arcana promorat
|

loco.

Levare duris pectora*

sollicitudinibus.

OF FEET.
I.

A
is

foot in

metre

is

and

either simple or

composed of two or more compound.

syllables,

II.

Of

syllables.

the simple feet, four are of two, and eight of three The compound feet are sixteen in number, each

of four syllables.

Simple Feet.
Pyrrhichius

50
"

OF ISOCHRONOUS FEET.
Paeon tertius
quartus
Bsoyevrig.

Epitritus primus

"

secundus
tertius

dv6po(p6vTr]g.

"
"

Evpvadevriq.
Xo)j3'r]T7jpa.

quartus

Proceleusmaticus

TToXefiLog.

Dispondaeus

ovvdovXevao).

Diiambus
Ditrochaeus
III.

~-

-^

emaraTrjg.
6vaTvx'>][J'Ci'.

To

these add the Dochmius, which consists of an

""""); so that a simple antispast and a long syllable ("-" dochmiac is the same as an antispastic monometer hyper-

catalectic

dscbv

fj

i^eav.'

IV.

The

syzygy.

Most

conjunction of two feet is termed a dipodia or usually, however, the combination of two

dissyllabic feet is called a dipodia,

bic, or a dissyllabic

and that of two

trisylla-

and
is

junction of two feet

The consyzygy. often likewise termed a base.

trisyllabic, a

OF ISOCHRONOUS FEET.
I.

By

isochronous feet are meant those which are interin metre.

changeable
II.

In order to ascertain what feet are thus interchangeable, recourse must be had to the arsis and thesis.
III.

That part "of a

foot

which receives the

termed

Ictus, the

stress of the voice, or beat of the time, is called arsis or elevation.

sion.

The

rest of the foot is

thesis, or depres-

IV. The natural place of the arsis is the long syllable of the foot, and hence, in the iambus, it falls on the second
syllable, in the trochee

on the

first,

while the spondee and

tribrach leave

its

place alike uncertain.

s.

1. Etym. Mag. p. 285, 25, Dochm. p. 402, seq.

v.

Aox/aaKoc.

Scidler, de

Vers.

ISOCHRONOUS FEET.
V.

51

The fundamental

foot of a verse,
;

the arsis for the other feet

however, determines and hence the spondee, in iam-

bic and anapaestic verse, has the arsis

on the second

sylla-

ble, but in trochaic and dactylic on the first. VI. So, again, the tribrach, when it stands for the iam-

bus,

is to
-^ --

chee

be pronounced -.

^ ^ when
,

it

stands for the tro-

VII. Now the ancients considered those feet only as isochronous which were capable of being divided into parts so that a long syllable should have that were equal in time
;

either a correspondent long syllable, or two short ones.' VIII. The following scheme will exemplify this more
clearly, the place of the arsis being

denoted as above (VI.)

by

the acute accent.

Iambus
Tribrach

Trochee
Tribrach
Anapaest

-"

""

'-'

Dactyl

~~

Spondee
IX.
this

Spondee

perceive that the iambus and trochee are By each interchangeable with the tribrach and that the dac;

we

tyl,

spondee, and anapaest are interchangeable with each

it

other.

X. In like manner

will appear that the

iambus and

trochee are not interchangeable, and that an iambus never admits a trochee into iambic verse, nor a trochee an iam-

bus into trochaic verse.

Thus,
"^

Iambus Trochee

The

long syllable of the iambus has neither a corre-

spondent long syllable in the trochee, nor two short ones. And the case is the same with the long syllable of the trochee.

Hence

the two feet are not interchangeable or iso-

chronous.'^
1.

2.

Dawes, Miscellanea Critica, p. 62. For this reason the schoUast on He

p. 103, ed. Kidd. haestion (p. 76, ed Gaisf.) calls

52
XI. Again,
it

IAMBIC VERSE.

may
be shown, in the same Avay, that the

spondee and amphibrach are also not interchangeable. Thus,

Spondee Amphibrach

Here, in whatsoever way the amphibrach be divided, each division contains either more or less than the correspondent part of the spondee.
isochronous.
for the

And,

Hence the two feet are not same reason, the amphibrach is

not isochronous with the dactyl or anapaest.'

OF THE DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE.

I.
I.

Of Iambic
its

Verse.

Iambic verse derives

it,

name from

the foot

which

namely, the iambus. II. At first the iambus was the only foot allowed to enter into this measure but, by degrees, an intermixture of other
prevails in
;

permitted, under certain restrictions. a verse consists entirely of iambi, it is called a pure iambic verse when other feet are introduced and intermingled with the iambus, it is denominated a mixed
feet
III.

was

When

iambic.

IV.

The

reason

why

other feet besides the iambus

to

were

allowed to enter appears

have been, not only

to lessen

the iambic and trochaic measures uvTiTradovvra /lerpa, and Tricha {de Metris, p. 9, ed. Hcrm.) remarks, uvTiTradijc xal oiov vnEvavrio^ tu) 6 Tpoxa^oc. Compare the language of Dawes (Misc. Crit. p. 103, ld/i6(f} " Mihi est illos duniaxat a veteribus tan-

pedes Kidd.) pcrsuasum laoxpovovg haberi solUos, qui in singulas ilidcm partes temporihus ut singulis longis vcl singula: itidem tzquales seeari possent, ita scilicet

cd.

quam

longcB, vcl certe bincB breves responderent tionem decantati illius, 6 rpojarof uvrnvadsl

....
rw

Percipis

IdfiGu, sive ob

versu trochaico iambus, in iambico vicissim trochcEus

habeat."
1.

jam raquam in nusquam locum

Compare Dawes,

1.

c.

" Hinc etiam ratio elucescit, cur amphibra-

chym
sit
;

dvTLiradElv videre spondcEO, adeoqve dactylo et anapcEslo, pariter sive cur pes iste in versa neque anapcestico, neque trochaico, nee dc-

niquc iambico conspiciatur."

IAMBIC VERSE.

53

the difficulty of composing, but in order to remove the monotonous and unpleasing effect of a succession of iambi : and also, as in the case of the tragic trimeter, to impart

more dignity and elevation to the style.' V. Iambic measure admits of being constructed varieties of length, from the monometer acatalectic
tetrameter hypercatalectic.
the places to

in all
to the

The

scales

accompanying each

metre will show the isochronous feet allowed to enter, and

which they are

Monometer

severally restricted.

1.

Acatalectic, or Base.
Scale.

54
3.

IAMBIC VERSE.
Dimeter Acatalectic,
Scale.
1

IAMBIC VERSE.
V.
It

55

must be borne

in mind, accordingly, that the final

syllable in dimeter iambics, as well as in dimeter trochaics

and
line.

anapaestics, is not
until the

common, but
system
is

that the verses run

on

by synapheia

concluded by a catalectic
il-

The

following, from Aristophanes, will serve to

lustrate this point

more clearly
|

:'

rig rfiv
Trji; fiat

Ke(pdXfiv

1|

dnedi]

66k.Iv
\

||

vlSog

||

ro rpv^X
i

lov
|

||

ro TTepv GLvov TedvfiK, TTOv TO TO Gh'opoSov fiol

I
II I ||

eiiol\

||

\;0e(Ta'oj^
\\

II

Tig TTig
Tso)g
Kexi]
I

eXddg
||

||

irdperp
epd)
\

dyev
||

6'd(3eX,T

Tepol.
\

voTeg
Tidal
I

\\

Mdfifid

kvOol,
to.

MeA^
Here the

||

Kddfiv

\\

|1"

last syllables in the first, second, fourth, and are respectively lengthened by position, through the influence of the synapheia, and the last line of the sysfifth lines,

tem

is

a dimeter catalectic.
4.

Dimeter Catalectic.
I

dXdOT
5.

opog

||

Tig ol^

vg.

||

Dimeter Brachycatalectic.
I

TEKVcbv
6.

e[io)v

II

<pvXd^.

||

Dimeter Hypercatalectic.
I

yvval
1.

icog

dvT

||

lol
\

OTddevT
Ran. 984.

||

eg.

Elmsley,

1.

p. 58, ed Gaisf.
2.

Brunch, ad Dunbar, Gr. Pros.

c.

Arist.

Dawes, Misc.

Crit.

p. 43.

Ran. 984,

seq.

56

IAMBIC VERSE.

7.

Trimeter Acatalectic, or Senarius.

Scale.

IAMBIC TRIMETER.

57

2.

Trihrachs in the first, second, third, fourth, and fifth

places.

TTorepd
(pdlvov

6'ev ol
I
I

||

Kol<;
||

rj

'v
\

dypotg
\

||

o
||

Aa

log.
|

\\

ad 6'dye
roO' ov
I

Xalg (3ov

vdjj,olg
\

roKot
\\
\

gc re.
;

\\

-ndg ovv
fxfjrpog
I

rl yap
3.

^iyriv KdKoyv

\\

rog o oocp 6g ovk i]v6d rode at, Kol ndrepd Kdrd Krdvelv.
\\
\\
|

1|

|j

\\

dnear
\

rov
third,
1|

1|

-ndrepd

trdrfip.

||

Spondees in the first,

I

and fifth
irXovrl^

places,

adfig

orevdy
4.

||

fiolg

Kal
\

yoolg

eral.
\

||

Dactyls in the first and third places.

fi^r'

dpo
I

Tov av
I

\\

rolg

y^v
\

dvl
|

\\

eval
\

rtvd.
\

\\

dvdpog

ydplar
5.

\\

ov (3dal

Xeibg

||

r'oXd

Xorog.

Anap<BSt in the first place.

juev Ztjv
\

Uprjg-

eydj

1|

og-

ol

\\

6e t'^

^ewv.
|

1|

6. AnapcBSt

of proper names in the second,

fifth places.

third, fourth,

and

fjv I

(plyevel

\\

dv

Cj
\

vo^d^

\\

eg Iv

donolg.

\\

{Iph.

A. 416.) rerdp rov

\

Itttt

onedovr'

d-near
\

\\

tlXev
\

-ndrfip.

||

{(Ed. Col. 1317.)

lidXlar
j

<^ol6

\\

Tel
\

pealdv,

Trap'

ov
\

rig dv.

\\

{(Ed. T. 285.) delg fiev ov ejtioi

1

\\

f^iv

Bog

Kvr

\\

lyovi)

(plXibv.

||

{An-

tig. 11.)

IV.

The

last syllable in
;

each verse appears

to

be

indif-

and even where one line ends with ferently short or long is often found in the beginning of a vowel a short vowel,
the next
;

as in the following instances from the CEdipus

:

Tyrannus

rivag nod' eSpag rdaSe fioi dod^ere, inrrjpioig KXddoLOtv e^earemievot

;

^ >

^ o 3
'
'

58

IAMBIC TRIMETER.^

a ycj ducatcov ju?) nap' dyysXcov, reicva, aXXcov aKoveiv, avrbg cjd' sXrjXvda.

? )

,
'

/.
'

'

elided, passes

V. Sometimes, however, one verse, with its final vowel by scansion into the next, but only when a
;'

long syllable precedes

as,

Gol (paalv avTov eg Xoyovg iXOslv fMoXovr' alreiv, aTte?^.6elv r' dacpaXojg rrjg devp' bdov.

(CEd. Col. 1164,

VI.

5.)

admissibility of the tribrach into an iambic line arises from the circumstance of its being an isochronous
its exclusion from the last place in the trimeter turns a upon principle of rhythm ; since a tragic trimeter, with such a concluding cadence, would be anything else but grave

The

foot

and

dignified.

VII.

The

was owing

to the

introduction of the spondee into an iambic line wish of imparting to the verse a greater

degree of weight and dignity,"^ as well as of interrupting the monotonous cadence which a succession of iambi would

have produced. VIII. The admission of the spondee opened the door, of course, for the other feet that were isochronous with it, and
in this

way The

the dactyl and anapaest

were each allowed

to

come
IX.

in.

reason

why

the iambus
:

was

retained in the

even places appears to have been this that, by placing the spondee first and making the iambus to follow, greater emphasis was given to the corresponding syllable of each
metre''

on which the ictus

and pause took place, than

Porson, ad, Med. 510. Hermann, Ekm. Doctr. Metr. p. 23, seq. Tate, Introd. p. 3. 2. Hvrat. Ep. ad Pis. 255. 3. By inclrc is here meant a dipodia or conjunction of two feet, of which there are three in the trimeter. In reciting iambic verses it was usual to make a slight pause at the termination of every second foot,
1.

with an emphasis on its final syllable. Thus, Terentianus Maurus {dc Mdr. 2193, seg., p. 101, cd Lennep.), speaking of the trimeter, says,

" Sed

ler fcritur : hinc trimctrus dicilur, Scandeyido hinos quod pedes conjungimus."

IAMBIC TRIMETER

59
syllables stood to-

would have been the case had two long

gether.

X. With regard to the use of the tribrach in the tragic must be noted 1. That, though admissible into all places of the verse except the
trimeter, the following particulars
:

2. That yet it is very rarely found in the fifth place. the second syllable of a tribrach (as of a dactyl) must not be a monosyllable incapable of beginning a verse, or the
last,

word. 3. That the preposition eg must not form the second syllable of a tribrach.' XI. On the use of the dactyl in this same measure the
last syllable of a

following must be noted

into both the first

1.

and third places,

The dactyl, though admissible is more common in the

2. A dactyl is whol^ inadmissible into the fifth 3. The first ly place. syllable of a dactyl in the third place should be either the last of a

third than the first place of the verse.

word, or a monosyllable, except in the case of proper 4. The second syllable of a dactyl in either place should not be either a monosyllable incapable of benames.''

ginning a verse (as dv, yap, 6e, nev, re, &c.), or the last 5. The preposition kg must not be the syllable of a word."*

second syllable of a dactyl in either place. XII. On the use of the initial anapasst in the tragic trimThe anapaest admissible into eter, observe as follows
:

And

again, v. 251, scq.

" Secundo iamhum nos vccessc

est reddere,

Qui sedis hujus jura semper ohtinet, Scandendo et dlic ponere assuetam moram,

Quam pollicis
The
cJESural pause,

sonure, vcl plausu pedis,

solent.'''

Discriminarc, qui docent arlem,

however, in the tragic trimeter, was the controland the marking of the metres was always made in subling melody, servience to this. Compare the remarks of Dawes, Misc. Crit. p. 361, ed. Kidd.
Sandford's Greek Prosody, p. 280, seq. Porson, Praf. ad Her.. 3. Dunbar, Gr. Pros. p. 51. 4. This canon is occasionally violated by the tragic poets, especially in the tirst place of the verbe. Elmsley, ad Eurip. Bacch. 285.
1.

2.

60
the
first

IAMBIC TRIMETER.
place
is

The
its

generally included in the same word. only exceptions are where the line begins either with an article, or with a preposition followed immediately by

case

as in Philoct. 754,

Tbv iaov xpovov.

Eur. Orest.

888, 'ETTt ~(l)de S'l-jyopevov. Iph. A. 502, Hap' ifioi.^ XII. The anapaest in proper names is allowed, in order
to bring into the tragic trimeter certain

names of persons
And,
in order to

that

would otherwise be unable

to enter.^

soften

down

this license,

it is

probable that proper

names

so introduced

were pronounced with a hurried utterance,

so as to carry only --' to the ear.' XIV. A few instances occur where the proper
;

name

be-

gins with an anapaest as, MeveAaof, Upidnov, Sic. Elmsley considers all such cases as corrupt, but Porson's judgment seems to lean the other way.''

XV. With regard

it

to the

use of resolved or trisyllabic

be observed, 1. That more than two should feet, not be admitted into the same verse.* 2. That trisyllabic
is to

feet should not concur.*'

XVI.

Enclitics,

when

so used, and other words incapa-

ble of beginning a sentence, are incapable of beginning a

senarian.'

XVII. The verb earl or earlv

the beginning of a senarian, except
1.

is

it is

very rarely found in the beginning of a

i.,

2.
3.

Monk, ad Soph. Electr. 4. {Mus. Elmshy, in Ed. Rev., Nov., 1811.

Tate, In/rod., p. 36, seg.

Crit. vol.

p. 63.)

Dr. Clarke

is

entitled to the merit of

Long proper names are, from their having discovered this principle. very nature, liable to be rapidly spoken, and thus 'AvTiyov?}, NovtvtSbo easily slurred into something like Avt'2,Efj.oc, '[((iLybVEia, &c., might &c. The ear, of course, would find no jovrj, NovTrr'/LEiUOf, \<l>'yEVEia, cause of oifence, and the eye take no cognizance of the matter. ( Clarke, ad 11. 2, 811. Ta/c, 1. c.) Ed. Rev. 1. c. 4. Elmsley, Porson, Suppl. Prczf. ad Hec. 5. Cla.ts. Journ. No. 64, p. 309. Consult Sand6. This rule is sometimes violated by the tragic poets. Gr. Pros. p. 282, seq. in nolis. ford, ad 7. Elmsley, {Mus. Crit. vol. i., p. 367.) Id. ad Soph. Aj. 985. T. 1084. Soj>k. (Ed.

IAMBIC TRIMETER.

61

sentence also, or some pause, at least, in the sense has

preceded.'

XVIII.
lect
;

Some Doric forms

are retained in the tragic dia-

thus, always, 'Addva, dapog, eKart, Kvvayog, -noda-

To these, mentioned by yog, Ao%ay6c, ^evayog, OTradog. Porson,* may be added the following, as given by Monk :*
apape, -daKog, and compounds, yd-rrovog, yaTreTTjg, ydnedov,

and its compounds. ydjxopog, ydnorog, ydrofiog, Kdpavov, XIX. Forms of Ionic (epic) Greek are also found in the
tragic dialect
;

as, ^elvog, [Movvog, nelvog, Tco?^?i6g*

is

&c.

XX. The augment

never omitted by the tragic writers

As to avoyya, this except in the case of XP^'^ for e%p?/v. in Attic, although the pluperfect no has augment preterit
has.

though

In like manner, the tragic writers {CEd. Col. 1598.) do not prefix the augment to KaO^6iJ,7]v, Kadrji-iTjv, tcadevdov, A double the comic writers sometimes give it.

augment
[XTjv

occasionally allowed in tragedy, as in 7]veax6likewise found)." {avto%6\i,'qv being

is

Of the
I.

C(BSura in the Tragic Trimeter.^

is

One

of the greatest beauties in a tragic trimeter

tragic trimeter

the

cEEsura.
II.

The

has two principal caesuras, one

half foot
;

on the penthemimeris, or
Ktvdvvog e(7%e
|

fifth

as,

dope TTEoelv

'F,XX7]vi,k,(I),

and the other on the hephthemimeris, or seventh half

as,

foot

IIo/lAcov Adycjv evprmaO'

III.

uots
\

jur)

&avelv.

line is

perfect,
1.

which

is

esteemed deficient in harmony, and not without the ceesura. Many lines have

2.
3.

Elmslcy, ad Eurip. Heracl. 386. For son, ad Eunp. Or est. 26.

Ad

Eur. HtppoL 1093.

4.

f).

Gr. Pros. p. 286, seq. Porson, Snppl. ad Prtrf. ad Hcc. p. ;vvi. G. Porson, Suppl. ad Prcef. ad Hcc. p. xxiv.
Sajidford,

62

IAMBIC TRIMETER.
is

both; but the penthemimeral

more frequent than the

on a monosyllable,
ei-

hephthemimeral
IV.

in the proportion of four to one.

is

The

caesura

allowed

to fall

ther with or without the elision, as well as on the last syllable of a word. Thus,

Kai vvv Ti tovt' av

|

(paal Travdy/jUOJ ttoXsl.

Kal rev^erai. rovS' ovd' a6(JJp7]Tog (ptXcjv. 'A/l/L' ov TToXig OTvyel, ov rqir^aeig Td(pu>.
|
|

"Orav yap ev

(ppovfjg,

rod'
[

i]yi]aeL

av

vu)v.

V. A verse, however, is not faulty which has what Porson terms the quasi-cxBsura ; that is, when after the third foot there is an elision of a short vowel, either in the same

word
it ;'

or in such a

word

as 6s,

p,,

oe, ye, re, attached to

thus,

KevTSiTE,

fj,i]

(j)eideo6\

tyto 'tekov Jldpiv.

TvvaL^l irapdevoig
VI.

r'
\

drTodXeTTTog [lera.

verse sometimes occurs without either cassura or

;

quasi-caesura

but the third and fourth feet are never com-

prehended in the same word.^ VII. There are two minor divisions of the verse, namedivides the second, and one which divides ly, one which
the
1.

fifth foot

thus,

Elmsley ingeniously defends verses of this formation by a hypothesis that the vowel causing the elision might be treated as appertaining to the preceding word, and be so pronounced as to produce a kind of Elms, ad Aj. 1100. {Mus. Crit. vol. i., p. hephthemimeral caesura.
477.)
2.

Tale, In/rod. p. 6. third and fourth feet were comprehended in one and the same word, a most inelegant and inharmonious division of the line into As in the following : three equal parts would unnecessarily be the result.
If..the

y Kupf up' av

TiapeanoTCELg

xpV^IJ-^^v sfiuv.

Compare the remark of Viclorinus (p. 2525), qui singula verba in dipodiis habet,
" Prasentium
|

"

pcssimus autem versus,

divinitas
|

c<zlestmm."

Hermann

seeks to limit this rule of Porson's by making the regulation not absolute in its nature, but only highly ajiproved of by the tragic writers. Elcm. Doctr. Metr. p. 71, ed. Glaag.

IAMBIC TRIMETER.
1.

63
fj-adelv.

To

TTolov
I

8V yap ixoXk' dv e^evpoi

|

2.

'Apx'fjv (ipaxslO'V si yiajSoiiiev

^X-nidoq.
is

The

former of these divisions, though not necessary,

;

agreeable

the latter constitutes

what

is

called the Cretic

termination,^

and leads

to the consideration of the

Porsonian Pause.
I.

When

the iambic trimeter has, after a

word of more

than one syllable, the cretic termination ( as included in one word

;

),^
;

either

KpvTTTOvra x^^P'^
or

'^^^ TrpocrwTrov ef-nrdXlv

;

-^ consisting<of

and a syllable

as,
6rj.

Krj(5og ds rovfibv Kat

abv ovKer' earZ

Xalp', ov yap rjulv iari rovro aol ye

or of a monosyllable and

[i^v.

as,

KaAwf
II.

juev elTrag,

Bvyarep, aXXd tw KaXco.

then the fifth foot must he an iambus.^

Hence

the following lines are faulty in metre

"K-rXaq 6 xO'^'^^oiai vcjTOig ovpavov (Eurip. Ion. 1)

To

fir)

fidraLOV 6'

tic

nercjirojv

oaxppovuv {JEsch. Suppl.

206);

and are
1.

to

be corrected as follows

:*

Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 290. cretic is only another name for the amphimacer. 3. This is Porson's celebrated canon for the pause in tragic trimeters, given in the Supplement to his Preface to the Hecuba. Elmsley (EdNo. Rev. the same inb. rule in other words, but not so clearly. 37) gives " The the must be it ends a word of first syllable of short, if fifth foot ^^ The reason why the tragic poets observed this two or more syllables. rule respecting the fifth foot of a senarius is sought to be explained as " Causa autem follows by Hermann quare ista vocabulorum divisio Quoniam in fine ciijusque versus, ubi, exhausdisplicere debet, h<xc est. tis jam propemodum pulmonibus, Icnior pronunciationis decursus desideratur, asperiora omnia, quo diffieilius pronunciantur, eo magis etiam aures ladunt : propterca sedu.lo evitatur ilia vocabulorum conditio, qu<B ullimum versus ordincm longiore mora a prcEcedente disjungit, eaque re
2.

The

decursum numcrorum impcdit ac retardat." 4. Porsoii, Suppl. ad Frmf. ad Hcc. p. xxxvi.

Elmsley, Edinb. Rev,

No.

37.

64
"ArXag

IAMBIC TRIMETER.
6 voyroig %aA:t'oiaiv ovpavov.
6' e/c neT(onoao)(pp6vo)v.
fifth foot is

To
III.

fii]

ndratov

But when the second syllable of the

monosyllable incapable of beginning a verse, such as dv, av, yap, Se, fiev, ovv, together with all enclitics, used as
such, then the fifth foot
Di) 6' 7]iuv
7]

may be
HLOovaa,

a spondee

;'

as,

fiioelg [lev Xoyco.

liTTSvdcjuev, eyfcoV(x)[iev rjyov fiol yepov.

IV.

The

particle
;

av

is

of most frequent occurrence in

it

this position

with respect to which,

must be observed
its

that

it is

in this case invariably subjoined to

;

verb,
:^

which

always

suffers elision
El' fioi

as in the following line

oiptv, e'lnoLii'

Xsyoig TTjv
foot

av tots.

V.

The

fifth

cretic termination

must comes

also be

an iambus, although the

after a monosyllable,

monosyllable

is

incapable of beginning a verse.

is

when that Hence

the following line

wrong

Tlvag Xoyovg epovatv, ev yap

ru) [xadelv {CEd. Col. 115)

~cb

and we should read, with Elmsley, ev 6e

VI.

Nor should

ear',
foot.''

by

elision for earl,

nadelv? form the first

syllable of the fifth

VII.

Thus

it

which the
1
.

fifth

appears that there are only three cases in foot may be a spondee.

(By

far the

fifth foot

most frequent) when both syllables of the are contained in the same word.
xxxi.

1.

Porson,

ibid. p.

The words

refer to the circumstance of the

sometimes emphatic.

pronouns col, fioi, Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 291.

in the text, ''used as fie, ce, &c.,

such,''''

being

Gr. Pros. p. 292. 2. Porson, ibid. p. xxxii. This extension of the Porsonian 3. Elm.iley, Edinb. Rev. No. 37. canon, though proceeding from Elmsley, has not met with the universal Compare Malthia, ad Eurip. Phaaniss. 403 acquiescence of scholars. {Phaniss. 414.) (414), and Scholefidd, ad Pors. Eurip. p. 308. " His 4. Elmsley, ad Eurip. Bacch. 240. exccptis, nullum scnarium in initio existcre quinti pedis, lav' vel iaf hapulo, qui, apud tragicos
beat."

Sandford,

IAMBIC TRIMETER.
2.

65

"When the

first

syllable of the fifth foot is a monosyl-

lable capable of beginning a verse,

and not disjoined

3.

from the following syllable by any pause in the sense. When the second syllable of the fifth foot is a monosyllable incapable of beginning a verse.'

Of Elision
I.

and Aphceresis in

the

Iambic Trimeter.
e, o,

In the iambic trimeter the short vowels

I,

and the

doubtful a,

are elided

when
is

the next

word begins with a

i

vowel.
II.

But the

of TTpo

not elided, nor the

of jrept

in

other words, the Attics never place rrpd or nepl before a word beginning, with a vowel.^ In compounds npo is contracted with e or
III.
o,

as TrpovKecfieda, rrpovnTog, &;c.

is

The
by

of the dative plural, third declension,

never

elided
rarely j^

the Attic poets, that of the dative singular very

The elision of e before the particle av is very rare. are ten instances in Attic poetry similar to sypaip' av, for eypaipa av, for one similar to eypaij}' av, for eypa'^e av.^
IV.

There

Some apparent exceptions to the 1. Elmslcy, Edinb. Rev. No. 37. Porsonian canon are not real exceptions thus, where ovSeir and uTideig, so given, ought, in Attic orthography, to be written ov6' etc, and fiT/d' eic ; and where, in the plays of Sophocles, tj/liiv, vfilv, are exhibited as spondees, with the last syllable long, whereas that poet employed these pronouns thus, ijjmv vjiiv, with the last syllable short. Porson, Suppl. Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 293, j noHs. Praf. p. XXXV. Elmsley, 1. c. " 2. Compare Porson, ad Eurip. Med. 2S4. Tragici mmquam in senarios, trochaicos, aut, puto, anapcEstos legitimos, irepl admiltunt ante sive sivc in in eadem, divcrsis vocilus. Imo ne in melica quivocalem, dem verbum vel substantivum hujusmodi compositionis intrare sinunt ; raro admodum adjcctivum vel advcrbnim.'''' " " denies 3. the legitimacy of the elisElmsley," observes Sandford, ion in any instance Porson, in the preface to the Hecuba, inclines to
:

be more

are, unquestionably, instances of this elision in Attic verse which all the ingenuity of Elmsley has failed to remove but from its extreme rarity it is inadmissible in modern composition." Gr. Pros. p. 297, in notis. 4. Elmsley, ad Evrip. Med. 416. Blomfield, however, limits this canon of Elmsley's to those cases where confusion might otherwise " where first aorists and arise are

lenient.

There

viz., perfects employed. Neque hanc elisionem jioetis Atticis displicutsse credo, pr(Zterquu,m in iis vocibus,
;

F2

66
V.

IAMBIC TRIMETER.

The

long vowels

tj,

w, and the doubtful v, are never

elided.

VI.
ful

A diphthong cannot be elided before a short or doubtvowel.

The
diphthongs of the nominative plural of nouns Homeric Greek.
aL is never elided by the tragic or third persons of verbs, nor in the in-

VII.

are never elided either in Attic or VIII.

The diphthong
first

writers in the
finitive.'

IX.
totally

The

elision of oi,

even in the words

[xot,

cot, rot, is

denied by some scholars,^ and allowed by others only in the case of olfiot before o).^

vowel is sometimes, in Aittic Greek, cut from the beginning of a word, after a long by aphseresis vowel or diphthong in the close of the preceding word.*
X.
short
off

The

XI.
so cut
sis.

The
off',

instances in

which the

initial

a appears

to

be

are, according to

Elmsley, better referred to era-

j^^

Hence, in his opinion, such forms as [jlt} 'fxadel and 'noTiaaaOai, ought to be pronounced [ia[iadel and judrro-

Of Crasis
I.

and Synizesis.

The

article, followed by a short, always coalesces into

i.

uli confusio inde oriri posset, Blomf. ad JEsch. Choeph. 841.

e.,

in aoristis primis ct perfectis.^^

1. Erfurdt, ad Soph. Aj. 190, where an examination and correction of the ditTorent passages that militate against this canon may be seen. On the same side is Ehnsley, ad Eurip. Iph. Taur. 678. {Mus. Crit. vol. ii., p. 292.) Hermann, however, seems mclined not to make the rule " Non so absolute a one, in his remarks on Soph. Philoct. 1060. uhique equidem elisioncm diphthongi defendam, sed hie cam 7iolim sine librorum Nam minus suaviter ad aures accedit leicftd/jaofiai aucloritatc removeri. cum ictu in ultima ante casuram,''^ &c. " Sed hodie inter omnes 2. Elmsley, ad Eurip. Med. 56. fere erudiios convenit, dativum fiol clisionem pati no7i posse, licet cum quibusdam vocibus per crasin coalescere possil." 3. Blomfield, Remarks on Matlhia, G. G. p. sxxvii,, third edition. Compare Soph. Incorporated into the fifth edition by Kenrick, p. 87. Koen. ad Greg. Corinth, p. 171. Aj. 587. 4. Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 299, in nolis. 5. Elmsley, ad Eurip. Heracl. 460.

IAMBIC TRIMETER.
long a
;

67

as, 6 dvrjp into 'dvrjp

like.'

rov dvdpbg into Tavdpog,

and the
II.

Kat never makes

;

a crasis with ev, except in comdst.

pounds
III.

and never with

In words joined by crasis, as Kan, Kav, icdv (for Kai en, Kai ev, Kat dv), and tlie like, i should not be subscribed

except where Kai forms a crasis with a diphthong containing an iota as, Kara for Kai elra ; but KanL for Kai ent, &c. IV. M^ oi) and ov always coalesce into one syllable
; ?}'

with the Attics

is to

thus, to

[ir]

ov r66' ayyof {Track. 622),

be pronounced to fiov Tod' dyyog, &c. V. Both in tragic and comic versification, a very frequent in synizesis occurs in the words ?/ eldevai, and fii] eiSsvaL
;

snei ov, in eyco ov, and in the concurrence of o> ov, and o) sl. VI. The tragic writers make the genitive singular and
plural of the third declension in eug, labic or dissyllabic, as suits the verse.

ewv either monosyl-

Of Hiatus
I.

in the

Iambic Trimeter^

&ic.

Hiatus of any kind is not admitted by the tragic wriBut observe ters into their iambic and trochaic measures.
that,
II.

When

a vowel in the end of a word, after another

vowel or diphthong, is elided, a collision takes place between the preceding vowel or diphthong and the vowel or
diphthong
at the

beginning of the next word

e.v

thus,

JlaaCiv dvaidet'
TeKp-ripi.'

d' k-roirjoag fJoXoJv,

oacf)?].

dvdpMTTOLGLV (^naaag
is

III.

The

hiatus after ti and oti

admitted in

comedy
;

as, Tt av, Arist.

Thesm. 852
;

ti dv, Plut.

464

otl dx-

deasTaiy Av. 84

oti ov, Ach. 516, &;c.

IV. In exclamations c^nd the use

of interjections, the

Matthice G. G. () 54. The 1. Dawes, Misc. Crit. p. 481, eel. Kidd. lonians and Dorians, on the contrary, contracted u'vr/p, ruvdpd^, &c. 2. Sand/ord's Gr. Pros. p. 308.

68
tragic writers

IAMBIC TRIMETER.
sometimes allow a long vowel or diphthong
;

to stand before a vowel

thus,

'OroTOt, AvKEi' "AtzoXIov ol eyo), eyw.' 'fl ovTog Klag, devrepov oe TrpooKoXCJ.

{^sch. Ag. 1228.)

{Soph. Aj. 89.)

V. Interjections, such as (ptv,(pev, &c., often occur extra metrum, and sometimes other words, especially in passages
of emotion
;

thus,
air' oniidriiiv?

TdXaLva- ovk eariv dXXrj- (patSpa y' ovv

VI. The diphthongs ai and oi are occasionally shortened by the Attic poets before a vowel in the middle of a

word;^

as,

JlaXalov re 'dTjoavptOfia Aiovvaov rods.

500.) Kafi' (iv rotavrxi %eipt riiiopelv

{Eurip. Electr.

MXoi.

{(Ed. T. 140.)

Of the Comic
I.

and Satyric Trimeter}

The comic

first five

iambic trimeter admits an anapaest into the the verse of as, places
;

Kdrdtd

Kdrd6d
\

|1

Kdrdbd

Karddd
\

ndrdd/i

aofxai.

||

{Vcsp. 979.)
II.

It

also admits a dactyl into the fifth place

61'
1

thus,

IlvdoLU

dv

I!

Tov XPV^I^

ov
1

7]

II

^MV

otI
I

vod.

II

(Plut. 55.)
III. It

what

rarely,
;

allows of lines without caesura and, though somesuch also as divide the line by the dipodia of
;

scansion
1

thus,
ad
loc.

the language of Blomfield, Hoc ut reclc tov h/i) in hiatu porrecta. syllaha

Compare

" Notanda

est

ultima

fiat,

hiatus in ictum ca-

dere debet." 2. (Ed. Col. 318.

3.

^, ,-,^r,c &c. Compare Track. 1037.Electr. 1159,

4,

Compare page

note 3.

Gaisford, ad Hcpluzst. p. Ekm. DocLr. Melr. p. 80, ed. Glasg.

4.

242. Taie,

Introd. p.

9. Hermann,

"

IAMBIC TRIMETER.
(Plut. 68.)
;

69

'AttoAw tov dvdpcoTTOv KaKiara tovtovl.

^novddg

(pipetg

rwv
\

djXTreXGiv

rsT[xr]jjL^VG)v

(^Ach. 183.)

IV. It violates the rule respecting the Porsonian

thus,

pause

AovXgv yeveoOai 7rapa(ppovovvrog

Ka/cwf enpaTTov Kai rtivrj^ i]v Aexov TOV avdpa Kat tov opvLV
V.
It
\

deanoTOV.
\

(Plut. 2.)

Oldd
tov
\

roi.
'&eov.

(lb. 29.)

{lb. 63.)

permits also the concurrence of resolved feet, yet not so that an ana^oeest should come after a dactyl or tribrach.
VI.
its

The

structure, to

iambic trimeter of the satyric drama appears, in occupy a middle place between the" nicety

of the tragic laws and the extreme license of

comedy

as

far, indeed, as we are able to form any opinion concerning it from the scanty remains that have come down to oui

times.'

VII.

The

trimeter, in the

anapsest is found, as in the case of the comic the pause is first five places of the verse
;

in like

manner neglected, and

trisyllabic or resolved feet

are of frequent occurrence.^

We will now return

ing iambic measures.
8.

to the

most important of the remain-

Trimeter Catalectic.

SX^^

^/^'

^'^

II

"^^

vava
I

(TTo/'-tTT

II

ov avp

av.
[

||

9.

Trimeter Brackycatalectic.
\\

^vyevT

d nalS
I

onol
\

6v a

\\

dovdv.
[

||

10. Season, or Choliambus.

ibg at
1
. I

fiev

\\

yei

Bov
|

TraAw

||

KaTfj
is

poJVTd.

||

The

only satyric

drama

that has reached us

the Cyclops of

Eu-

ripides.
2. Gaisford {ad Hephczst. p. 242) inclines to exclude the anapsest from the third place in the satyric trimeter, but without sufficient authority. On the occurrence of trisyllabic feet, consult Casaubon,de Sat. Foes. p.

222.

70
I.

IAMBIC TETRAMETER.
This measure
is

acatalectic, Avith a

nothing more than the iambic trimeter spondee instead of an iambus for the

sixth foot.

Hence

its

name

or choliambus (^^coXLafidog,
II.

of scazon {oiid^G)v, " lame iambus").

"
limping")

since the line generally an iambus, the fifth and sixth both if would otherwise be too heavy
fifth foot is

The

feet were spondees even in Theocritus

though instances of
as,

this

kind occur

6 i^ov
eI fisv
III.

Gonoi
I I

II

bg ev

6dd'
| \

'Itttt

||

ibvd^

Kelrat
|

||

TTOvrj

II

pog

[irj

-noTepx
is

\\

^v

tw
|

rviibcx).

||

This species of verse

after

also called the Hipponactic

trimeter, from the virulent poet

it,

Hipponax,

who
for

invented

and

whose example

it

was employed

purposes

of railing and sarcasm. The writers who used it constructed it generally in the neatest and most exact manner, rarely employing resolutions, and entirely avoiding the anapaest, except that Babrius has sometimes taken it into the first
place.

The

tragic writers abstained altogether from this

measure, nor did the comic poets use it, unless, perhaps, with allusion to the iambic writers, as Eupolis in the Baptse
{ap. Priscian, p. 1328).^

11.
el fioi
I.
I

Tetrameter Catalectic.
|

yevoZ

||

ro nap

Oevog

||

KaXfj

re nal
\

||

repel

va.
\

||

This measure was much used by the comic poets, but It not at all by the tragic writers. may be considered as

two dimeters, the

syllable.^
1.

first

complete, the second wanting one

Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr.

viz.,

p. 94, ed.

The iambic tetrameter song called "Miss Bailey,"

2.
It

catalectic is

"A

Glasg. used also in English as in the from Halifax," &c. bold captain
;

forms also the prevalent measure of the modern Greek ])oetry, or, in other words, it is their heroic verse, (Consult FavricI, Chants populaires de la Grcce Modcrnc,\o\. i.,p. cxix., Disc. Prelim.) The following lines will illustrate
this,

the pronunciation being regulated entirely

by accent

IAMBIC TETRAMETER.
II.

71
of iambic

This measure

is

the most harmonious

verses, and those lines are the most pleasing Avhich have the caesura at the end of the fourth foot or second metre as,
;

el fiOL

yevoLTO irapdevog,

KaXr] re Kal repeiva.

this caesura.
:

But the comic writers often neglect

III.

The

following

is

the metrical scale

72
IX.

IAMBIC TETRAMETER.

We

have remarked above, that the most pleasing

caesura in this species of verse falls after the fourth foot. Sometimes the verse is even so constructed as to give a

succession of iambic dipodias, separately heard lowing from Aristophanes, Plutus, 253, scq}
^i2

as the fol-

-noXXa

6rj

tw
j

deairorxi

\\

"Avdpeg

(ptXot

Kai Srjjxorat

||

ravrbv dv[iov (fjayovreg, Kal rov tiovelv epaarai.

\

12.
T.

Tetrameter Acatahctic.

Boiscus,
ters.

This measure, called also Boiscius, from its inventor is not used by the Greek tragic and comic wriHepha^stion gives an example from Alcaeus, as
:^

fol-

lows

Ae^al

[IS kG>
II

II

ixd^ovr

a 6e^

j|

at

Xiao
j

oiial

||

ae Xiao
|

oiial.
II.

The Roman comic and

tragic poets,

however, made
Latins called
it

much
III.

use of this species of verse.

The

octonarius.

This measure allows of one of two

divides
it

caesuras.

Plau-

tus

commonly

in the fourth arsis,

;

and therefore

which is indicated by the intended it to be asynartete as in the Amphitr. 3, 4, 5, and hiatus and short syllable
;

Bacch. 4,
Ills nd
I

9, 9.

vim
|

sal

||

vum nun
|

ciat

ventum

senis.
\\

||

Trol
I

a 6 pdtrl
isti
I

a u
\\

Perg

dmum, 6 Prm
||

aiit

rati

ad

||

||

me peis

rt

II

senix.

In Terence, on the other hand, this kind of verse

not

asynartete, because he usually makes the caesura in the thesis

which follows the

\

fourth arsis

as,

Nunc A7n
fdxo
1.
I

phitrm
||

||

n^m

volt
|

dtUi

||

di-meiis

pater

\\

prohe.

Tate, Introd. p. 10.

2.

Hermann, Doctr. Elem. Metr.

p. 102, ed.

Glasg.

TROCHAIC VERSE.

73

II.
I.

Of Trochaic
its

Verse.

Trocliaic verse derives

name from

the foot

which

prevails in
II.

The

the trochee. it, namely, trochee, however, as in the case of the iambus,

convertible into a tribrach, and the spondee and anapaest are also admitted, but not the dactyl, except in a proper
is

There is this difference, however, between iambic and trochaic measure, that the latter admits the spondee and anapaest into the even places, the former into the uneven.
name.'
III.

The

following are the principal trochaic metres

1.

Manometer Acatalectic, or Base.

dare
|

vaKTog.
I

\\

Tiflixdr'

OLKcbv.

II

which, as
ters.

Trochaic monometers are usually found in systems, in most other numbers, so in the trochaic also, it is the custom, especially of the comic writers, to form into dime-

These systems are continued in one unbroken tenour, concluded by a catalectic verse. On this account there is no place for hiatus at the end of each verse, nor is it held
necessary
339, seq.)
to

conclude a verse with an entire word

is

but the

whole system

as one verse.

Thus

in Aristophanes (^Pac.

we have

the following:
//

Kal fiodre, Kal yeXdr'6r] yap e^eorac rod' vjxlv

ttXeIv, fievELV, Ktvelv, KadevSeiv,

eg TTavTjyvpeig decjpelv,

eOTidadai, KOTradl^eiv,
ov6apL^eiv, iov iov KEKpayevaL.
1.

Compare remarks under

trochaic tetrameter catalectic.

74
2.

TROCHAIC VERSE.
Manometer Hypercatalectic.
ttovtI
I

(bv
I

GdX

II

wv
ov
a.

Mam
BdpOdp
3.

6dg tok

||

w
I

|3o

II

Dimeter Acatalectic.
Scale.

TROCHAIC VERSE.
6.

75

Dimeter Hypercatalectic.^
6 ro^o Ev orddfi.
||
\

dg e

yiifj,'

rag
||

Udp
|

||

Ig.
\\

Tovg

fiev
7.

ololv

ittttl

Kolg.

Trimeter Catalectic.^

epxe

Tai rl
I

\\

iid
||

yv
elre

valKei
| |

\\

o)

yev
||

el.
[

||

riders.
\

firj ijjocp

117)6'

ear

6J /CTi;7r

og.

||

[|

8.

Trimeter Brachycatalectic.
II

61 61
1

Tzpog -dpov
I

Tov

6'e

juov TTorfi

||

ovg ea w 6v a6dKp
|

juo
\

||

Xovreg.
||

vrov

ov6elg.

||

9.

Trimeter Hypercatalectic.
II

TjXdov
TCJ jwev

et^

(JojU

ovg Iv
||

ai}0' e
] |

||

Kdord
\

ool Xey
|

w.

o
I

orpdr
10.

T^-^a

rd^* Trdr

||

?}p e/cA

7/i^r

||

0.

Tetrameter Catalectic.
Scale.

76
always
given.'
0)

TROCHAIC VERSE.
at the

end of the fourth

foot

as in the lines juat

8g

Xevaosr', 0l6i,TT0vg ode, TTarpag Q'/]6i]g tvoLKOi, rd kXelv' aivtyiiar'' ydr], Kal Kpariarog r]v dvqp.
|
|

This
poets.
II.

caesura,

however,

is

often neglected

by the comic

The

end with some word

with a preposition,
III.

fourth foot of a tragic tetrameter should always that allows a pause in the sense not
;

for instance,
after.
^

or an article belonging in

syntax to what comes

If the first

dipodia of the verse

to

is

contained in entire

words (and so as

be followed
is

at least

by a

slight

break
tri-

of the sense), the second foot brach ;^ as,

\\

a trochee, or

may

be a

w<: arifiog, olKrpd 7rd(7;)^wv, e^eXavvofiat x^ovog. Kad' 6 Bpofiiog, d)g 'ifioiys ^aiveraL, do^av Xeyu).
||

fxrjTepog de

|1

[xrjd' 'idotjU [xvrjfia-

TToXe^ia

yap

tjv.

IV. In every place except the fourth and seventh, a dacThis dactyl is chiefly alis admitted. tyl of proper names lowed to enter where its two short syllables are enclosed
the

between two longs in the same word very rarely when word begins with them under other circumstances,
; ;

never

;*

as,

1. This caesura is found neglected in ^-Eschylus, Pcrs. 164, where Porson corrects the verse by removing Siiryif/ to the end of the line an emendation of which Hermann speaks rather slightingly. {Porson, Hermann, Elcrn. DocLr. Melr. p. 52, ed. Suppl. ad Prczf. p. xliii.
;

Glasg.) Blomfield follows Porson. 2. Porson, Suppl. ad Praf. p. xliii.

3. This nicety of structure in the long trochaic of tragedy was first disConsult Tracts and Misc. Criticisms of Porson, covered by Porson. Class. Jnurn. No. 45, p. 166, seq. ed. Kidd, p. 197. Maltby, Lex. Pros, p, Ixvii. Tate, in his Introduction, p. 12, examines and explains (from his paper in the Class. Journ. 1. c.) the different lines that appear to militate against this canon of Porson's. 4. The principle on which this rule is probably based has already been

alluded to in a previous note, page 60.

TROCHAIC VERSE.
ecg

77
j

dp
I

I(j)lye

||

veldv

EAet'Ty^

||

voarog
de

fjV

ne

\\

-npwiiev

Of.
|

iravreg

''E.XXfiv

||

e^-

arpdr

05-

||

M.vpiu6o

vcjv ov
\

||

Gol

nap
ov
I

^v.
|]

^vyyov

r' e
I

/i^v Ili'/la

dfiv re

||

rov ra
|

Se ^vv

||

dpibvrd

^iof.

or

V. As to scansion, one limitation only obtains ; that ^- ^ in the sixth ^ -- - in the place, never precedes

seventh.

Even

in
:

comedy, a verse

like the following is

exceedingly rare

ovre yap vavayog, av

VI. If the verse
cretic
is

fj,rj

yrjg XdOrjraL

(pepofievog.

concluded bv one word forming the

termination ( -^ ), or by more words than are to that amount united in meaning, so that after the sixth foot
that portion of sense

and sound
or

is
;

the sixth foot

or
-^

is

-^

^^

that

separately perceived, then is, it may not be

Thus,

i^eXavvoj^ieada narpLdog, Kal

eXTTidsg 6' ovttoj KaOevdova'
,

yap

rjXdeg

k^eXdv.

alg irsTTotda

avv
\

-^eolg.

take

VII. If from the beginning of a trochaic tetrameter you away a cretic (--'), or a first paeon ( ^ -^ ^), or
f--

fourth pffion

^ ),

a regular iambic trimeter will be

formed.

Thus,
T]

ddaaov

n'
I

sxpriv Trpodatveiv

lic6[j,rjv

61'

dareog.

ovxi MSve Xecj rpo-rroiOL ^p^fJ-^d' oIgteov rdde. Kotvbv TToXiratg enccpipcov eyKXrjjxa re Idlov fj
I

Vin. The senarius thus formed, however, must always

have apenthemimeral

may

caesura, in order that the proper pause take place at the end of the fourth trochaic foot.'
fifth place.

1. It admits, too, a dactyl, although very rarely, into the Porson, Suppl. ad Prmf. p. xliii.

G2

78

ANAP^STIC VERSE.
Comic Tetrameter
Catalectic.

I. The scansion agrees with that of the tragic, except only that the spondee in the sixth sometimes, though very as in the folrarely, precedes the tribrach in the seventh
;

lowing line from Philemon

ovre yap vavaydg, dv
II.

fiij

yrig Xd6r]raL ^epofievog.

The

comic, like the tragic tetrameter, admits the dac-

tyl

III.

only in the case of a proper name, and not otherwise. As regards structure, it must be remarked, that the

They pay

comic poets freely neglect the nice points of tragic verse. little attention to the pause at the end of the

fourth foot, and to the rules respecting those divisions

which

sometimes take place after the first dipodia or before the final cretic. Lines like the following occur in great abundance
:'

TTpcora fxev xo-Lpeiv 'Adrjvat

oLot Kat rolg ^v^fidxotg.

arr' dv

ro (BeXnov Tpsneiv. nXelara yap &eCov dndvrojv (hcpeXovaaig t7]v txoXiv.

vjj,eLg
\

e^afidpTrjr' , eni

III.
I.

Of Anapmstic

Verse.

(^

Anapaestic verse admits its proper foot, the anapasst _) with the dactyl, which is said to be admitted Kar'
It

dvTiTTddeiav.

admits also the spondee, and sometimes,

-- ^ ^ ). though very rarely, the proceleusmaticus (II. Systems of anapaestic verse are scanned by the dipo-

dia.
III.

They

are generally dimeter acatalectic.

like other dimeters,

These, however,

have not the

last syllable

sr/napheia [ovvdcpeia) or principle of continuous scansion prevails throughout them, so that

if

common.

they run on, from beginning to end, as but one verse.

IV.

they

all

formed

The end

dimeter acatalectic,

of an anapaestic system is marked by a or, as it is more commoidy termed, a

1.

Tate, Introd.

p. 13.'

ANAP^STIC VERSE.

79

one in
V.

paroemiac line, and the last syllable in this line is the only this system which is excepted from the law of syna-

pheia, and

which may be long

or short indifferently.
:

The

principal anapaestic measures are as follows

1.

Monometer Acatalectic^ or Base.

1

80
IV.

ANAP^STIC VERSE.

The

anapaestic dimeter admits indiscriminately the

for the anapaest.

dactyl and spondee lows

:

The

scale

is

as fol-

ANAP^STIC VERSE.
6aljX(bv
Trdpd[j,v
ode.
I

81
\\

rig

\\

XevKfiv
\\

aWspa
.'

djj,evdg.

i^v^Twv
5.

d' dX,6i6g

\\

elg

reXog

^
|

ovSelg.

||

An

avoid too

anapaest ought not to be preceded by a dactyl, to many short syllables occurring together. On

this subject,

which

is

one of great awkwardness and

difficulty to metrical scholars, the following rules

may

be

laid down.'

(a.)

The

concurrence of dactyl with anapaest, in that

order, is never found within the

same syzygy.

And

hence the following

as given in the

line of

Euripides [Alcest. 80),

common
\\

editions,
(jidijievrj,

dOTLg dv evenol
is

TTorepov

well corrected by Monk,

who

reads

stiTOt for

ev-

ilTOL.
(/3.)

The concurrence

of dactyl with anapeest, in that

order, is not very often found

between one dimeter

:

and another, as

in Euripides (Electr. 1320, seq.)

^vyyove (plXrdTe
did yap
(y.)
\

^evyvva' 7)jmg Trarpiojv.

is

The

combination

very rare where one syzygy

closes with a dactyl and the next begins with an anapaest, as in the following {Electr. 1317) :

Sdpaei UdXXddog
IV.

\\

oaldv

'/j^eig.

Thus
is

far of the anapeestic dimeter,

it

when

the

first

syzygy, as most usually

does, ends with a word.

;

This,

however,

not always the case

and of such

A'erses as

want

that division, those are the

pleasing also,
1.

most frequent, and the most which have the first syzygy after an anapaest

2. 3.

U.

Eurip. Androm. 1228 (1204). Iph. A. 161 (159).

Tate, Introd. p. 15.

Sandford,

Gr. Pros. p. 314.

82
(sometimes
with, the
after a

ANAP^STIC VERSE.
spondee) overflowing into the second,
anapasstic throughout.'
[

movement

Thus,

Txrepvyodv kperiiol acv duocoTTperrelg. Kal ^vyxaipov

|

glv kpeaao^evoL.

Here the
after

overflovi^ into the

and ^vyxaipovaiv second syzygy, the first syzygy ending the penultimate syllables of each of these words.
last syllables of eperiiolotv

V. In this species of verse one hiatus alone is permitted, in the case of a final diphthong or long vowel so placed as
to form a short syllable.

The

following instances

may

serve

:^

Kat eXeLobdrai vaCov epsrai.

TTodeovaaL
i6e.lv

{Pers. 39.)
[lb. 548.)

dpri^vytav.
(^Ib.

oixsrai, dv6pu)v.

60.)
(^Hecub. 123.)

Tcj Qrjaeida 6', ocfw 'Adrjvcov.

VI.

The synapheia

{avvd(l)eta), that property of the anfirst

apaestic

system which Bentley

demonstrated,'

is

nei-

ther

more nor

less than continuous scansion, that

first

is,

scan-

sion continued with strict exactness from the

to the

syllable

very last, but not including the last itself, as that syllable, and only that in the whole system, may be long

or short indifferently.

Thus,

sir dpdfxdv Efiol Kat (piXorrjra

GTrevdo)v GirevdovTi ttoO'

ri^ec.

(Prom.

v.

199, seq.)

Here the

verse 199 becomes long, from the short vowel a in (pLXorrira being united with the consonants
last syllable of

Had a single consonant, GTt at the beginning of verse 200. or any pair of consonants like Kp, ttA, &c., followed in verse 200, the last syllable of verse 199 would have been short
in violation of the metre.

Again,

fieydXa Qejil, Kal norvt.' "ApTefxt, XevGoed' a ndaxo) {Med. 161.)

1.

Tate, p. 16.
p. 237, ed. GlassDissertation on the Epistles of Fkalaris, p. 150, seq., ed. Land.

2. 3.

Hermann, Elrm. Doelr. Mctr.

1816.

ANAP^STIC VERSE.
If,

83

after verse 161, ending with a sliort vowel, any vowel whatever had followed in verse 162, that would have vio-

lated the

law of hiatus observed

in these verses.

And

if

double consonant, or any pair of consonants like kt, an, had followed in verse 162, the word "Aprsfu, 6jj,, jxv, Sic,
necessarily combined with those consonants, would have formed a cretic or amphimacer (-'), and not the dactyl required.
all is correct.'

But XevaaeO' follows, with the

initial A,

and

of synapheia, however, is occasionally vinamely, sometimes in a change of speaker, as Eurip. Med. 1368; Electr. 1333; Soph. CEd. Col. 139, 143, 170, 173, 1757 Antig. 931. It is violated sometimes,
VII.
olated
;
;

The law

also, at the

end of a sentence, and likewise in exclamations,

as in jEsch.
VIII.

Agam.
1

1544.*^
its

The

parcemiac verse has

2

scale as follows

84

ANAPiESTIC VERSE.
iTrncjv t' eXarrjp

libadd
|

V7]g.

(Pers. 32.)

(3sXog TjXidLov aKfiipei

iprj(f)(i>

ev.
|

[Agam. 374.)
{Suppl. 8.)

TToXecdg yvibadli

aai.
\

Other examples may be found in the Sept. ad Theh. 832, and Suppl. 983, but these arise, most probably, from some
corruption in the text." XII. In the anapaestic dimeter, as has already been remarked, the first syzygy usually ends with a word but in
;

the paroemiac this

very

common

very seldom the case, and hence a shape of this latter species of verse is found
is
:

in the following line

exOpolg erdxapr
XIII.

d mmovda.
[

The

parcsmiac sometimes, though rarely, begins

;

with a dactyl

thus,

ovK diTonovadv to yvvalKcbv.

But it comes most agreeably to the ear when it presents the last three feet of a dactylic hexameter with an initial
syllable
;^

thus,

Tcdv
I

fiol (l)o6spdv

TO Txpoaepfrdv

e
I

x^polg enlxdpTd Trindvdd.

Or with two

initial syllables,

when an

anapaest begins

as,

(plXog

IotI PedaloTepog aol.

XIV. With regard to position, the Attics observe the same laws, as to a vowel before a mute and liquid, &;c., in the anapaestic dimeter which prevail in the iambic trimeter.''

XV. The
cided.''
It

question whether the augment

still

may

be occa-

sionally rejected in regular anapaistics

is

remains unde-

safer not to exercise this license in

modem

versification.
Doc.tr. Mctr. p. 240, ed. Glasg. Tate, Introd. p. 18. Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 316. 3. Some instances, however, may be fo\md in the anapasstic dimeter, where a short vowel at the end of a word is lengthened before Tvp, tt/I, Consult Erfurdt, ad Soph. Aj. 1120. &c., in the beginning of the next. Blomf. ad JEsch. Sept. c. Theh. lO.'Sa. 4. Elmsley {ad Eurip. Med. 1380) is in favour of the occasional re1.

Hermann, Elcm.

2.

ANAPiESTIC VERSE.

85

XVI. In systems of anapaests the tragic writers neither always employ nor always discard the Doric dialect, at least those peculiarities of it which are usual in the choral
parts or admitted into the senarius.
4.
I.

Tetrameter Catalectic.

This metre, called Aristophanic, from the frequent use of it by Aristophanes, consists of two dimeters, the last
of

which
1

is catalectic.

Its

scale
4

is

as follows
6

2
I

Examples.

akV

f\

6f\

OSTS TJjv
ibnTG)v
I

xpr\v 61
I

||

rt

"klyuv

vfidg

\\

g6(I)6v

Co
|

vIkt]

jj

ydarspd
I

||

rolg

ovy

yevealv

||

Kar' ovk
|

eox^jv

Jf

afie^fj
II.

Gag.
first

In the

scale, besides the anapaest

three places, as will appear from the and spondee, a dactyl may be

used

but

it

much more
III.

must be observed that a dactyl is admitted sparingly into the second than into the first
is

place of the syzygy.'

dactyl

also admitted into the fifth place, but is

always excluded from the fourth and sixth places. IV. The two feet ^, ^ ^ in that order, nowhere
,

occur in the anapaestic tetrameter. The catalectic syllable is never preceded by a spondee in the seventh place, which should always be an anapaest. The proceleusmaticus is excluded from the verse.

V. The caesura always occurs after the fourth foot, which must never end with an article or a preposition. Besides
jection of the augment, but Blomfield (ad ^sch. Pers. 912) controverts this opinion. Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 320. 1. In the twelve hundred (or more) tetrameter anapaestics of

Aristoph-

anes, only nineteen examples occur of a dactyl in the second place, the only second place of a syzygy which it can occupy. Tate, Introd. p. 19.

86
this

DACTYLIC VERSE,
main
division, moreover, there should
first

be likewise an-

other one after the

syzygy, which always gives an

agreeable finish to a verse.

Thus,
\\

aXX

ijS?]

XP^F

"^^
I

At'yiv v[i,dg

Go<pbv,
\\

viKrjaere rrjvdL
d'

iv Toloi

Xoyoig

avriXeyovreg-

[laXaKov

evdwcrere

H7]6ev.

The

following verses, faulty on this account,

^Vfj,6ovXotaLV airdoaig vjilv ;^p^<7Wjr/ai. icat

yap

skeI

f^oi,

r]vdyKa<^ev

eTrrj

Xe^ovrag y' eg to -dsarpov TTapatrjvaL,

have been corrected, the one by Brunck, the other by Person,' thus,
^vjj,6ov?iOiaLv

irdaaig vpXv
e-nrj
||

||

xPV^i^F'^'- '^^^

y^P

^^^^

i^oi-

ijvdyKa^ev

Xe^ovrag

irpbg to &eaTpov ixapatrivaL.

VI. In the anapaestic tetrameter, the very same hiatus of a long vowel or diphthong sometimes occurs as in the dimeter.^

Thus,

ovt' ev

SdmoLV

Ttg

yap

vcpaiveiv edeXrjan, xpy<y^ov ovTog

ovKOVv dTjnov

TTJg llTO)xscag

Usviav

(j)a[iev

elvat ddeXcprjv.

IV.
1.

Of Dactylic
OldiTTO
\

Verse.

Manometer Hypercatalectic.
6d.^

2.

Dimeter Acatalectic.
77i
I

Tig d'

TVfidiog.

ov 6elG

Tjvopd.

Tavde yv

vacKuv.
|

The
the

first

pure dactylic dimeter consists of two dactyls, as in example given the impure admits a spondee into
;

1. Brunck, ad Aristoph. Ecclcs. p. lix., seq. 3. Tate, Introd. p. 21. 3. This may also be scanned as a choriambic monometer.

Suppl. ad Prcef.

514.

OldiTvoSd

DACTYLIC VERSE.
the
first

87
;

place, and sometimes into the second

;

it is

also

found composed of two spondees

nelOib
I

as,

fidXTidv.
r'
I

{Agam. 104.)
{lb. 122.)

TzofiTTOXK;

dpxov^.

3.

Dimeter Hypercatalectic.
t'

ov

em
I I

/{.e^df-ie

vd.
|

OLKTpov
4.

ydp

TxoTuv
I

C)d'.

Trimeter Acatalectic.
I

dvaat()l

d<; [lev

v
| |

6pl^ reKog
pd)Td.
\

ai

Mow
I

oal tov e

5.
(b

Trimeter Hypercatalectic.

TToXv
I I

aXavre
el (pXayfi

(jit

XolaX -dd
| |

vu)V.

Kolfil^

Co
\

Kpovl

6d^.

This measure, in its pure state, consists of three dactyls and a syllable over. It admits a spondee into the first place, and sometimes into the second, but never before the catalectic syllable.
6.

Tetrameter Acatalectic.

cd

6' spXg
I

ovK eplq
d6fj,ov
j I

dXXd
\

<pov

w
|

(povoq.
|

OWiTTO
aliidrl
I.
I

6d

(bXtos
\ |

KpdvOetq.
|

delvd)

aliidrl

Xvypd).

Alcman composed whole strophes

in this

measure

as,

Mwcr', aye, KoAAto-rra, -^vyarep Acog,

apx' eparojv e7teu)v, em 6' Ifiepov Kal xo-pcevra ridet x^povv[iv(j)

II.

ins they

These tetrameters have no caesura. Among the Latwere used by both tragic and comic writers. Thus
Non.
s. v.

"

Attius, ap.

Expergite

:"

Heu

vigiles proper ate, expergite, Pectora tarda sopore, exsurgite.

88

DACTYLIC VERSE,
4, 1, 1
:

And Terence, Andr.

Hdccine credibile aut mcmorabile.

7.

Tetrameter Hypercatalectic.
|

ov6' vTTO
I

Txapdevl
8.

af tov v

tto fiXecpd

polq.

Pentameter Acatalectic}
|

7Tpu)Td [lev

evdoKifJ.

ov orpdrl

dg dire

(palvonsd'.

It

I. In its pure state, this measure consists of five dactyls. admits, however, a spondee into every place. II. In the Eumenides of ^^schylus (v. 373, seq.) there is

a system of pentameters which closes with a trochaic dimeter catalectic

;

thus,

do^al

t' dvdpGiv

kol juaX'
|

vtt''
\

aldepl
|

clfivdi,
rlixol

TdKO[j,s

val Kdrd
I
I

ydv fuvv
olg fitXdv
olg.

dovalv d
\

finETep
fiolq r'

alg
|

(j)od

ei\ji6alv

opx^o

en

L(j)6dv

||

9.
(ioaKOfie.

Pentameter Hypercatalectic.
\

vol Xdyl

vdv epl

Kvpiovd

(j)ep^dTl

yev-

vav, K. T. A.
10.
TTpog ae

[Agam.

119.)

Hexameter Acatalectic.
(b
|

ysv

elddog

(piXog

6okI
j

fiibrdrog

'EA[

A pure dactylic
out.

hexameter consists of six dactyls through-

An
fifth,

the

impure one admits the spondee into all places but and the spondee alone, excluding the dactyl, into

the sixth place, thus forming the ordinary hexameter of epic verse, or, as it is often called, from its being employed to
celebrate the exploits of heroes, Heroic Verse.
1.

since

it is

Tlie elegiac pentameter will be considered after the hexameter, not properly a pentameter measure, but should be called merely

elegiac verse.

DACTYLIC VERSE.
11.
I.

89
""'

Heroic Verse.

heroic verse

is

composed of

six feet, the last of

which must be
a dactyl.
II.

a spondee, while the fifth is almost always

first

The

four

may be

either dactyls or spondees.

Sometimes a spondee is allowed to enter into the fifth This is done place, and the verse is then called spondaic.

when anything of a grave, solemn, or affecting nature is intended to be expressed, or in order to denote astonishment,
consternation, vastness of size, &c.
III.

sible
sist

This spondee in the fifth place, however, is admisunder the following restrictions :' 1. It must not con2.
It

of one entire word.^

must not end with the end of

3.
It

a word, except that word be a monosyllable.

consist of

must not

two monosyllables.^

IV.
sist of

A spondee in the third place of the verse may contwo monosyllables, but not of one entire word.
first

V.

When

be the

a genitive in of the foot.

olo

is

used, the syllable

ol

must

lengthened.
is

VI. In the close of the verse a short syllable may be In other words, the last syllable of the verse

common, and hence a trochee here becomes a spondee. A word cannot be divided between two lines in Homeric verse, although Simonides and other writers of
VII.

epigrams have sometimes indulged in this license in the Nor does Homeric poetry allow the case of proper names.
elision of a

vowel

at

the end of one line before a vowel at

the beginning of the next. Moreover, punctuation, or a should not be the admitted between the fifth in sense, pause

and sixth
1.

foot.

Sandfvrd, Gr. Pros.

p. 2.58.

2.

Hence,

for

(Irj/xov, ?jio,

&c., which occasionally appear in the

fifth

place,
3.

we
The

should read

(h/fion, r/oa,

&c.

later writers of

the

fifth

place (as

u& u <puva

hexameters admitted two monosyllables into

in Theocritus), but the practice is not

Homeric.

Hii

90

DACTYLIC VERSE.

Of the
I.

Caesuras in Heroic Verse.

The term
:

caesura is used

first, as applied to ceptations as applied to single feet.'

by grammarians in two acwhole verses, and, secondly,

II.

In the former acceptation, caesura means the division

of a verse into two portions or members, affording a little pause or rest for the voice in some convenient part, where
that pause

may

take place without injury to the sense or

harmony
III.

of the line.

In the second acceptation, caesura

means

the divis-

ion or separation which takes place in a foot, when that ' foot is composed of syllables belonging to separate words.
IV.

These two kinds of

caesura will

now

be considered

in order.

1. I.

Caesura of the Verse.

The
is

favourite caesura of the

Homeric hexameter

falls

after the first syllable of the third foot, or the fifth half foot,

and

hence denominated the penthemimeral

KaKb^q atpiti
|1

as,

aXXa
II.

Kparepbv

(5'

tm

nvdov ereXXe.
is that

Another principal caesura in a heroic verse

falls after

which

the

first

seventh half
p,ri

foot,

and

syllable of the fourth foot, or the is hence called the hepthemimeral ; as,
H

ae yepov KOiXrjGLv tyw

napd

vtjvgI /ct%ico.

Both
in the
III.

this

and the previous caesura are sometimes found

verse.
is after

same

Another position of the caesura

;

a trochee in
:

the third foot

as in the opening line of the

Odyssey

avdpa
1.

fioi

sweTre

Moved

\\

noXvTpoTTOV, bg
:

^dXa

iroXXd.

" Casurcz vero verPriscian uses the term in both acceptations " rhylhmum leviurem solent 'perficcre,'''' &c. ; and again, Per pedes in gninque dividitur hie versus casurasy (Prise, de xii. vers. Mn.

sum
c.

et

1. 0;?.

vol.

li.,

p.

276, 277, ed. Krehl.)

DACTYLIC VERSE.

91

But the trochee must either be an entire word, as in the example just given (Movad), or must be formed from the
last
it is

two

syllables of a

word

as in the following line,

:

where

formed of the syllable dovde

avrig 'inecTa nidovde
||

KvXLvdero Xdag dvatdrjg.

beauty of hexameter composition lies as much in the variation of caesuras in the different lines as in the
IV.

The

variation of feet in the

same

line.

V. There are
verse
its
;

many

other caesuras admitted into heroic

but in the variety there is one which, on account of debilitating the strength and harmony of the numbers,
rejected by the best poets.
;

was

This caesura

falls after

trochee in the fourth foot

as,

IlTjXevg &'f]v not enetra

yvvalna

||

yafieaGerat avTog
||

ayxi

fJ-dX', cjg

ore rig re yvvaLKog

Iv^covoco.

VI. In passages of force or dignity the caesura sometimes

falls after

the

first

syllable of the sixth foot

opcopet d'

thus,
||

yalav b^ov Kat novrov

VII.

ovpavodev
its

vv^.

The

bucolic caesura, so called from

prevalence
foot,

in bucolic or pastoral poetry, falls after the

fourth

which, in

this case, is

most commonly a
||

dactyl.

Thus,

cidv ri
'

ro ipiOvpiojia Kat a TTcrvg

alrrdXe rrjva,
d<5v 6e
||

TTorl ralg Trayalot fteXiaderar

||

Kat rv
drroia^.

rvpiadeg- fierd

Udva

ro devrepov

ddXov

This pause is often found in epic verse, and is generally employed by the epic writers in order to strengthen and Thus, in Homer (//. 4, 424), we have amplify what is said.'
TTOVTO)
jJ^ev

rd

-npojra Kopvoaerat,

\\

avrdp eneira
\\

X^P^^

prjyvvjievov jieydXa fSpepei,

v.

diKpl 6e r' dupag,

and in Dionysius Periegetes,

131,
\\

Alyaiov TTOvroio TrXarvv nopov

1.

ev&a re
ed.

KVfxa.

Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr.

p.

214,

Glasg.

92
It

DACTYLIC VERSE.
occurs, also, with the

same

effect in Latin verse

thus,

in Lucretius, 3, 920, and 6, 155,

Insatiahiliter dejlebimus
;

we
||

find

cpAernumque.
,
||

Denique

scRpe gcli
1,

multus fragor

atque ruina.

And

in Virgil, Georg.

356

Continuo ventis surgentibus,

||

aut freta ponti.

Sometimes the epic poets would make the fourth foot a spondee, and the most ancient of them occasionally admitit,

ted even a trochee into that place which, by a pause after becomes a spondee in pronunciation. Thus, we have

the following lines in

1, p.

Homer
:

(//. 11,

36) and Ennius [Ann.

-

22, ed. Hessel.)

rri d'

tm

[lev

TopyC) pXoGvpojmg
1|

\\

karecfyavGiro.

Omnis cura

viris titer esset

induperaior.

Theocritus, on the other hand, in the composition of his

lines,

was

careful to

make

the last two feet being cut

tetrameter.'

off,

the fourth foot a dactyl, so that, there would remain a dactylic

Thus,
I

ddv tI

TO ipWv
ralg ird
eg fisrd

ploiid Koi

d
]

rclrvg
|

TTOTi
I

rvplad
VIII.

yalol jtte Ildvd to

XlaStrai
j \

devTspov

We will now proceed

2.

to the

second kind of caesura.

CcBsura of the Foot.

is

I.

other,

This species of caesura and equally necessary

equally important with the

to the

harmony and beauty

it is

of versification.

verse in

which
to

neglected, and in
society with each

which the
1.

isolated feet

seem

shun

all

Warton, de Poes. Bucol. {Theocril. vol. i., p xxxvi.) Valckenaer was the first to mark the bucolic cassura in Theocritus. The first seven with the tenth and eleventh, contain nine hundred and twentyidylls, seven lines, of which not less than seven hundred and eleven have this
caesura.
Virgil's

Eclogues consist of eight hundred and

thirty lines,

but

of these only two himdred and thirty-two conform to the bucolic model.

HEROIC VERSE.
otlier, is stiff

93
and wholly detes-

and awkward
;

in the extreme,

void of
the old
tify.

all

poetic grace
poets,

as the following examples from

Roman

Ennius and Lucilius, will clearly

late
|
|

Sparsis

hastis
\

Has
II.

res
\

ad

te
\

scriptas

campus splendet et horret. Luci misimus jEli.

|
\

On

caesura of the foot, which, while

the other hand, the frequent recurrence of the it breaks the feet, tends to

flow and harmony of the verse. sage from Theocritus

:

link the words with each other, greatly contributes to the As in the following pas-

"^2

ndv,
GOV

ndv,
|

air'
j

eaat Kar'
|

&pea

fxaKpa,
j

Av
[

Kaicj,

aire Tvy'

dixcptiro

Xelg fiiya

MalvaXov
|

evd' eni
\

vd-

rdv

I.iii
I

rrjvo

Av
|

Xdv, 'EAt Kag 6s XL Kaovi6 ao, to Kai,

| |

tts
|

'Vlov,
\

alv:v re
| |

aafxa

[laiidp

eaaiv d
|

yaoTov.

III.

The The

caesura of

which we are now treating may either

be

or trochaic. syllabic, monosyllabic,

syllabic ccesura is when the first part of the foot, the part before the break, consists of a syllable beThus, in the lines of Thelonging to a preceding word.

IV.

that

is,

ocritus just quoted, Xelg jisya in the second verse is an instance of syllabic caesura, the syllable Xelg forming the first

part of the dactyl, being a syllable belonging to dfKptTroXslg

which precedes.
V. The monosyllabic caesura
is
;

when
as
^Q.

the

foot consists of a monosyllable

first part of the Yldv, in the com-

mencement

of the passage just given from Theocritus, and Ildv aiT\ the foot that succeeds. VI. The trochaic ccBsura is when the first part of the
foot consists of a trochee
;

as, egol

KaT\ and [laKpa Av, in

the line just referred

to.

Two

head of heroic verse

subjects remain to occupy our attention under the the Digamma and the Ictus Metricus,
;

each of which will be considered in order.

94

HEROIC VERSE.
1.

The Digamma.

I.

The whole

lowmg remarkable

subject of the digamma rests on the folfact. A certain number of words be61, s,

ginning with a vowel, especially the pronoun ov,

and
so

also eldcj, totKa, elTrelv, ava^, "IXiog, olvog, olKog, epyov,

laog, eKaoTog,

with their derivatives, have in

Homer

often the hiatus before them, that, leaving these words out of the account, the hiatus, which is now so frequent in Ho-

mer, becomes extremely rare, and in most of the remaining These cases can be easily and naturally accounted for.
trophe very seldom before them

comparison with others, an aposand, moreover, the immediately preceding long vowels and diphthongs are far less frequently rendered short than before other words.'
also, in
;

same words have

lustrious Bentley

n. From an attentive examination of the subject, the ilwas led to conclude, that the words before
deviations from the usual rules of prosody took

which these

place, although beginning with a vowel, must have been pronounced at least, if not written, as if beginning with a

consonant.

He

recollected, that

some ancient grammarians

by the iEoli-

mentioned a

letter as

more

particularly used

ans or most ancient Greeks, and that its existence might be traced in the changes which some Latin words, derived

from the vEolic Greek, had undergone

Ig, vis
;

as, olvog,

vinum ;
which,

OLKog, vicus

7]p, ver.

The
of

letter alluded to,

from

its

form, has the

name

digamma

or double

gamma

(F), is yet to

be seen in some ancient inscriptions and on

supplies the data for resolving the cases of metrical difficulty where the lengthening of a short syllable uniformly takes place before particular words.

coins

and

it

ni. Let us examine some of the instances which are

found at the very opening of the Iliad

dvdpojv
(v. 7).

'A~p'ei6i]g re

'AyaiJ.e[j,vovi r'jvdave t?v/jw (v. 24).

dva^

'AttoA-

Butlmann's Larger Gr. 1. Buttmann, Au^f. Gr. Sprachl. p. 27. Gr. p. 28, Robinson's transl. Mallhy, Greek Grains, p. xi., seq.

HEROIC VERSE.
Xwvc avaKTt
(v.

95
(v.

36).

6 6'

rjle

vvktl eoiKcJg
all

47).

dap-

these cases, according to oipag the practice of the language in the days of Attic purity, the short vowel ought to have been elided before ava^, i]v6ave,
fidXa, sIttk (v. 85).

In

&c.

But

if

we

write Fdva^, Yi]v6avs, &c., or fancy the

,

words pronounced wavaf, W7]vdave, wewoi/cwf wsme, Sic,

the difficulty will in a great degree disappear.'
2.
I.

The Ictus Metricus?

at

There

are,

however, cases of syllables not merely

the end, but in the beginning and middle of words, where the digamma cannot operate, and which must be accounted
for in a different

manner.

Thus,

at the end,

ovre &eoig, etTTSp ng erl vvv 6aivvrai eixppcov. {II. 15, 99.) ol ~ Kv6epvrjTac, ical %ov olifia vrjCJv. {II. 19, 43.)
eyx^^ spetdofxevu)-

en yap %ov
;

tXKea Xvypd.

[lb. 49.)

At the beginning and end

as,
[j.e
. .

(plXe KaaiyvrjTe KOfiLGat te

'

(II. 5,

359.)

In the middle

as,

Kal rd [MEV eTTraxa Tidvra dtsfjioipdro dat^cdv. (Od. 14, 434.)

II. The question naturally arises, upon what principle are such violations of quantity to be explained ? Evidently on the following In scanning any verse, the voice natural:

ly rests longer

upon the place where a long syllable is nethan where it cessary may be dispensed with. In the heroic verse we lay greater stress upon the long syllable of the
dactyl,

and pause more deliberately there than upon either of

the short ones.

the
1.

The same

preference

is

naturally given to
is

first

syllable of the spondee,

which

equally long as

doctrine of the digamma, however, and its introduction into For an able examination of the text of Homer, still requires illustration. the whole subject, consult Thiersch, Gr. Gr. p. 295, Sandford's transl.
2. Maltby, Greek Gradus, page 50 of this volume.
p. xii., seq.

The

Compare remarks on

Arsis,

96

HEROIC VERSE.

in a dactyl, rather than to the second, which corresponds to the short syllables. cannot pretend to know any-

We

thing about the

which the contemporaries of Howay mer pronounced poetry. But, where so much was left to
in
it

recitation,

is

probable that the difference between long

and short

syllables, or those

which occupied respectively

the places of long and short, would be more marked than at a subsequent age, when refinement might moderate the

vehemence

of intonation, and the readier access to writing

superseded the necessity of reciting. Certain, however, it is, that, when Ave perceive short syllables lengthened, and
cannot have recourse to the aid of a digamma,

we

find that

they occupy the long place of the dactyl. We therefore account for the temporary elongation by considering the
place which they occupy in the verse effect of ictus mctricus, or arsis.
III.
;

and

we

call

it

the

Upon

this

those metrical

simple principle, then, the greater part of phenomena which have so much perplexed

the commentators on
isfactory explanation.

Homer

will be found to receive a sat-

Thus,
ej^^errev/cef e(j)CEcg.

avrdp

'inscT'

avToloL fteXog

{II. 1,

51.)

Here
short in

itself,

the syllable Xog in l3eXog is because it occupies the

made
first

long, although or long place of

the dactyl, and therefore receives the ictus or stress of the voice. For the same reason, the initial syllable of dtd be-

comes long
is

in the first of the following verses, although

is its

it

short (which

natural quantity) in the second.

Thus,

did fiev domSog rjXde (paeivrjg 66pLfj,ov ejxog, Kal did -ddjpTjKog iroXvdaiddXov rjprjpeiaro. {II.
So, again, the
first

3,

357, seq.)

syllable of "Ape^* appears both long

;

and short

in

one and the same verse

{II. 5, 31.)

as, ~Apeg, "Apeg,

^poToXoiyi

IV. In both these cases, the long and unusual pronuhcia-

ELEGIAC VERSE.
tion is in arsis, or
;

97

the short and usual one

on the long syllable of the dactyl while is in thesis, or laid on one of the

short syllables of the dactyl.

10. Elegiac Pentameter.

This measure, although commonly called elegiac pentameter, a name which we have here, in obedience to cusI.

tom, allowed

it

to retain, is

more correctly denominated

ele-

giac verse}
II.

lows
dees

The construction of this species of verse is as folThe first two feet may be either dactyls or sponthen comes a long syllable, to which succeed two by another long syllable. Thus,
Scale.
1

dactyls, followed

98
1

ELEGIAC VERSE.

DACTYLIC VERSE.

99

a spondee following a dactyl than a dactyl following a spondee, as decreasing numbers suit the measure better
than increasing ones.
in the following lines
:

The

difference will be perceptible

TcoXXaKt rdv avrdv

TTe^rjrai

||

dlq [isridrjKe Koiiav.

Xnrapov

\\

ofxaaaneva TzXoKafwv.

This species of verse is customarily subjoined to the heroic hexameter, thus forming the most ancient kind
of strophes, having the

XL

name

of sXeyeia.

It

has been once

used in tragedy by Euripides (^Androm. 103, seq.). On account of the equality of its members, the elegiac pentameter cannot well be often repeated alone. Nor has it been so
Thessalonica repeated, except in the Epigr. 4 of Philip of
{Brunck, Anal. vol.
tive effusion, sic vos
ii.,

p.

212), and by Virgil in that spor-

non vohis.^
11. jEolic Verses.

iEolic verses are composed of pure dact}ils, except the first foot, which may be any dissyllabic one whatsoever.
I.

In other words, they are dactylic verses with a base.^ The scholiast on Hephcestion (p. 177, ed. Gaisf.) admits spondees also instead of dactyls.
II.

These verses
;

kinds

are apparently to be divided into two the one used by the Doric poets, whom the Attic

dramatic writers followed, and the other by the iEolic lyric

poets.

Doric poetry excludes a pyrrhic from the base, and, after admitting only an iambus, trochee, or spondee the base, allowing a place to spondees, also, instead of dacIII.
;

The

tyls.

The

iEolians, on the other hand, put a pyrrhic also

;

in the base

the rest of the feet they appear to have kept

pure dactyls.'
1. 2.

Hermann, Elem.

By

Doctr. Metr. p. 227, ed. Giasg. " a base" metricians mean two syllables put before a verse or

metrical clause, and which are to be pronounced somewhat apart. anacrusis, on the other hand, is a prefix of a single syllable.
3.

An

Hermann, Elan. Duclr. Melr.

p. 228, ed.

Glasg.

100

DACTYLIC VERSE.

IV. Hephsestion mentions the following kinds of ^Eolic verses

:

The

trimeter

(which

may

be termed more prop;

erly the dimeter) catalectic on two syllables

&vp(x)
TO,
I

as,

pw
I

TTodeq ETTTopoyvioc,

de
|

odjiOaXa Txevrebosia'
yoi-

mavy
2.

6s den' E^enovaoav.
acatalectic
;

The

tetrameter

(now properly trimeter)

fj,'

as,

epog

(J'
I

avre

6 ?ivaineh)g dovel,

yXvKv
'Ardi,

TTLnpov aiidxdvov

opnsrov
ttottj.

Got 6' Efiedev fiev dm]')(deTO

I

(ppovTia

6riv,

em

6'

'AvSponeSav

3. The pentameter (more properly tetrameter) catalectic on two syllables ; as,

TCJ
I

o', G) (piXe yafi6pe,

I

aaXwq eiKaado)

bpira
4.
tic ;

Kt (3padiv(i) ae fidXiar' eiKaado).

The
as,

pentameter (more properly tetrameter) acatalec-

ijpd
5.

[j,av [xev

eyw

oedev, 'Ardl,

ndXai

TTOKa.

hexameter (more properly pentameter) catalectic on two syllables, which the ancient metricians call eno^ AIoXlkov. Thus,
iciXo
I

The

jiai
I

TLva rbv x^'Ptevra Meioyva icaXeaaat,

el XP^I

ovf-tnoatag en' ovaoiv enol yeyevrjoOat.

seq.)

V. jEschylus {Pers. 866,

kind, and
too, after the

has

many

verses of this

some of them very

Doric manner.'
12.

long, but admitting spondees,

Logamdic Verses.

I.

These verses

They
1.

are generally classed with dactylic. consist of two, three, or four dactyls, followed by any

number of trochees.
common
Hermann's opinion. Bumey and Gaisfovd make them Hcrm. Elem. Dor.tr. Metr. p. 230, cd. Glasg. Burn. Tent. Pers. p. 40. Gaisf. ad Hc^ihccst. p. 275,
This
is

dactylic verses.

DACTYLIC VERSE.
II.

101

the dactylic measure being the lofty language of poetry, while the trochaic approaches more
;

from their appearing and common speech

Logacedic verses {AoyaoLdiKo, fieTpa) are so called to hold a middle station between song

was two dactyls followed by two trochees, which is the same with what is called the minor aicaic, or dactylico-trochaic of the Horatian stanza in Latin poetry.

nearly to that of ordinary discourse. III. The form most commonly used

Thus,
alalv
| |

Kal rig

err'
|

laxarl
ol 6i
|

olicelg
|

Kpalnvocpop

[i'

e
|

ireixipdv

avpal.
is

IV.

To

this

metre

may

also be referred

what

called

choriambic dimeter catalectic.

Tjoalv Tjoalv

Thus,
Chor. dimeter catalectic.
|

dp
I

ndrevodg.
\

dpfm

revodg.

Logaoedic.

V. Burney' gives the following scheme of variations of

logaoedic verses.
-

Called also Adonic. ^ ^ Choriambic dimeter

catalectic.

Logaxdic.

VI. Logacedic metre

is

kinds, through the lyric poets scenic writers.

found interspersed, among other and the chorusses of the

VII. Verses

may

often appear to be logacedic

which

in

reality have other numbers, chiefly antispastic and chori-

ambic, especially in the dramatic poets. These discover themselves both by measures in the antistrophe foreign from
logacedic numbers, and by an association with other numbers, which shows that they are to be reckoned among

these rather than logacedic.

1.

Tenlamcn.

p. Lxvi.

12

102
VIII.

CHORIAMBIC VERSE.

By prefixing a base to logacedic numbers we obtain a Glyconic, Pherecratic, or Phalaecian hendecasyllabic.

Thus,

^w w s^
''
I

^ ^ ^ -^ v^ w v^ -' ''
I
I

LogacBdic.

Glyconic hyper catalectic.

Logacedic. Pherecratic.
Logaoedic.

v.-

.'. .'.
J

_v^v^|_s_|_s^|_^| ^ w w v^ ^
j
I

Phalacian.
Verse.

V.

Of Choriamhic

I. Choriambic monometer hypercatalectic consists of a cbori ambus and a syllable over. It is also called Adonic, and is the same as an impure dactylic dimeter. Thus,

Xdg OTToadv
I

T^(5

/cojuii^

el<;.

(Iph.

A.

156.)

dv.
|

{Sept. Theb. 733.)

II.

Choriambic dimeter

catalectic is

formed of a choriam-

bus and a bacchius, or an iambic syzygy catalectic. This verse is called Aristophanic, as it is frequently found in
Aristophanes, mostly joined with dimeters acatalectic.
fioolv

dp

[xdrevadg.
\

(^Eurip. Orest. 988.)

lidpfidposaa

dv alyXdv.
|

{Soph. Antig. 610.)

{Arist. Vesp. 526.)
is

Kalvov onibg
III.

(pavrjasl.

Choriambic dimeter acatalectic

either pure or im;

pure.

The

first

consists of

two choriambi

as,

fxdvrlq
Ik,

(ppevog,

exAayf Iv Txpocpepdv. {Agam. 202.) a KAalop-evdg. {Sept. Th. 926.)

|

An impure
for a

choriambus.

dimeter admits an antispastus into either place When it occurs in the first, the verse is
"

some metricians Glyconeum Pohjschemutistum." Another form of the impure choriambic dimeter consists of a choriambus and diiambus, or the contrary. Thus,
called by

CHORIAMBIC VERSE.
vifjIfiedovT

103

a
\
j

jilv &e(bv. Iq Trrepvycbv.

yap

fjde

rd^

IV. Choriambic dimeter hypercatalectic is not often found. The two following verses are from Sophocles, in the latter

of which the choriambus of the second place by the diiambus. As,

is

represented

rdv 6

fxeydg

fivOog de^
|

el.
\

{Ajax, 226.)
oal.
j

vvv yap

efiol

p,iXet

%opv

{Ibid. 701.)

V. Choriambic trimeter

catalectic consists of
first foot,

two choriis

ambi and a bacchius.

The

however,

often a

diiambus, as in Eurip. Med. 431.

ov

6'

K fiev

OIK.
I

(bv -ndrplCiv

e-nXsvadc;.

VI. Choriambic trimeter acatalectic consists of three choriamb!.

As,
\

IwpV an' alax

p^v dvdrllX

ovd^ oq

ecp'

rj.

In the following example from Euripides, Iph. Aul. 1036, the long syllable in the first foot is resolved ; and we have
a proceleusmaticus with a long syllable.
rig dp' viilval
j

og did Ad)

tov Al6vog.

VII. Choriambic tetrameter catalectic consists of three

choriambi and a bacchius

el

as,

av pIY av

xtlg erepol

oov nXeov ov
| |

iieXovral.

This measure is called Sappliic by Servius. Besides the a diiambus tragedians, Anacreon always employs it, putting
in the

second place
\

as,

Ik TTordnov

irdvepxoiial

irdvrd
\

({yepov

od Xdinrpd.
by Anac-

VIII. Choriambic tetrameter acatalectic is used

reon, a choriambus and diiambus being put promiscuously, except that in the end there is almost always a diiambus.

Thus,

104
TTplv fiEV e^G)v
I

CHORIAMBIC VERSE.
Kspdeplov,
|

KaXvundr'
ev ojol
|

ea(p
|

TJKUfievd

Kal ^vXivovg nroXXd jxev ev

darpdydXovg
|

ical

iplXov mepl.

dovpl rldelg

av)(evd ttoXX'

d
\

6'

ev rpo^G).

anacrusis
vtt'
j

IX. Choriambic verses are met with beginning with an as in iEschylus, Sept. Theb. 330.' ;

dvdpog

"A;\;at

ov deodev
|
|

Trspdoixevdv

dTl[j,u)g.

lyrics appear to be which by grammarians are accounted ionics a majore ;

Of which kind some metres

of the

^olic

as the following of Sappho [ap. Hephoest. p. 64, ed. Gaisf.) ev

I

iidp(j}orepd

MvdaldlKd
|
\

rdc,
|

dirdXdg

VvplvvC)^.
|

d
I

adporepdg

ovddjj,' eir' d)

pdvvd oedev

rvxolod.

use are those with a base, which ancient metricians erroneously ranked among antiin

X. The choriambics most

But if they were antispastic, they could spastic verses. never begin with a trochee or pyrrhic, and they would have the last syllable of each antispastus doubtful.
XI.

The

shortest of these verses has one choriambus

as in iEschylus, Suppl. 42.

vvv ev
I

TTolovonolg.

Next
ecratic
;

to that is the hypercatalectic,

commonly called Pherovg.

as in iEsch. Sept. Theb. 301.

Toi iiev

yap norl trvpy

Then the

v. 325. Glyconic, in the same,

dovXei

dv
I

'ijjd(pdpd

onodd).
|

The most common

Sophocles, Aj. 628.
ovd' olicTp
I

is

the ditneter hypercatalectic

as in

dg yoov op

vldog

drj

6ovg.

VI.
I.

Of Antispastic

Verse.

An

antispast is
-)

composed of an iambus and trochee

(-

1.

Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Melr.

ed. p. 274,

Glasg.

ANTISPASTIC VERSE.
II.

105

Several antispasti seldom follow one another, because

these numbers have a very disagreeable and uncouth movement ; as if one were to divide the following choriambic
verse, with a base, after the

manner of
|

the

grammarians
\

KdrdvdoKSt Kv
\

Oepfj

d6p6g

'^Adcbvlg. rl

Ke delfiev

III.

To

tispastus

by one

soften this asperity, the poets increased the ansyllable, from which arises a dochmius

-' associated it with other numbers, and made (^ )i use of frequent resolutions. IV. The antispast being composed, as has just been remarked, of an iambus and trochee, any variety of the iam-

bus

is

admitted into the

first

part of the foot,

and any

vari-

ety of the trochee into the second. lowing kinds of antispast :

1

Hence we

get the fol-

lOG
IX. Nor
1161.
is

ANTISPASTIC VERSE.
the dimeter frequent.

jEsch.

Agam. 1151

vofiov dvonov ol ri 6' enlcpddd 6va

I

d
|

rig ^ovdd.
cpdrib /cAayya.

X. The other kinds of

various.

antispastic verse are extremely

few may be here enumerated.

Dimeter Brachycatalectic.

efiol

xpriv ^vfi

(popdv.

{Eurip. Hec. 627.)

Dimeter Hypercatalectic.
endi xpfiv
Trfj
|

jxovdv yevead
fjbevdv
t <f
|

al.
|

{Hec. 628.)
{^Ib.

KOJTTa TxefiTTO

rdXalv
|

dv.
od).
\

455.)

rdXalv' ovkIt

ifitdTEv

{lb. 901.)

Trimeter Acatalectic.

dXX' a

fiolptd

Id rig dv

vdalg detvd.

{lb. 950.)

Trimeter Brachycatalectic.

rdXalvd rdX
|

alval Kopal

^pvycbv.

(lb. 1046.)

Trimeter Catalcctic.

ddvpool

6' oZ
\

d vlv dpd[idvT

e (idK^al.

{Orest. 1502.)

Among the tragic writers chiefly, the antispastus is often associated with other numbers, mostly iambic and troOf these the iambic are not such as have been prechaic. treated of, which proceed by syzygies or dipodias, viously
This kind, because but of another kind allied to antispasts. shorter consist of orders, and, therefore, admit a doubtthey
ful syllable

XL

in syzygies (whence arises a broken are called Ischiorrhogic Iambics,

tus added.
1.

even into those places from which it is excluded and feeble movement),

XII. These verses are found even without any antispas-

Thus, Soph. Electr. 504,

seq.

:'

Hermann, Elem. Doclr. Metr.

p. 147, ed.

Glasg.

Hermann's

ar-

ANTISPASTIC VERSE.
0)

107

HeXo
I

nog d
[

noXvTTOV
)g ifio
I

og Inrr
|

TTpoadev eld
|

Xeg al rdde yd.

|

dvrj

Cretic.

evTE yap

6 ttovt
|
\

ladelg

MvprlXog

eKol
| |

jua0?/, k. t. A.

Dochmiac
I.

Verses.^

dochmius consists of an antispast and a long sylla-' ^ and, therefore, a simple dochmiac is ble, thus, the same as antispastic monometer hypercatalectic.
;

&e(bv
II.

fj

&edv.

of these feet or verses are continually united together in such a manner, and with such various combinations of feet, that almost any two penthemimers put together may claim the name of dochmiac dimeter.
III.

Two

pure dochmiac dimeter

is

not of frequent occur:

rence.

The

following are three instances

\

Pod

xpifJ'TrTeTal

KVKXovvral
SlKd Kal

(poCog
|

-nordral (ipsfiu. (Sept. Th. 84.) 6' dpeldv onXibv. {lb. 114.)
|

-deoL

olv ov ^v^-nlrvel.

(Hec. 1013.)

almost ad infinitum.
chorus,

IV. Impure forms of the dimeter dochmiac are varied Thus, the following occur in the

^sch.

Sept. Th. 79, seq.

|

[iWelTal arpdrog

orpdroTTedov Xlircbv
|

pel TcoXvg oj6e Xeojg

ixpodpoiiog iTTnordg.
(pdvela'

aWepid Kovlg
10)

fie
\

neWel

dfj-dxerov diKdv

&eol Seal r'

vdarog oporvnov opofievov KaKOV

rangeraent, however, of these verses

.

is opposed by Wunder, Conspect. Metr. &c., ad loc. 1 For a more detailed account of dochmiac verse, consult Seidler, dc Ver.iibus Dochmiacis, Lips. 1812, 8vo. Burneii Tenlamen de Metris ah JEschylo in Choricis Cantihus adhihihs, Maltp. xx., seq. {Introd.).

by, Observal.

ad Morell. Gr. P. Ltx.

p. Ixx.

108

IONIC A MAJORE VERSE.

AXevoare- fiod
6'
| j

virep rst^ewv.
;

Tig dpa pvaeral rig dp' enapKeosl ttot' eI iit] vvv, TTenXcov Kal orlcpldv
|

dfi

(pi.

ov

t' 'Apfjg <pev (pev,

Kddnoii enuvvfiov

ev T fidx^lg fidKalp' dvdaod rrpo iroXeibg reXelai re ydg lib reXeiol

\ :
\

V.

dochmiac

is

sometimes connected with a

;

cretic,

either pure or resolved

thus,
{Sept.

enrdTTvXov
|

eSog enlppvov

Th. 151.)

rdaSe
VI,

irvp

yocpvXdKeg

ttoXiv.

{lb. 154.)

and Glyconic verses are commonly ranked under antispastic, but they are more correctly to be
Pherecratic

regarded as choriambic with a base.'

YII.

Of

Ionic a Majore Verse.

I. An Ionic verse a majore admits a trochaic syzygy pro-^ It receives also ^). miscuously with its proper foot { a second paeon ( -> --^) into the first place, and a molosa trimeter whole or catasus ( ) into an even place of

lectic.
II.

Resolutions of the long syllables are allowed in

all

possible varieties.
1.

Manometer Hypercatalectic.
]

TTTOXJGOval p,v
2.

%wv.

{Hec. 1048.)

Dimeter
\

Br achy catalectic.
{(Ed. Col. 673.)
[Phcen. 182.)

xXu)palg vno

PTJaaalg.
7TU)Xolg.

Kal G(b(ppdvd
3.
fi

Dimeter Catalectic.
ev ttoXeI.
\

TidXXddog
I

{Hec. 465.)
{Arist. Eccles. 289.)
at

6 QlGfiodE
1.

rfjg og dv.

These two measures have already been touched upon

will again

page 104.

They

be considered separately

at

page 117.

IONIC A MAJORE VERSE.

Dimeter Acatalectic.
\

109

4.

Ti rol TTore

rag dnXdaTOV

Kolrdg epog
GTTevoel

w
\ |

[xdrald

ddvd
5.

rov reXevrdv

{Med. 152.)

Dimeter Hyper catalectic.

\

vvv

d'

ovTog dv
6.

elral arvye

pw.

{Aj. 1232.)

Trimeter Brachycatalectic.
\

Ikov rd Kpdr

lord ydg
7.

Itx
\

avXd.

{(Ed. Col. 669.)

Trimeter Acatalectic.
|

&vdro)V

f3cd

tw
\
I

TrdfiTcoXv y'

SKTog drag.
-navroyripcog.

{Ant. 614.)
{A7it. 60G.)

Tdv ovd' vTTVog

III.

alpel Tzod' o

noted kind of Ionic verses a majore is the Sotadic (so called from Sotades, a poet of Alexandria, who frequently employed it in his writings), or tetrameter brachycatalectic.

The most

IV.

The

recitation only, not for song.'

tetrameter brachycatalectic was constructed for In its pure state it consists

of three Ionics and a trochee.

Two

trochees are found in

any place, but for the most part in the third. V. The most usual form of the verse is as follows
avTog ydp
VI.
It is

e
\

(bv

iravToye
all

VTig o

ndvrd
\

yevvCbv.
;

seldom that
I

the feet are either Ionics

\

as,

dv xP^^o(pop
or trochees
C)g -nevfig
;

fjg

rovTO rv

XV?

^(^'^^'^ ^"^
I

dpiid,

as,

dlX
\

(bv

sx^lv koI

-nXovolog irXe

dv Gx^lv.
:

VII.

The

following are examples of resolutions

I

Ivd' ol fisv in'

yfig ItcI

dKpalai irvp
opcpdvd
\

alg veKveg e
|

keIvto
\

^e

vfig
1.

relx^d npoXln

ovreg

Aristides QuintUianus, p. 32.

110
'EXXddog
TjBrjv T*

IONIC A MINORE VERSE.

lep
|

epd

kuI [ivxov Trjv Kal KdXov

ffg

ioTiiig

tto,
\

TpQirig
cjTrov.
|

rjAlov

npoa

in

VIII. If the three remaining paeons, or the second paeon any place but the first, or if an iambic syzygy or an epi-

Irite

be found in the same verse with an Ionic

is

foot,

the

verse

then termed Epionic.

VIII.

Of Ionic

a Minor e Verse.

I.

An

Ionic verse a minore admits an iambic syzygy pro-^

It begins somemiscuously with its proper foot [^ ). times with the third psson (--'-- v-), sometimes with a molossus, which is admitted into the odd places. Resolu-

tions of the long syllable are also allowed.

II.

An

epionic verse a minore is constituted

by intermix-

ing with the Ionic foot a trochaic syzyg}% an epitrite, a second or fourth pteon, or the third in any place but the first.
1.

Monometer Hypercatalectic.
|

[j,eXedg [id

rpog.

(^Hec. 185.)

2.

Dimeter Brachycatalectic.
\

em

rdvS' laa
3.

vdelg.

(lb. 1065.)

Dimeter Catalectic.
]

eXdrdg dKp
^eddev yap
III.

OKOfiolg.
\

(Phcen. 1540.)

^ABdiidvTlSog
|

''EXXfjg.
ixolp'.

{Pers. 71.)
{lb. 102.)

Kdrd

Timocreon

is

said to have

composed an

entire

poem

in this measure.

^iKeXbg
TTOTt

KOjxipdg dvrjp

rdv

fxarep' ecpa, k. t. X.

4.

Dimeter Acatalectic.
\

TrdpdKXlvova'

erreKpavtv.

(Agam. 721.)

P^<ONIC VERSE.
Dimeter Hypercatalectic.
|

Ill

5.

fiovdd' alo)v
6.

a did^ova

a.
|

Trimeter Brachycatalectic.

dledlcppeva
7.

MvprlXov

cpovov.

Tetrameter Catalectic.
Id
\

TO yS

ixrjv

^elv

dovadg

Aoyo^

cbaTxep

Xeyeral.

IX.
I.

Of PcBonic

Verse.

A
;

pseon

paeonic verse admits any foot of the same time as a viz., a cretic, a Jbacchius, or a tribrach and pyrrhic

jointly.
II.

The

construction of the verse

is

most perfect when

each metre ends with a word.

1.

Dimeter Brachycatalectic.
|

onoydndg

Kvpel.

(Phcen. 137.)

2. Dimeter Catalectic.

XdXKodsTd
3.

t' tfi^oXd.

{lb. 113.)

Dimeter Acatalectic.
I

dlolxofJied' ,

olxof-iedd.
\

{Orest. 179.)
{lb. 311.)

6po[id6eg
4.

0)

Trrep6(()opol.

Trimeter Brachycatalectic.
\

KardaooTpv

%6f
5.

djxfidal

yopyog.

{Phccn. 146.)

Trimeter Catalectic.
Ci
I

(SdXolfiL

xpov

^vyddd

[leXeov.

{lb. 169.)

X.
I.

Of

Cretic Verse.

Cretic numbers belong, in strictness, to the trochaic, and are nothing else but a catalectic trochaic dipodia, which
consists of arsis, thesis,

and

arsis again.

112
II.

CRETIC VERSE.
Since this order
is

periodic,

it is

plain that the thesis

cannot be doubtful, but consists always and necessarily of one short syllable only but that each arsis may be resolved,
;

"whence

it

comes

to

pass that both the

first

and the fourth

peson, and, moreover, even

for the cretic.

five short syllables,

may be

put

Thus,

III.

It

feet are conjoined in

must also be remarked, that, when several cretic one verse, no one coheres with an;

other in a periodic order

foot, as

and the

last syllable of the last

every

final syllable, is doubtful,

and cannot be

re-

solved except in systems in which, since the numbers are continued in one unbroken tenour, the last foot of the verses,
unless
it is,

at the

tem,

is

subject to the

same time, the last foot of the whole syssame law as each intermediate foot.

IV. The dimeters are very much used by both tragic and comic poets, and are commonly conjoined in systems, so
that the last syllable of the verses is neither doubtful nor admits a hiatus, and may be resolved. In these systems a

monometer,
seq.
:

too, is

assumed.

Thus, in jEsch. Suppl. 425,

(ppovrloov Kal yevov

evaibfi^
I

irdvdtKoJ^

TTpo^tvog\

rdv (pvydSd nrj TrpoScjg rdv EKddev SKdoXalg

|

diioOsoig

op[j,evdv.

V.

The

tetrameter, too, is frequent, having the caesura at

the end of the second foot.

p.

Thus,

in

Simmias,

ap. HephcBst.

74:
[idrep

w
I
I

TTOTvld

^(bpl, Kv

KXvdl vvfi (f)dv dtpdv, (bv jMvxoiv. 7/pav' dXl iidKTVTrQiv

\\
|

II

VI. Alcman used the catalectic hexameter,

following verse has the

whence the

name

of Alcmanian.

ANACREONTIC VERSE.
'A(f)podt
I

113
|

Ta
1

fxev

ovk

earl, [idpy

og d' EpaJ?,

old iralg,

naladel,

dKp'

77'

dvd
I

7]

Kd6al

vojv,

[ifj

fiot -dlyfiq

rw
\

Kviialp

XI.
I.

Of Anacreontic
is
;

Verse.

This species of verse

it

generally ranked under the

Ionic a minore class

belongs, however,

more properly

to the Ionic a majore kind.

pass at the present day under the of Anacreon are not genuine, but are the productions of persons who lived at a much later period, and some of
II.

The poems which

name

whom
and
III.

appear

to

difficulty to

have been quite ignorant. Hence the doubt which they have given rise.

As

a great part of these

poems

consist of pure iambi,

we ought to rank such, no doubt, with iambic rather than Ionic numbers. As, for example, the following
:

dtXa
I

Xeyelv

"ArpeZd

ag.

IV. But of those which are really Ionic there appear to be two kinds one with a monosyllabic, the other with a
;

dissyllabic anacrusis.

V.
of

The kind which has a monosyllabic anacrusis admits two forms only, of which the proper one is this
:

and the other, which changes the dactyl of the Ionic into an amphibrach, is as follows
:

foot

VI.

The

first

Pherecratic,

is

of these forms, which is very like the found constantly employed in one ode mere;

thirtieth ly, the

as,

at
1

Movaal rov "E

1

poSrd
oJal,
oJicdv, k. t.
?i.

6fj

TU)
I

odadi oTE^dv KdXXel ndped

114
In Other odes
it is

ANACREONTIC VERSE.
found intermingled with the second form,
in the twenty-third,

which
VII.

is

much more usual. The second form is employed

6
I

twenty-sixth, and twenty-seventh odes.

Thus,

nXovTog elys
I

XP^^^''^
-dyfirolg.

TO
or'
I

^rjv TTdpfije

(23, 1, seq.)

ev
I

elg fie Bdicxog eXdFj.' dovalv at [le pljxval. (26,

| |

1, seq.)

VIII.

We
:

which has a
follows

to that species of Anacreontics anacrusis. It has two forms, as dissyllabic

now come

The first of these is much less used than the second, and we will therefore treat of the latter first in order.
IX. This
21st,,

latter

form

is

28th, 44th, and 45th odes.

fiSao

employed in the 3d, Thus,

\

4th, 7th,

crpecps

vvKTLolg 7x60' CJpalg ral or' dpKTog jjdij.

I
]

(3, 1, ^e^".)

em em
dye

elvalg fivpalvaZg rep XG)Tlvalg re rrolalg.

\ \
I

(4, 1, seq.)

^C)ypd(f>C)V
I

dp

lore
\

ypd(f)e

^(I)ypd(j)U)v

dp

lore.
|

(28, 1, seq.)

X. When, in this species of Anacreontics, the anacrusis consists of one syllable, that syllable must necessarily be
long, as arising from the contraction of

two short ones.

Thus,

In-

stances of this, however, are not frequent.

Kw
I

fiov fiSTelGi
yrj

x^^P(^'^-

(6, 16.)

TTij

peovad

ireWovg.

(22, 6.)

1.

We

The common

have given Barnes's emendation, based on that of Scaliger. reading is orav 6 Bukxoc eaeWri.

ANACREONTIC VERSE.

115
is

XL
Thus,

Sometimes the

first

long syllable

found resolved.

Gv 6s
I

(fiXio^ el

ye

wpywv.
vXdi.

(43, 8.)
{lb. 7.)

X<ii

TTOcra (pepovalv

and occasionally also the second

lJ,Edv
I

as,
(6, 3.)

u)[iev

d6pd ye

Awvrsf.
evel.
|

ide
I

ndg yepdvog 56

(37, 6.)

XII.

Of the middle iambi

the

first

anacrusis, but oftener in the tragedians

has sometimes a long and comedians.

Thus,

dno
j

plTTTOVTal fiep

Ifivdi.

(39, 5.)
jEZ.

The second more

unfrequently

as in Sophocles,

1058,

and Euripides, Cycl. 497.

(ppovl
I

fjwTdrovg oi
\

Hvovg.

em

6s[ivialg re

^dvdov.

XIII. The species of Ionics which we have just been con is found interminsidering under the preceding paragraph in to referred paragraph IX., in the following gled with that

odes of Anacreon

the 5th, 6th, 22d, 29th, 36th, 37th, 39th,

41st, 42d, 51st, 52d, 53d, 54th, 56th, 57th,

13, 17,

and

in fragments

and 21.

come now to the first of the two species menXIV. tioned in paragraph VIII., namely, that consisting of a disand two syllables syllabic anacrusis, with an Ionic a majore
over
;

We

as,

--I
XV. These
writers, with a

-I-The
final doubtful sylla-

by the tragic monometer occasionally appended, and end-

are often formed into systems

ing with a verse of iambic form. ble is excluded, as in anapaestics.

Thus we have
v.

the fol-

lowing in the Supplices of iEschylus,

1.

1025, seq.:^
{Tent.

Burney erroneously makes these

p. 72.)

lines

Ionic a min&re.

Suppl.w. 1013,

116
Its
I

ANACREONTIC VERSE.
juav
I

aarvd
|

vdKTog
\

dg deovg ydvd ivreg fidKdp ol ^fivft' TToXC ovxovg re Kai

\
|

"Epd
TTepZ
iiTTO
I I

olvov
I I

valovral
de^dads
I

ndX
|

aiov
dSot
\ |

6'

on

fieXog-

alvog 6s ttoA

Iv riiv]u^(5'

ds lie
I

Xdaydv s^s
|

tw,

erl
I

NeiAov
Trpo
I

x^^*^

'^^^'^
I

/^^^ ^i"^

otS".

XV. Another kind

tragic writers

is that in
-^
(~-

of Anacreontic verse employed by the which anaclasis, or the conjunction

of a third paeon
prevails.

-) and second

epitrite

(-

Thus,

XII.
I.

Of Galliambic
is
;

Verse.

Galliambic verse
the last
is

composed of two Anacreontics, of

in this

which

catalectic

form

caesura always falls at the end of the first AnThe following is observed with great care. and acreontic, are two lines of this measure, given by Hephagstion
II.

The

TaXA
dig
III.
1

al fifirpog op
\

eh'jg
\\

||

(piXo

OvpaoL Spofid
j

6sg.

EVTsd irdrd

yelral

Koi
\

xdXiisd npord

Xd.

The
(8,

Laertius

following Galliambics are given by Diogenes H. Stephens scanned them erronead.

fin.).
;

ously as hexameters

and Salmasius, in his eagerness to

emend them, only corrupted them the more. Porson reWe have marked in stored them to their true numbers.
each the place of the caesural pause, that the melody be more perceptible.

may

GLYCONIC VERSE.
sv MeficpEL Aoyof eorl
TE,v6o^6v TTore jwlpav
||

117

irpof^adelv Tfjv iSirjv

napd rov KaXXiicepcj (3ot yap nodev Xdyog ravpov, Kovdev sXe^ev XdXov "Amdt orofia, e6(>JKe jttof;;^;^ ovK (f)voig
\\

11

1|

eXixp^rjaaro OToXrjV, Trapd 6' avrbv XexpiOi; ordg dtddoiiuv Tovro iSiorrjV aTrodvorj TTpo(l)av(og
||

\\

oaov

ovTTdi- 6tb

Kal ol

\\

Taxe('>g
\\

^Xde

jJ-opog,

dsKaKig TTEvr'

f-irl

rpiaoalg

eaidovri -nXeiddag.
Verse.

XIII.
I.

Of Glyconic
same
is

The

first,

and, at the

gant form of Glyconics order, consisting of a dactyl and trochee, and terminating

time, most simple and elea base followed by a logacedic

with an

arsis.

Thus,

II.

This kind of verses form systems,

for the

most

part,

which are customarily concluded by

called Pherecratic.

the catalectic verse

Thus,
\

a6' k
j

yw
I

x^P^*^ alfxdT

fj

pdg

(3p6
I

x^^^^ KSKXeliiev

a
|

TTEfiTro

fial

Kara yal

dg.

{Androm. 502,

seq.)

was subsequently changed into a choriambus and iambus, by which the last syllable but one was made doubtful as,
III.

The

logacedic order

''I

I"HippoL 741, the following:

|

Thus we have

in Euripides,
7]
I

rdg

XEKTpo(j)deLg

avydg,

IV. The logacedic order having been divided into a choriambus and iambus, it was thought fit to vary the numbers

by

the choriambus,

before transposition, so that the iambus, being placed was changed into a spondee or trochee, beto follow

cause an arsis ought

the base.

Thus,

'
I

- I

---|

Kal Txevr

ijiidvd'

ov^Wldg.

118

GLYCONIC VERSE.

V. And again, another transposition also was made,

though not of frequent occurrence, the choriarabus taking the first place, and the base and trochee being changed into

an iambic syzygy.

As,

VI.

The

Pherecratic verse, in

which

the choriambus

is

not followed by an iambus that only two forms

:

may

be transposed, admits

part, only in

the last is uncommon, and used, for the most some compound verses. VII. The primitive species of Glyconics, which ends in

Of which

later tragedy,

an iambus, receives among dramatic poets, at least in the even a spondee in the end, so that in antistrophics a spondee may answer to an iambus. Sophocles, Philoct. 1128, 1151, we have

Thus, in

ro^ov

(f)LXoV, 0) (pilXibV.

rdv npoadev jSeAewv aXKdv.

VIII. A pyrrhic is excluded from the base among the The rest of dramatic poets and in the graver lyric poetry. the dissyllabic feet are used promiscuously by the dramatic
writers, so that

brach

is

any one may answer to any one. The trimost used by the later tragedy, as in Euripides,

Ph(n. 210.

Tvplov

olSnd XTnovg^

eddv.
|

The tragedians of the same age sometimes allowed themselves an anapaest also ; as in Sophocles, Philoct. 1098
:

Ti 7t6t av
I

fxol

TO Kdr'
:

fj
'

fidp.

or a dactyj

as in Iph. Taur. 1144

TTdpdevog

evSoKincbv

ydnQ>v.

GLYCONIC VERSE.
IX.

119

The choriambus
later

is

cially in the

tragedy.
:

not imfrequently resolved, espeThus, the first syllable in

Soph. (Ed. Col. 186, 205

rerpofpev
rig
(x)v
I [

dcblXov dTvo

arvyelv.
rlv' dv.
|

TToXvTzovog dyfj
;

And

in a Pherecratic

as,

Eurip. Hel. 1502, 1519

i
\ |

tiuTTer
I

o^ievog Idux

podld

TToXid 'ddXdaa
I

dg.
;

So

also in the last syllable

/3dT
I

as,

Hel. 1505
|

Here. Fur. 781

IlXeidddg vno
u)
I

{.leadg.

lofifjv'

ori(f)dv6(pdp

Idv.
|

X. In

this other

form of Glyconics,
''
I

33-1----

the order
tion

which follows the base may have both a resoluof the arsis and the last syllable doubtful. Whence, in-

tribrach,

stead of a trochee, sometimes a spondee is put, sometimes a and these very often sometimes, but more sel;

dom, an anapzest

also, as in Orest.

812, and Iph. Aul. 1041

\

oiKTpo

rdrd &olv
|

Uis
I

plSeg ev

dfrnrd Koi. datTC deojv.

are resolved

XT. Sometimes both the long syllables of the choriambus as in Eurip. Bacch. 410, 427 ;
:

eKela'
[

dye
d'
I

[le,

BpojxiS Bponls.
\

GO(l)dv

dne^s

rrpdrndd (ppsvd re.

bling

XII. As dochmiac verses have other numbers, resemthem or parts of them, both intermingled and coupled

with them, so with Glyconics, also, a vast multitude of verses are found joined which are either like them or consist of

or added.

Glyconics themselves, with some part taken away These verses have usually this in common, that
foot.

they contain a choriambus joined with a different

120
XIII.

GLYCONIC VERSE.

The

forms which are about the most in use are

these

First, the shortest,

_
Thus, 968:

s^ v^

and

'.

.'.
j

-'-'

in Soph.

CEd. Col. 128, 160, and Eurip. Suppl 960,

dg

TpjUOjtiev

Xeyelv.

peviidrl avv

Tp^^eL

dvaal
\

Qtv 6' o (iloq.

I

ovt' ev

Tolg

(j)di[Mevolg.

in Soph. CEd.

XIV. Next, with an anacrusis put instead of a base, T. 467

:

as

(J
I

pa vlv dtXX
TTibv
I

ddu)V
I I

LIT

odevapu)

rlpov
|

(f)v

yd

TTodd vG)

fidv.

XV. There
these the
first

are other forms longer than a Glyconic. Of is that of the hypercatalectic Glyconic.

Thus,
.'.

.'.
I

-ww_
[

^r3

and

.'..'.
I

-3
I

s^ .-

The following examples are from Soph. CEd. Col. 133, 165, and Eurip. Hel. 1317
:

livT
I

eg rdds
cj
I

vvv
[

rtv
\

fjnelv.

KXveig
opet
I

TToXviioxd'

dXdrd.
kcjAw.
|

TTOT

6p6ndSl

XVI. Another kind

following
:

often joined with Glyconics is the

EKTomog
j

^wi*

>'
I

S.--

N/

s_^

ovdelg o Trdvrcjv.
is this
:

(CEd. Col. 119.)

XVII. Another kind

GLYCONIC VERSE.
KaX^ioT
j

121
(Electr. 736.
(76. 741.)

a>v
\

on6p

dv Alodev
| |
I

arepeloal.
|

KTeiveig

KXeZvoJv

avyyeverelp'

dSiXcpoJv.

XVIII.
is

The

longest of the verses allied to the Glyconic

the Phalaecian hendecasyllabic.

Thus,

at T
I

valsTs

KdXX

IttojXov idp

dv.
|

The more

usual, but less correct

:

way of

scanning

this

meas-

ure, is as follows

al re
|

valers
j

KdXXl
|

ttcjAov
|

eSpdv.
in the begin-

ning.

XIX. Glyconics are sometimes augmented Hence we have the following forms
:

3_3|_^^_|3_and--3|-3|_^^_
Te-yyel 6' vtt
|

ocppval
oiiTE
I

ndy

KXavrolg.

(Antig. 831.)

syKXfipov

vvjxcpldlog.

{lb. 814.)

XX. Another

kind has a trochee inserted between the

base and the other parts of the Glyconic.

Thus,

e[j,7Tal^

ovad
I j

XelfidKog
alibv
| [

ij

dovalc;.

{Bacch. 865.)
{Cycl. 41.)

TTddTJ

jtiot

yew

fiev ndrepojv.

XXI. Another kind

a molossus or cretic.

consists of a Pherecratic verse, with

Thus,

TTEvdog

yap

fieydX<l)g
\

rod'
|
|

raKOv
I

dvpofxevd

aov

opudral. (Med. 183.) svverdv. {lb. 159.)

|

XXII. Sometimes a bacchius Thus,

is

put before a Glyconic.

122

PRIAPEIAN VERSE.

epcJrCov,

epcjr
Iv'
|

tbv 6'
|

dnenav
\ \

oev
I

-jwot.

yevolndv,

v
\

Xdev eneOT
often found
;

novr
|

-ov.

XXIII.

verse

is

among Glyconics comas in Eurip. Hel. 1356

:

posed of a

cretic

and choriambus
|

fidrpog opy

dg evenei.
ai XdplTig.
Verse.

Pdre

oe[j,v

XIV. Of Priapeian
I.

Priapeian verse consists of a Glyconic and Pherecratic joined in one. Thus,

The

II.

Of these forms

it

is

probable that one Avas for the

;

most part used

reon
:

to the exclusion of the rest

as

by AnacKAdg dv
\ \

TjpiOT

7]ad
6'

plv Irp
I

lov
|

||

Xenrov
\

fxlKpov

and
\

olvov
I

I^Ithov

Kddov
\

\\

vvv
||

6'

d6p
\

)g

Spoeaa

xpdXXo)
III.

-nrjKTldd tt)

(ptXfj

KOfid^

g)v irdid

dtp

7J.

The caesura is everywhere

to

carefully observed.
;

This
hi-

metre appears
ritus

have been asynartete

and hence the

atus in the following line given

:

by the scholiast on Theoc'

dv

(pepo

\ilv

ndpd

Trjg

deov
\

\\

dv EKd
\

Xeaadro

rrjv

a.
\

XV. Of Eupolidean
I.

Verse.

The Eupolidean

verse,

which

is

peculiar to the comic

verse having a choriambus at poets, consists of a Glyconic the end, and another like member, in which is a cretic instead of a choriambus.
II.

In the base are found a trochee, iambus, spondee, and

tribrach.

sometimes a

Thus,

CRATINEAN VERSE, ETC.

123

i9e
I

d)jLte

epvdpov

e^ dap

vol Kdrepoj npog v fidg e XevOepcbg. ov Txdxv rolg Traldl olg Iv ^v ysAwf,
||
\

11

XVI. Of Cratinean
I.

Verse.

The

Cratinean verse

differs
it

first

portion only, in

which

from the Eupolidean in the has a choriambus and an iam-

bic dipodia.

Thus,
d ttuvt
\ \

"ndvrd (pdprjr
II.

roXfj,

TjTa

rcode
|

rw x^P^-

The

caesura, as in the line here given, is often neg-

lected.

XVII.
I.

Of Polyschematistic

Verse.

This name

is

applied to verses v^rhose

composition

is

so irregular and variable that they cannot be classed with In other words, polypropriety under any particular head. schematistic verses are those
regular
feet.

which

consist of entirely

ir-

Thus,
\

OldXtrodd
\

(iporojv ov6e

vd fxaKapl^

to.
\

{(Ed. T. 1195.)

XVIII.

Of Prosodiac

Verse.

This appellation is given to a verse in which choriambics are mixed with Ionics or paeons. Thus,
1.

Dimeter Acatalectic.
i
11

vfjfidrd &'
2.

Ito

iTs.6(b.

{Orest. 1431.)

Dimeter Hypercatalectic.
|

fioXTTdv

6' d-no
I

Kal xppoTTol
\

(bv.
|

[Hec. 905.)
(^Orest. 833.)

fidoTOV vTTtp

rtXXovr eold
3.

G)v.

Trimeter Catalectic.
\

Xalveolg

~Aii(plov6g

opydvolg.

{Phcen. 114.)

124
4.

ASYNARTETB VERSES.
Trimeter Hypercatalectic.
61'
\

fjieydXd 6i

rig Svvdixlg

dXdarop

(bv.
\

{Orest. 1562.)

XIX. Of Asynartete

Verses.

I. This name is given to those verses which consist of two different measures united into one line.

is not a close one " not e., jointed together"), and, in fact, (^aavvdpTrjTog, the last syllable of the first member of the line may be either long or short, just as if it were the final syllable of a
II.

The name

denotes that the union

i.

separate line.

On

this

same

principle, too, a hiatus is al-

lowed between the two measures.

delvd
I

Thus,

delvd
I

\\

nenov
|

ddfisv.
\

Troch. syz.+Iamb. syz.'

Dact. dim.+Anap.
dv.
|

alXivov

alXXvov

dpxdv
Treaol^'

&dvdTov.
evv

mon.
emdeiiv lov u)g lamb. penth.
|

\\

eg

Anap. mon.-[-

III.

The metre

of Archilochus
:

is this,

in

which he

uni-

formly observed the caesura

"Epdaiiov

id?]

Xdp

IXds
j

||

XPW^

"^^^
I

7^

^olov.
I

imitated by Horace {Od.

IV. Another measure employed by the same poet, and 1, 4), is as follows :

OVK

td' 6
I

jwwf

^dXX
I

elg

and
\

Xov XP^^'

II

K,5,p(pe

ral
\

ydp

rjdTJ.

V. Another asynartete verse of Archilochus, which Horace has imitated in epode 11,
is

as follows

dXXd
1.

i^'

5
I

Xvai[j,e

Xfjg

||

w' ralp

ddfiv
is

d ral
\

TTodog.

A verse of this

kind, in
is

syzygy, or vice versa,

which a trochaic termed periodicus.

followed by an iambic

'W\^%'^W'VW\^^^^%^AA'\A'V\'WV\WW\A/V\Kn^%/VW\VW\'VW^^VW%^^/%<^\^/%'V%A/

PART

III,

CHORAL SONGS.
(WW^WV^ ^/WW%/VWW%^^VWWW^V^'\^^'VW%V\^A^W\WVX%<%i%'V^'^'V%^i'VWW

L2

CHORAL SCANNING'
OF THE

PROMETHEUS VINCTUS.
Vss. 114-119.

Antispastic System.

ITA,
I
.

ff

a, Ea, ea.
I

2. Ttg dx<o
3.

Tig oSfid
rj
|

TTpoaenTd
rj
|

fi'

dcpsyyrjg,
;

'deoaovrog

fipoTslog

KeKpdfievfj

4. iKero Tspiiovl
5.

TTOVoJv inG)V

rrdyov, rl dij &eX(i)V -deajpog, fj

|

6v

em

6.

opdre

Siofj,

ojttjv fie

Sva
|

TTorfiov d^eov.

1.

Extra metrum.^
Bacchic tetrameter.
Antispastic dimeter.

2.

3. Antispastic trimeter. 4.
5.

Antispastic trimeter.

6. Antispastic trimeter.

Vss. 120-127.

AnapvEstic Measure.
1.

rov Alog

2.
3.

6r dnexO
T^v Alug
I

^x^pov, rov nda I Oeolg dag eXdovd' onoaoZ

||
|

II

\\

||

avXfjv

\\

eloolxv

evalv
\

\\

have included under this general head not only anapaestics, 1. but parts of the play, also, not uttered by the chorus, but where the measure employed is of a choral nature as in the piece first given. 2. Exclamations, not included in any measure.
;

We

128
4.
5. 6. 7.

CHORAL SCANNING
did TTJv
(j)ev

Xlav
I

\\

(jylXorfj
||

(pEv

rl ttot' av
I

Kivddlo[i.
6'
[ \

rd PporQv a kXvQ)
\\
|

||

TTeXdg ol

(bvibv
| |

||

aldrip
\\

eXdcppalg
pl^el
|

||

nrepvycov
j

pmalg

vnoav

||

8. Trav /xot

(f)66epdv

\\

to npooepTT

6v.

(Parcemiac

Vss. 128-138 (Leipsic ed. 128-135).

Strophe
1.

/3'.

MfjSev

(pod?']

6fjgtj*

(plXld

2.
3.

yap

T/cJe

rd^

TTrepvycJv

4.
5.

doalg d^lXX atf 7Tpoas6d rovds Trdyov, ndrpuydg ovaa cppevag' lioylg ndpelTT
| |
|

6. 7. 8. 9.

KpalTTvd(f)op

ol 6s
\
|

fi'

e
\

TTsiiijjdv

avpar

KTVTTOv ydp d
dixi^ev

;\;w ;:t;aAi;6of

dvrp
|

(bv fiv^ov,

Sk 6'

e-nXfj^s jiov

10.

rav

dsjjiepoJTr
ftTTfi
I

iv
|

attJcJ" crvo;^;

11. i9^v d'

dtAof

w
|

Trrlp

cjroi.
j

1.

2.
3.

Glyconic polyschematistic. The same measure.

The same measure.

Choriambic dimeter catalectic.
Glyconic polyschematistic.
Logaoedic.

4.
5.
6.

7.

8.

Glyconic polyschematistic. The same measure.

9. Antispastic

monometer.

10.

Choriambic dimeter acatalectic.

11. Logaoedic.

OF THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS.

129

Vss. 139-146 (Leipsic ed. 136-143).

Anap^stic Measure.
1.

At al
I

al at
\

||

2. TTJg -noXv 3. 4.

rlnvov
I

Tov

mpl
w

-ndodv &'
I

Trjdvog iKjovd elXlaa ofievov

\

||

\\

11

%0ov' dKolfi
|

7/TCJ

II

pevyLdrl
\\

iralSeg
\

\\

5. TTdrpog
6.
olo)
I

KtdvovII

depxOfjr'
\

eoldead'
||

11

dsan(o
\

Trpoorropn
\\

drog

7. rrjods (pap

8. (ppovpdv

dyyog aKdneXolg ev dKpolg Xov ox'tJo w. (Faroe miac.) d^rj

\\
\

\\

Vss. 147-157 (Leipsic ed. 144-151).

Antistrophe

j3',

corresponding line for line with Strophe ^'

1.

AevocFO)

IIpo/u.?]

6ev cj)o6spd 6'

2. efiolaiv

oca
\

olg opXx^ri
\

3. Txpoafi^e -nXfip 4.
6. 6. 7.

fig

SdKpvoJv

oov dtiido ela

rala6' ddd
\

idovor}
\

nerpalg irpoaav
viol

iidvrode.
j

alvofievov rolal
| j

Xvfialg

yap

ol

dKovofiol
j

8. Kpdrova' "OXvfin
9. 6e dfj voiiolg
\

ov veoxfJ-olg

10. T^evg dderu)g

11. jrplv de tteX
|

Kpdrvvel rd

upcd

vvv a
\

lorol.

Vss. 158-164 (Leipsic ed. 152-158).

Anap^stic Measure.
1.

Ei ydp

fi'

vTTO yfiv,

1|

vtpdev r'
elg

aldov
|

||

2. tot) rt/cpo
3.

6eyp.ovog
7~iKtv,
\\

\\

dnSp
|

dvrov
j

|j

Tdprdpov
|

dsaj^iolg
H w?- jur/
|

dXvTolg
re
i9eof,

\\

4. dypt(bg

TreAaadf,

1|

130
6. iirJTE Tig
I

CHORAL SCANNING
dX?idg
I

||

roZod' ens
|

yrjdel-

||

6.

vvv

6'

aid
\

iplov

||

kIvvjii'

6 rdXag
a.
|

||

7. exOpolg

emxdpr

||

a irenovd

(Paroemiac.)

Vss. 165-173 (Leipsic ed. 159-166).

Strophe y\
1.

Tig

(ijd

rXfjo
|

iKdpdlog

2. i9ewv ord)
3. Ti^-

Ta(5'
(

emxdpfj

ov

^{ivacr;^

dXd KdKolg
;

4. reolai,

di^d
[

ye Atof
||

6 d'

7ri
|

Korcog del

5. &s[j,ev6g

dyvd^nr
| |

di'

vo
|

oi',

6. 7.

Sdnvdrai

yevvdv

ovpdvi dv ovde A?/^|

I

8. i Trpiv

9.

dv ^ Kopecr Tdv 6vod Adjrov gA

I

?]

/cedp,
7 If
|

^ TrdAd
dp^dv.

jua

rm

1.

Antispastic dimeter.

2.

3.

The same The same

measure. measure.

4. Antispastic trimeter.
5.

Trochaic dimeter

catalectic.

6.
7.

Dactylic dimeter hypercatalectic.

Trochaic monometer hypercatalectic.

Logacedic.

8. Dactylic pentameter.
9.

Vss. 174-184 (Leipsic ed. 167-177).

ANAPiESTic Measure.
1.

"H

[xfjv
I

er' [iov,

||

Kaltrep
\

Kpdrepalg
||

\\

2.
3.

iv yvl

oTTedalg
I

\\

aiKi^

ofievov

XP^^dv
\

l^el

II

ndfcdpcJv
\\

4. del^ai

to vedv
J

(3ovXev[i'
11

npvrdvig vcp' otov

||
|

||

5. OKJJTTTpov

Ttjwdf

t' dTToai^A
I

dTal

||

OF THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS.

6.

131
|I

Kal

fi'

ov
I
I

Tt fxeXl
|1

II

yXCJacrolg
\

ireldovq
||

7. eTzdol

dalalv

-deX^el
||

orepedg t'
\

8. ovnor'
9.

an
\ I

elXdg
||

Tcrfi^d<;

rod' eyo)

||

Kdrdiifiv
I

vGU)

irplv
II

dv e^
|

10. Seoficbv

x^^o,<^V
I

T^olvdg
\

dyplcbv re rlvtlv
|

\\

||

11. T^ffd' ai/c

ia^

||

edeXfjO

rj.

(Paroeraiac.)

Vss. 185-193 (Leipsic ed. 178-185).

Antistrophe
corresponding line for line
1.

y',

with Strophe

y'.

2t;

/j,ev

&pdavg
|

re Kal mnpalg

2.
3.

dvalalv ovd

ev emxdXdg,
[

ayav

d'

eXevG
\

epdaTOjielg' fjpldlae did

|

4. fjuaf de (ppevdg
5.
6.

ropog

(f)66og'

6e6td d' aju^i

TTd

aai^" Ti;;^;ai^,

nore
[

rcJvde ttov
|

wv
ydp
|

7. ;;^p^ 8.
9.

ae
|

repfid
|

tceX\

aavr'

g(7id
|

eiv aKix
l
\

'rJTa

fiOed,

/cai
|

/ceap

dndpd

fxvOov 1%

upov

oii Tra^^".

Vss. 194-200 (Leipsic ed. 186-193).

Anap^stic Measure.
1.

Oid', OTi

rpdxvg
ov sx^ov
\\

II

Kat Trap' S
||

avru)
\

\\

2.
3.

TO dlKal
I I

Zsvg- aAA'

e/xTraf

[|

[idXdKO 4. earat
|

yvcbficbv

rrdS',
|

ordv

\\

ravr^
||

palod^|

I|

5.

T^v

d'

arep
I

dp-vov
Ijttot
||

oropeodg
(plXoT
|

opyfjv,
Ij

||

6. efc 7.

ap^

/iov
|

/cat
|I

^ra
el.
\

OTTevdibv

(nreudovT

ttoO' f]^

(Parcemiac.)

132

CHORAL SCANNING

Vss. 285-305 (Leipsic ed. 277-297).

Anapaestic Measure.
1.

OvK a
I

Kovaalg
I

||

eneOo)
|

v^dg

\\

Tovro, Upofi TjOev. 3. Kal vvv ttoSI Kpal-nv oavrov EXd(t>p(b 4. -ddKov &' TTpoXiTTOvo' aWepd dyvov
|| \\
j

2.

II

\\

5. TTOpOV 01
6.

0)V(bV, e
I

I!

O/Cptd
ll

(T(7^

|1

x^ovX
%p^C<^
I

Trjd
I

ueAw'
li

rovg oovg
c(.
]

dg novovg

||

7.

dmTTavT
ddXixfjg
I

6g dKova

(ParcBmiac.)
||

8. TjKU)
9.

il

repiid
H

ksX
j

v9oy
ITpu//
| |

dldfielil)

dfxivdg
I

upof
i|

<7,

^0v,
|j

||

10.

TOV TXTEpvy
j

WK?/
\\

T0I'(5' Ot

ibVOV

11. yvwiii]

arofUMV
|

drep ev
||

dvvojv
|

||

12. rai^- aai^-

dg Tvj^at^,
|

ladl,

ovv
|
|

dAyoi-

||

13. TO, re

14.

yap eodvdyK
\

[le,

6oK(b,
\\

\\

^vyysveg
]

ovribg
\\

\\

d^el,

%wpic
\\

re yevovg
|

15. ov/c fiCT

I

Iv dro)
\

iiel^ovd

fiolpdv

\\

16.

velixalfi,',
|

rj

aol.

\\

17. yvGioel 18.

de Ta(5'
I

wa

||

ervfi',

ovS
|
|

fidrriv
||

|I

yXCjooelv H Vt iitor 19. OTJualv', <^oi ^^^|t* 0, rl XP^

x^plro
oi)

0p yap
|

II

"updoaelv
\\

||

20.

yap

ttot' pt^,
I

||

ibg '9.

Kidvov
|

21. ^tAo^" tiar

l (3e6al

||

orepog

aol.
\

(Paroemiac.)

Vss. 405-413 (Leipsic ed. 397-405).

Strophe 6\
1.

l,Tev(o oe

rag

ovXofilvdg

2.
3.

rvxdg, Upoi^fj 0i}, ddKpvalGTdKTOV 6' an' oaa wv pddlvibv

| |

4. peof, Tcapel
5. 6.

av vorlolg
\

erey^e

ndy

alg- afxeydp|

rd ydp rdde

Zvf
|

ISlolg

7. vofiolg

Kpdrvv

cjv, vnepf]-

OF THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS.

8.
9.

133

^avov dSolg
delKvvotv

rolol Trdpog
|

alXfJ'dv.

1.

2.
3.

4.
5. 6. 7.

8.
9.

same measure. same measure. Dochmiac monometer.

Vss. 414-422 (Leipsic ed. 406-414).

The The The The The The The

Gly conic polyschematistic. same measure. same measure. same measure. same measure. same measure.

Antistrophe 6\
corresponding line for line with Strophe
1.

6'.

2.

UpoTTdad AeAdKe ;\;wp

d'

rj

6rj

orovdiv

a, iieydXo\

3. axiil^ovd r'

dpx
|

al6TTps.-nfi^

4.

orevovol rdv
re
rlfi
\

adv
|

^vvofial-

5. fxovcJv
"

dv, ottoooZ t'

6.

sTrotKov

dyv
j

dg "Aaldg

7.
8.
9.

eSog vsfiovT al, fieydXoOTovolai oolg 7T7jjxdoi ovy|

Kd[x.voval &vrjrol.

Vss. 423-427 (Leipsic ed. 415-419).

Strophe
1.

e.

KoXxid
I

og re
ol fidx
I

\\

ydg ev
^

oTkoI
|

\\

2. TrdpdSv
3.
Kttt

dg d
1|

rpearoi
ol
|

||

iKvd
exova

rjg oil

iXof
dficj)t

ydg

||

4.
5.

eaxdrov
CiTLV

rot:
\

dv

Mal-

I Xliivdv.
1.

Choriambic dimeter.

134
1.

CHORAL SCANNING
Trochaic dimeter acatalectic.
Tlie

2.

same measure.

3.

The same measure.

Choriambic dimeter
catalectic.

4. Antispastic dimeter.
5.

Vss. 428-432 (Leipsic ed. 420-424).

Antistrophe

, e.

corresponding Hne for line with Strophe

1.

"Apadl
vipl
I

dg t' dp
II

elov
|

dvdog,
I

||

2.
3.

Kpfjfjivdv
|

1?'

ol TToX

land
|

||

KavKda
of(76

ov TveX
\

dg

vejj.

ovrai,

||

4.
5.

ddlog arpdr
Ppifiibv

6f,

o^vnpojp
alxfi'alg-

V
I

Vss. 433-444 (Leipsic ed. 425-435).

Antispastic System.
1.

Movov

6?]

2. 3.

evr' aKdfi

npoad iv dXXov sv dvrdde rolg

\ \ \ \

ttovoIoTv 6d^-

Tlrdvd Xv/ialg
"ArXdvO', 6g al

4.
5. 6.

eloldo^dv -d^ecbv, ev vTrepocpov

|

adevog Kpdralov OVpdvl ov T TTO/l

I I

ov
I

7. vCiTololv V7T0 8. jQoa de TTOVT

9. TTl-nrdiV,
|

fSdard^el.
log iiXvdo)v
\

^vfi\

orevel
\

fivdog,

KeXalv
\

og d'

10. dldog VTTO

11. TTdyal &'

Pptjiel fivxog
\

ydg,

12. ovolv

dyvopp vrdyv Trora/idJv dXyog olKrpov.

||
|

arev[

1.

Antispastic trimeter.

2.
3.

Dactylic dimeter hypercatalectic.

Docftmiac dimeter.

4. Antispastic dimeter.

OF THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS.

5. 6.

135

Doclimiac monometer.
Dactylic dimeter hypercatalectic. dimeter catalectic.

7. Antispastic

8. Antispastic
9.

dimeter hj^ercatalectic

10. 11.
12.

The same The same The same

measure. measure.
measure.

Trochaic dimeter brachycatalectic.

Vss. 535-546 (Leipsic ed. 527-535).

Strophe
1.

$-'.

MfjSdfi'
I

TTdvrd vifi

djv
\

2. -delr' ifi 3. \ia

a yvd- \ Kpdrog dvrlna

\

Xov Ztvg,

4.

[iTid'

Xlvvv|

II

5. aaliii i?
6.

ovg oal
vloaons.
olg, -nap'

alg &olv-

alg TTOTi
I

vd
\

7. (iov(pov
8. 9.

||

QKedv
I

old rrdrp
rropov,
I

og

dablGTOv
fiTid'

10.

dXir
I

olid rod'

Aoy
||

olg|

11. a/lAa

[lol
I

ejtijwsv

ol,

kol

||

12.

iirjTTor'

g/cra/c

||

e].

1.

Dactylic dimeter hypercatalectic.

2.
3.

Trochaic monometer.
Dactylic trimeter.

4.
5.

Trochaic monometer.
Dactylic trimeter. Dactylic dimeter hypercatalectic.

6.

7.
8. 9.

Trochaic monometer.
Dactylic dimeter hypercatalectic.

Doclimiac monometer.

10. Dactylic dimeter hypercatalectic.

136
11.
12.

CHORAL SCANNING
Trochaic dimeter. Trochaic dimeter brachycatalectic.

Vss. 547-558 (Leipsic ed. 536-548.)

Antistrophe

g-%
f'.

corresponding line for line with Strophe

1.

Hdv

rl
I

ddpadXe
ov teIv|

alg
||

2.
3.

rov jiaKp
elv j3cdv
\

eXtxXgl,
||

(pdval^

4.
5.

&V110V

dXdalvI
I

ovadv EV

evcppoavv
|

aif (pploo-

6.

6e G
\

depKOfiEv
II

j)

7. iivpl

olq fioxdI

8. oig did

Kvalofiev

ov.
|

9
10.

*
|

*
\

Z^va yap ov Tpop^e u>v, 11. sv 161 a y vwjti H ^ oed el &vdT\

\\

12. ovg

ay

av,

Upon

\\

fjdev.

Vss. 559-567 (Leipsic ed. 546-553).

Strophe
1.

^'.

$ep'

OTTw^I

d^dplg
II

||

%ap<?

w
|

(plXog eln-

||

2.

e TToi)

Tif cAk
I

d
||

3. rlf

05
j

fiepluiv

4.
5.

ap^l
oAtyo
I

Ig'
I

ov6'

II

idepxO
||

^5"

6. aKt
7.

dpdvlrjv /cvv lo ovetp

II

ov a
|

||

to
|

<J)ojt

wv
|

dXdov
I

*
II

yevof
|1

ejtt

7T7Todl(7[J,-

\\

8.
9.
1.

ivov ov
I

TTore
I

rav
||

Alog dpfi
al
|

ovldv
[
||

||

&vdTO)v
is

Tcdpe^

ta

/3oi;/l

at.

A line A

wanting here to answer

to the corresponding

one

in the

strophe.
2. trisyllabic

word

is

fiEpoTvuv ; Burney uXaiJg, a?i,adv into oAauv.

wanting in this line. Blomfield suggests changing at the same time the preceding

OP THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS.

137

1.

Anapeestic dimeter.

2. 3.

Iambic monometer hypercatalectic. Anapaestic monometer.

Iambic dimeter catalectic.

4.

5. Anapaestic
6.

monometer.

Iambic trimeter catalectic.

Anapaestic dimeter.

7.

8.
9.

The same measure.

Iambic dimeter hypercatalectic.

Vss. 568-576 (Leipsic ed. 554-561).

Antistrophe
corresponding line for line
1.

^',

with Strophe
|

^'.

Ejud^ov
I

rdde, odg
\\

||

TxpoaWovq'

oXodg

||

2.
3.

Tv^dg, Updiifj TO dldiicp idlov

I
I

6evII

4. ds [xol

[xeXog
\

||

TTpoaeirr

d
|

5. rod', eKsZv
6. (pi 7. 8. 9.

o 6' o, t'
teal
\\

dfj,[

||

Xovrp
I

d
I

lord

tI ydncjv,
\

\\

Xexog gov v fieval ore rdv ofiond\\

ovv
\

||

rplov edv

olg

d
||

\\

ydyeg "H
|

olovdv
|

\\

mdu)V
I

ddfidpr

a koIv

oXeKrp

\\

ov.

Vss. 577-581 (Leipsic ed. 562-566)

AnapjEstic Measure.
1.

2.

Tig y-ri, Tovde ;^aA

|
I

tZ yevog,
|

\\

rlvd 0(5

Xevaaelv
|

\\

Ivolg
;
\\

\\

iv Trerplv
rlvog d
\

olalv
|

||

3. %etjtia(^

onSvov
\

nXdnldg
ov, onrj
(xal.
\\

||

4. TTolv alg
5. yrjg
rj
\

oXIkeI
||

||

arjfifjv
\

fioyepd

nenXdvTJ

M2

(Parcemiac.)

138

CHORAL SCANNING
Vss. 582-607 (Leipsic ed. 567-588).

Antispastic System.
1.

*A

a,

ea ea-

2. XP^^^

3. eld(::)Xov

4.
5.

^^ 1^^ '''S^Xalvav olarpog, 'Apy ov yfjyevovg, dXev' w rov fj,vplu)7T ov elaopojg a (Sovrdv.

"^

da,

(potov^al

6e TTopevETal

doXlov
|

oixfj,'

e%wv,

6.

ov ovds K&r

7.
8.

dXXd

fie

ddvovrd yal rdv rdXalvdv

| \
\

d Ksvdel.
]

Kvvfjyerel, e^ evepu>v nepcjv Iv dvd rdv ixdpd 9. nXdvd re vrjar

\

Xldv
\

ipafii^ov,

10. V7T0 6s KfiporrXdcr

11.

6g orodel 6ovd$

dx^Tdg
Id) i(o,

12. vTTvddordv voixov.

13.
14.

nol
I

Txol,

Txd
\

ttcj,
\

ttG) TTcJ -nfi

fj.'

dy
|

ovolv rTjXe
rral,

irXdyKTol ixXdvol.

15. rl TTore

jit',

Kpovle
\

16. rl TTore ralod' ev

17. diidprovodv
\

e^sv^dg evpCov

ev irrjiidvalalv

18. e

"e.

19. olorpfiXdrib 61 20. -ndpdico'nov u)6e

6el\idTl
|

6elXaldv

21.

rj

x^ovl

icdXvipov,
\

relpslg nvpl (pXe^ov, ttovtIoIgIv rj

\

22. 6dKeol 6dg Pop

23.
(t)6ovTiofig
jLte

dv,

iirj6e [lol

evy

iidrCJv dvd^.

24. d6fjv

iroXv
\

TtXdyicTOL -nXdvai

25. yeyvfivdud 26. ftd0tv

alv, ov6' %cj

j

OTTTJ 7T7J

fiovd^-

dXv^Q.

1.

Extra metrum.

2.
3.

Dochmiac

dimeter.

catalectic. Antispastic tetrameter

4. Antispastic trimeter catalectic.

OF THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS.

5.
6.

139

Dochmiac dimeter.
Antispastic trimeter catalectic.

7.

8.

Choriambic dimeter catalectic. Dochmiac and antispastic.

9. Antispastic trimeter.

10.
1 1
.

Dochmiac dimeter.
Cretic monometer.

12. Antispastic

monometer.

13. Antispastic dimeter.

14. Antispastic trimeter.

15. Cretic dimeter. 16. Antispastic

17. 18.

and dochmiac

The same measure.

Extra metrum.

19.

20.
21.

Dochmiac dimeter. The same measure. The same measure.

22. Antispastic dimeter. 23. 24. 25. 26.

The same measure. The same measure. The same measure.

Dochmiac
dimeter.

Vss.

613-629 (Leipsic

ed.

594-609).

Antispastic System.
1.

Uodev

eiiov
I

av

rrd
\

Tpog

ovojj,

dirvelg

2. etTO fxol

3. TO, iioyepa, rig

wv,

rig apd \i\

(o

rdXdg,

4.

rdv rdXal

TTCJpov Cod'
\

5. ervfid 'iTpdodopelg

6. -SedoavTov
\

6S voaov ajvofidadg
^^^"' '^^^'
1
\

7.

a ixdpalv
fe-

el |U XP'.

8. Tpolg (polrdXeololv
.

f.

140

CHORAL SCANNING
|

10. OKjpT7Jfj,aTu)V 6e
11.

VTJoriaLv alKial^

XdSpoaovTog

rjX
|

dov smtcorol aiv

]
\

[iridtolv

ddiielod

12. dvodalfiovcov

6e rlveg,

ol, e e, ot'

13. eyu) [xoyov

'

alv
|

aAAa
b rl
I

fiol
\i

14. 15.

Topwf

rtK\if\p6v,
nrj

ETid\i\itvu

nddelv rX

XPV'
\

'''^
I

(pdpfidKOV

16. voaov, del^ov, el

irep
|

oladd

-Bpoel,

17.

^pd^e rd

dv^TTrAavcJ
j

rrdpOevu).

1. 2.

Dochmiac dimeter.
Cretic monometer.

3.

Doclimiac dimeter.

4. Cretic dimeter.
5.

Dochmiac monometer.
and dochmiac.

6. Antispastic

7. Cretic trimeter.
8.

Dochmiac monometer.
Extra metrum.

9.

10.

Dochmiac

dimeter.

11. Antispastic tetrameter catalectic. 12. Antispastic

and dochmiac.

13. Antispastic dimeter.

14.

15.

16.

Dochmiac dimeter. Dochmiac and antispastic. The same measure.

17. Cretic trimeter.

Vss. 706-718 (Leipsic ed. 688-694).

Antispastic System.
1.

"Ea

ea.
<j)v\

2. direxS
3.

ovtzot' ovttot'
]

rjv-

4.
5.

x^'^ ^evovg
adal koyovg

fioX
\

el\

OF THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS.

6. eg
7.

141

aKO
|

dv

sfj,

||

dv
dvaolara
|

ov6' Cjde 6va

\

Oedrd, Kol
|

8. TTTifidrd,

Xvixdrd
|

9. delfiaT' djxcp-

10. rJKel KevTpC) ipv

%tv ipvxdv efidv

11.

10)

t(x),

12. fiotpd, 13.

fiolpd, TTecpplK,'
|

l<;-

Idovad npa^

cv ~lovg.

1.

Extra metrum.
Cretic measure.

2.
3.

4.

Trochaic monoraeter hypercatalectic. The same measure.

5. Cretic
6.

monometer.

Trochaic monometer hypercatalectic.

7. Antispastic trimeter catalectic.

8. Antispastic
9. Cretic

monometer.

monometer.
monometer.

10.

Dochmiac dimeter.

11. Antispastic

12. Pherecratic,

commencing with

trochee.

13. Antispastic dimeter catalectic.

Vss. 898-908 (Leipsic ed. 876-885).

Anap^stic Measure.
1.

2.

"EAeAev, eXeXev, vno fi' av o(f)dKeXdg

]

\\

||

Kal (ppevo
d'
j

nXrjyslg
||

3. fidvlal

ddXTTOva',

||

olorpov

dp6lg

4. %pfei 5. 6.

fi'

dnvpog.
6e
(j}66(b

||

Kpddld

\\

<ppevd
d'

XdKT
|

l^el.

\\

rpoxodlv
|

eirat
j

||

onjmd'
\

e
\

Xlydjjv,
\\

|J

7. e^ai

de Spojiov
I

\\

(pepofial,
\\

Xvaafjg
|

8. TTvevfidTL

p-dpyu),

yXoJoafjg

dKpdrTJg-

j|

142
9. '&oXepol
I

CHORAL SCANNING
Si Xoyol
I
11

Tralovg
fj^dolv

elicf]
\

\\

10. GTvyvfjg

irpog

kv

II

dr

fjg.

(Paroemiac.)

Vss. 909-918 (Leipsic ed. 886-892).

Strophe
1.

tj.

"H

oocfidg,
1

rj

a6(pog
|1

fiv,

og

2. TrpwTO^ 3.

ev yvwjU-

a rod' a dU
TO
1 I

e
\

ddardae
\

Koi ylCiGa-

4.

fivdoXoy
KTiSeva1

Tjaev,

5. cjg

\\

6. al Kdd' 8

avTov dp
11

larev\

7. si fidKp
8. TO)

w- Kal
1

p]T
\

TOJv ttXovtI

II

dia
i
I

dpvTTTOfiev,
\\

(bv,

9. jtt^re

Twv yev]

10. r-a /ieya

11.

Xvvdfxev
II

cov
\

ovrd
1

^epi'J)

rav

e
|

pdarev

11

ffat.

1.

Dactylic trimeter.

2.
3.

Trochaic monometer.
Dactylic trimeter.

4.

The same measure.

Trochaic monometer.
Dactylic trimeter. Trochaic dimeter.

5.
6. 7.

8. Dactylic dimeter hypercatalectic.

9.

Trochaic monometer.

10. Dactylic dimeter hypercatalectic. 11.

Trochaic dimeter hypercatalectic.

OF THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS.

143

Vss. 919-929 (Leipsic ed. 893-899).

Antistrophe
corresponding line for line
1.

rj,

with Strophe

rj.

M^TTore
I

fiTinoTe

fi'

[lol-

2. pal *
3.

*
I

*
G)v
I

V
Atog
evvd-^
|

Xe^s

4. TEipdv 16
5. |U^(J
I

oiode ttSX
|

ovadv

nXddel|

\\

6. 7. 8.

^v yajue
ovpdv
I

rd rlvl
|

Twv i$

ov*
|

rdp6

|1

w yap
av
|

dorep-

\\

ydvopd
|

rrdpOevl
1|

9. eicrop

wf' ta\

10. ovg fieyd

11.

ddTrroiis

vdv.
\

dvanXd

volg

"Hp

l!

dg dX

drel
\

II

dg'

Vss. 930-938 (Leipsic ed. 900-905).

Epode.
1.

"Ejuot 6' orl fiev

d(^o66g, ov
I

ofidXog o

yduog

2.

3. dedtft'

jW^de
(Jv p
ofifj,

|1

KpelaaovII

4.
5.

wv

i9e
I

(x)g
jtt'.

d(pvKTOV

6. dTToXefiog

odi

7. TTopliiog- ov6'
8.

a TTpoodepKolro y' 6 TToXEfj-og, dnopd rig dv ytvolimv e;^w

\
| \

rdv Atog ydp

I

ovx' opd
dv.

9. fiTJTtv OTTd

(pvyolj-i'

1.

Antispastic dimeter.

2. Cretic
3.

monometer.

Trochaic dimeter brachycatalectic.

1.

Four

2.

syllables

wanting

~
|

syllable wanting.

144
4.
5.
6.

CHORAL SCANNING
Trochaic monometer hypercatalectic. Antispastic and dochraiac.

The same measures.

Dochmiac dimeter.
Trochaic dimeter
catalectic.

7.
8.
9.

Choriambic dimeter

catalectic.

Vss. 1075-1128 (Leipsic ed. 1039-1092).

Anap^stic Measure.
1.

'ElSoTL
I

Tol
I

iiol
||

II

rdad'

dyy
|

eXidg

\\

2. 3.

66' edu)

v^ev,
I

-rrdaxelv
\\

de KaKtbg
\

||

E^Opov vn'

Ex9pu)v,
ett'
\

ovdev d
\\

ELKeg.
d)
)

||

4. Tzpog ravr',
5. 6. 7.
8. 9.

e/xoI
\\

plTrread
\

fiiv
6'

||

TTvpog

dfj.(p

7iKF]g
II

j3darpvxog,
\

aWfjp
||

\\

EpeOl^

Eodd)
I I

f3pdvTfj,
\\

acpdKeXd) t'
6'

dypldiv

dvEfidtv

^66vd
Tpd^El
sg te
pii/jei
||

ek
\ \

TrvdfiEVOJV
\\

||

avralg
KVfld 6e

pl^alg
I

||

nvEvfid Kpdd
\\ \

alvol,
|i

TTOVTOV

podld)

10. ^vyxi^o
1 1
.

eIev
I I

||

rd)v r' ov
\ ||

pdvlibv
|

||

darpd)v

dtodovg,
[

keX

aZvov

|I

12. 13.

Tdprdpov rovjiov, d
I

dpdfiv

||

defmg
\

\\

14. TTdi'Tojg

vdyK7]g ejUe y' ov

\
\\

OTsppalg
-ddvaToja

dlvalg
eI.

||

||

(Paroemiac.)
\\

15. Toldds
I

[levTol
I

to)v (ppsvo
||

16. jSovXevjj,
17. Ti

ar' Itt^
etTrei
|

t' scrriv a/c

ju^

nXfjKrdjv ovaal.
|

|[

yap eXX
I

||

ndpd
j

nacEtv
\

\\

18. 1 nfid'
19.

aTi;;:^;'^^
I

||

aAA' ovv
j

vfj.jg

\\

rl -xdXd fidvlcjv oavvatg y' ai tt^^w

;
|

||

\\

20. ^vyKdfiv 21. /iTa TToi

22.
//?/

ovaal
I

\\

ralg rovd
||

e,
|

ronojv
\\

\\

;:^;a)ptT'
I

e/c

t6Jv(5
]

e doiog'
||

(f)pEvdg
|

-DjUdJv

||

?/Ai0i

ibafi
|

23. (SpdvT'Fjg 24. "AAA6 Tt

25. 6 Tt Kal

fivKfjfj,'
I

\\

dTEpdfj,v

ov.
|

(Paroemiac.)
fi'
||

^d)vel

||

TTetcrfit^"

||

aai rrapa ov yap

|

[ivdov

\\

(J^ ttow

OF THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS.

26. TOVTO ye
|

145
\\

rXfirov
[

|1

ndpsav

27.

7T(bg

HE KeX
|

evelg

||

KdKdrrJT'
II

pdg enog daKslv

\ |

\\

6 rl XPV 28. fierd rov6' IBeXdi T^daxelv 29. TOT?-?- yep TTpodordg nlaelv s-iiddov 30. KOV/C CTT i i^OCTOf,
\\ |1
I |

ll

||

31.

^v Tiv' dnenr 32. "A/IA' ovv [.ijj,viiad'

T^(T(5'
I I

\\

vad [xaXX
\\
\

ov.
\

(Paroemiac.)
|!

33.
34.

jti^fJe

Trpog
|

ar^f

||

dyoj TrpoXeyd' delaal i^^pa

,
\\
|

fiefiipfjad'

rvx'>']v,
||

11

jw^de rror'
\

elnrjO'
\\

\\

35. 36.
37.

w^

Zei;f

i}jUtt5"

elg dirpo
\\

onrov
|

nijfi'
{^jua^-

ela
| I

eOdXev
\\

iif]

St^t',

avral
||

6'

||

avrdg|

eldvl
|

at yap,
|

38. Koy/c e^

al(l)vfjg,

\\

ov6e Xddp
dlicrvov
|

alcjg,
||

\\

39.

et^"

aTrep

dvTOV
| \

||

ar/y^|

40. efiTrXixd
41.

fjoiad'
||

\\

vn' dvol

dg.
\\

(Paroemiac.)

epyw 42. %0wv oeadX evrar

fifjv
I |

Kal

kovk
||

em
\

iJbvdu)

43. (ipvxld

d'
I |

?/;\;aJ

||

Txdpdiiv
II

ndral
|

||

44. j3pdvrf]g,

eXiKeg
|

d'
||

eKXdf^n

ovai
|

|j

45. OTepoTTrjg, de kovIv ^drTvpol, OTpojj,6oi 46. elXlaa ovar GKlprd 6' dveficov
|
||
\

||

47. Ttvevfidrd 48. ordatv dv

49.

ndvrojv,
tIttvovv
|

||

etc:

oA/L
| |

^Aa

||

\\

dnoSeiK
|

vvfievd||

||

^vrsrd
I

pdfcral
fjwot
||

\\

50. Toldd'

err'

aWfjp Tzovrih. Alodev pt-rr^

j

6'

||

51. Tev;^;*;^ 52.

a
[

(l>6bdv

||

<7Tt;;t;et

(fydvepuig

||

jLtTJ

53. ai^jjp

rpof ejti^^ H oeddg, Kolvov (f)dog elX

\\

w
|

irdvTdv
||

||

laaibv,
d.
|

54. eaopdg

ju'

wf

e/c

||

dt/ca rraa;^

(Paroemiac.)

CHORAL SCANNING
OP THE

AJAX

FLAGELLIFER.
Vss. 134-171.

Anap^stic Measure.
1.

TeXdfxCiv

le nal,

||

Trig dfuf)
|1

Ipvrov
\

||

2.
3.

'LdXafuv Ge fiev Ev

6g e-i^wv
\

jSdOpov
||

npdaadvr'
|

dyx Imxcup
rj
\

^dXov,

\\

w.

(Paroemiac.)
\\

4. 5.
6. 7.

2e

d'

orav
\

TrXfjyfj

\]

Awg
||

^dp,evf]g
|

Xdyog eK

Advdcov
6v
|

||

Kdwodpovg
Kai
Tte(()66
|

em6fj,
|

||

p,iydv OKV
TTrfivfji;
I

;^;63,
||

7j|Wai,

||

wf
T^f
|

OjUjU.

a
|1

TreAst

d(;.

(Parcemiac.)
\\

8.
9.

~^g Koi
ixeydXol
(JvCT

vi}v

(pdljxevfjg

vvurog
\

&opv6ol
K.Xeld,
il

10. 7Tt

Kdrixovo' (Te TOV tTTTT

\\
|

fjfidg
Ojt-tav^

\\

II

11. XeIh<I>v'

ETTi^dvr',
|

II

oXeoal
|

Advdcbv

\\

12. jQdra Kal 13. ^Trep

I

Aemv,
||

||

66plXr]7:
I

rof er' ^v
||

Xolmj,
w.

||

14. ktsIvovt'
15. ToZ'oC'crd
|

ald(bv
t

atd^p

(Paroemiac.)
\\
\

Aoyovf
\\

16.

fitf

wr
I

(pSpel
|

ipWvpovg TrXdaaQv irdolv "06 vGoevg

|| \\
|

17. ai acpodpd 18. EVTxeloT

I

19. roi) /Lef

neldelntpl ydp croi' vi;v d Atyei, kol Trdg o kXvcjv dvrog X^^P^^ P'dXXov
\\
|

|1

||

\\

\\

||

20. rolg aolg

dx^olv

||

KdOv6pl^
\\

G)v.
\
\

(Paroemiac.)
\\

21.

Twv yap
dv

fieydXcbv
|

iljvxd)v
6'

Islg
j

22. oiin

apt,

dpror

||

Kdrd

dv

rcg jUou

||

CHORAL SCANNING OF THE AJAX FLAQELLIFER. 147

23. TolavT 24.
Trpo^-

a Xeycov, ovtc dv tteWoIyap rov ix^vd' 5 ({)ddvog spirel'

\\

11

\\

11

25. Kalrol
\

ofilKpol
|

\\

^eydXibv
|1

26. G(pdXepdv

rcvpyov

pvad
\

TreA

xCyplg ovral\\
|

\\

27. juera yap 28. Kal [ilydi;

fieydXibv
\

(ialoq

plar' dv,
\

11

opdoW
\\ \\

\\

vtto luap

oripibv-

\\

29. dXX' ov
I

dvvdrov
I

rovg dvo

fJTOvg
stv.

\\

30. TOVToJv
31. "Ttto roc

yvwiidg
ovTibv
I

npodlddoK
dvdpcov
|

(Parcemiac.)

\\

32. x'

W^^?
\

ovdev
I

\\

adsvojxev

\\

d6pv6el H -npog ravr'

Ig

\\

33. drrdXe^

daOal
\

34. dXX' ore

|

yap
\

di]

aov %(op ro aov

\\
\\

dvd^.
\

\\

ofjifi'

dTzeSpdv,
\\

\\

35. -ndrdyova 36. fieydv al 37. rdx' 38. aly^

\

Iv,

are

Trrfivibv
\\

dyeXalj

yvmov
|

6'
\]

v-noSsla
el

dvrs.g
\

H
11

av ef
\

alcpvfjg,
H

ov (pdv
ol.
|

eZ7]g

-nrri^el

dv dcpQv

(Parocmiac.)

Vss. 172-181 (Leipsic ed. 172-182).

Strophe
1.

a.

"H.
u)

pa oe
\

TavpoTTO

Xd Alog

"Aprep^,

2.

iieydX

(pdrlg
|

w
|

3. i^drep

aloxvv

dg efidg
\

4.
5. 6.

wp
rj
fj
I

iidae -rravda
|

fiovg

em
\

jSovg
\

TTOv rlvog vl
I

pd kXv
I

Kdg dicdpno) ru)V evd pQ)V

\

dye Xaldg rov %aptv

|

7. ipevad

elad

dCitpolg

elr'
\

eXd
|

4>^fi6Xt
I

alg

8.

x^^'^^^'^P"'^
I

^^
I

'''^^ ^"^
1

'^"'^''

^^
\

9. fioiid)

10. [idxdvalg

dv %wv f iiv rladro

|

ov ddpug
XQibdv.
\

evvvx^

olg

1.

Dactylic tetrameter.
Dactylic trimeter catalectic. and cretic raonometers

2.
3.

Epitritic

148
4.
5.

CHORAL SCANNING
lambelegus hypercatalectic' with anacrusis, and

Epitritic dimeter

cretic.

6. Dactylic trimeter catalectic.

7.
8.

lambelegus.

9.

The same measure. The same measure.

monometer and Adonic.^

10. Epitritic

Vss. 182-191 (Leipsic ed. 183-193).

Antistrophe
1.

a.
er:'

Ov

TTore
I

yap
|

(ppevo

6ev y'

d
\

plarepd,

2. TTal
3.

TeXd
Kol

fiojvd^ e6
ttoTixv
|

dg

roaoov, tv

alg ttltvcov
|

4.
5.

Kal
I

ydp dv i9ei d voaog- dX.^ dnip vKol Zevg KdKdv Koi ^olbog 'Apyel wv (pdrlv
| |
\

6. el 6' VTTO
I

(idXXofie

vol
|
\

7. kXettt

8.
9.

jtt^,

oval [ivdovg ol jieyd Xol fidalX 6dv ysve dg, doibrov rdg I^lavcpl 0)6' olg kXIoI e<pdX fifj fi', dvd^, ed',
I

fig

atf

10.

o/i/i' e:\;(ov,

KaK
|

dv (pdrlv

dpfj.

Vss. 192-198 (Leipsic ed. 194-200).

Epode.
1.

~AXX' dvd
GTTJpl^
I

e^ eSpdv
|

cjv
\

oToi)
| |

fidnpal
||

||

wvt

2. 3.

i TTOTfi

Tttd'
| \

djlbv

iOJ
j

OXoXxj

arav
]
I

ovpdvXdv

(pXeyCbv.

4. e;:t^P

^'^ ^' ^/3pi^? wcJ'

|

a
|

rdpdrjrd
\

5.
1.

opudral ev

evdvlfi

olg fidaa

alg

The lambelegus
epitritic

a second

hypercatalectic. 2. The last syllable of the epitrite is doubtful, or, in other words, admits a short for a long, but only when it is followed either by other numbers, as dactylic or cretic, or by another member formed of epitrites.

ranked under concrete numbers, and consists of monometer with an anacrusis, and a dactyhc dimeter Hrrm. Elem. Doclr. Mclr. p. 425, scq., Glasg. ed.
is

Compare

the ninth verse of the antistrophe that follows.

OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER.

6. TTdvTCJV

149

Kdyxa^ovr
ifiol
|

o)v
|

yXdyaaalg

7.

PapvaXyfir'-

6'

dxog eordKlv.

2.
3.

Dactylic dimeter hyperc. and Iambic dim. brach.. The same measures.

4.
5.

Glyconic. Glyconic catalectic, with molossus following.' Epitritic monometer and dactylic dim. hyperc.

6.
7.

Dochmiac dimeter catalectic.^ Dochmiac and antispast.

Vss. 199-218 (Leipsic ed. 201-220).

ANAPiESTic Measure.
1.

Nao?- dp

wyoi

H riqc;
\\

Ai
|

dvroq,
|

\\

2.
3.

yevld^
e;\;6juev

^^dvlibv

dn' "Epsx^
||

elSdv,
\\

|1

arovdxd^
j

ol Kfjd

ofievol

4.
5. 6. 7.

Tov TeXd
j

^cjvog

\\

rriXodiv
||

oIkov.
|

||

vvv ydp delvog, Kldg doXepGi

I

[J^Sydg,

w
|

iMOKpdrfig

||

||

Kelral
\

^eijuwy
I

i
||

vogT]
\\

adg.

(Parcemiac.)
||

8.

Tt

d'

ivTjXX
j

dKral
\\

rrjg

d
\

fiSpldg

9. o^i)^ ^(J

e fidpdg;
I

10. Trat

TOV
ETTel

^pvyiov
\

||

av TeXev
\

rdvrdg,

\\

11.
12.

Xey\

os Xexog
||

\\

dovpldX
|

drov
|

||

GTep^dg
ojcrr' oi}/c

ave%et

-Bovplog
||

Aiaf
|

{|

13.

av
]
I

at(5p

Ig tmel-n

oi(:.

(Paroemiac.)
;
||

14. Ilcj^ 15.

(J?/r
|

d XeyC)

|1

davdro)
I

16. 17. 18.

1.

Treiiafit. yap icrov yap aAovf -/jfiev 6 KXelvog ixdvtd vvKTepog Ataf dneXcj dfjd?]. dv tdolg aKT]vT]g ivdov Tolavr'
|| |

Xoyov dpp nddog sk

\

Tjrov

1|

||

||

||

\\

||

||

" Catalectico (Glyconeo) interdum molossus adjicitur." {Herm. Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 361, ei. Glasg.) 2. Compare JEsch. Pers. 978, fj kuI tov Tlepauv ; and 678, Truaa 79
eg,

(^Burn. Tent. p.

.xxiii.,

n. xiii.

N2

p. xv., n. siii.)

150
19. xelpodd
I

CHORAL SCANNING
liCTa
\\

ocpayV
II

alfi

o6dp'rj.
|

11

20. Kelvol
I

XRV^^VP

^^

'^'

^'^P

og.

(Parcemiac.)

Vss. 219-227 (Leipsic ed. 221-232).

Strophe
1.

(3\
\\

Oldv
I

Edfj
|

II

X,(badg
|

dvdpog

2. aldoTTog
3.
|

dyyeAl
||

av
\

4.
5.
6.

drAa tov, ov8 e <j)evKT dv, Twv fieydX G)v Advd (JJv vtto rdv o fisydg jivdog de^ et.
\
| | |

KXii^ofiev

av,

Oijwoi,

(poSovn

11

ai to TrpoaepTT

ov
|

7Tepl(j)dVT

of

7. 8.
9.

ddveiT
I

at, TTdpdTrXrjicr

w
\

%fpt crvy
/cat'
|

ndrdKrdg

KeXalv
\

olg ^(f)eo
a^" tTTTT
II

iv fiord,
|

PoTTJp

OVW

jU-Olif.

1.

Iambic and trochaic monometers.

dimeter hypercatalectic.

2. Dactylic
3.

Iambic dimeter catalectic.

Dactylic pentameter catalectic. Choriambic dimeter hypercatalectic.

4.
5. 6. 7. 8.
9.

Iambic monometer and choriambic trimeter

cat.^

preceded by an iambus. Dactylic dimeter hyperc, preceded by an iambus. Iambic dimeter catalectic.
cat.,

Choriambic trimeter

Vss. 228-239 (Leipsic ed. 233-244).

Anap^stic Measure.
1.
2

fiol-

KEldev,
|

II

Ktldlv dp
\\

rjfiZv

\\

2. deandyr

tv dycjv

ri^vde

Txolfivdv'

1. This and the succeeding line may be united into one logaoedic, consisting of a base, two dactyls, and four trochees. 2. Compare the remarks of Hermann on the choriambic catalexis, Ekm. Doctr. Meir. p. 267, ei. Glasg.

OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIPER.

3. b)V TTJv
]

151
\\

fiev eao)
|

\\

ocpd^' enl
\\

yaldg,
|

4.

5.
6..

ra 6e irXevp otconQv 61^' dvepp rjyvv 6vo 6' dpY iTToddg Kplovq dveXoJv Tov fiev Ke^dXrjv kol yXuioa dv diipdv
\

\\

\\

||

\\

7. pl-nrel
8. 9.

-depladg
dFjGdg
\

\\

tov

6'

opO

ov dvcb
|

\\

KLovc
I

II

fieydv Inrr
I

6deT7]V
ll

||

pvrfip
\

a Xd6(bv
\

\\

10. Tralsl
11.

Xiyvpd ndarly I SlTrXfj KUKa dsvv d^(x)V prjiidd' a dalfiCiv

||
I

\\

\\

12. Kovdelg

dvSpibv

||

t6l6d^

\\

ev.

(Paroemiac.)

Vss. 240-248 (Leipsic ed. 245-256).

Antistrofhe
1.

j3\
||'

~Qpd

Tiv'
I \

2. Xvfifidal 3. TTodolv
I

Kap d Kdvov Kpvipdfie

fj
II

6?]

KXdndv
I

\\

dpead

at,
|

4.

7y

&66v

elpeal
|

a^ i^vyov
|

(^djU

x'ov
|

5. TTOVTonopio

rat [iWelv
||

at.
)

Toiaf epe(7(7 ovcrtv dTrelX a)v TrecpodJifi at 7. Kdd' fjfi

6.
I

XWoXsvor
twtt
|

af diKpdreJg "Arpeldal ov ap?/

|

8. I'vT^aAy
9.

etv jttera

Toi)(5
|

tf,

TOV

atff'
I

dirXd

||

to^*

tcr;;^;

et.
|

Vss. 325, 328, 331 (Leipsic ed. 333, 336, 339).

Antispastics.
325. fw not not. 328. IG) fiol fiol.
331. tw Trat
Trat.
| I

325. Antispastic monometer. 328. The same measure.

331.
1.

The same

measure.

Hermann's arrangement. Wunder, ad loc.

Compare, however, the remarks of

152

CHORAL SCANNING
Vss. 340-344 (Leipsic ed. 348-353).

Strophe
1.

y' .

tw
I

2. 3.

0iAoi vavbaral,

fiovot efiojv ^IXdJv,

|

novol

t' efifisvovT

eg opdGi
I
j

vd[ji,G),

4. Ideod
I

fj,'

ol

II

ov dpr

kvjj,

\\

(polv

tag

\\

vno

^dXTJg

II

5.

dn(pl6p6nov kvkXelt Iambus.'

at.
|

1.

2.

3.
4. 5.

Dochmiac dimeter.*^ The same measure.'

Iambic tetrameter.

Dochmiac monometer

hypercatalectic.

Vss. 347-351 (Leipsic ed. 356-361).

Antistrophe
1.

y'.

iQ
\

2.
3.

yevog vdldg dpojyov rixvdg, dXiov 6g ene6dg eXtaaQv TrXdrdv*

\ \

4.

ere

Tol,
I

os rol
\

||

novdv
ov.
|

dedopic

\\

ttoIjj,

evCiV
|

|1

endpic
5.

eaovr''

||

aA/ltt

jtie

avvddl^

Vss. 354-356 (Leipsic ed. 364-366).

Strophe
1.
|

e.

2. 3.
1.

opdg rdv d^pdovv, rov tvKdpdlov, Tov V daiolg drpearov ndxcblg,

\

ev d(f)o6oLg

fxe

&TJpa

I
|

delvov x^pdg

is of frequent ocsingle iambus, followed by a dochmiac verse, Consult Seidler, de Vers. Dochm. p. currence in the tragic choruses. 115. 2. Respecting the hiatus after the shortened final syllable in fiovoT, consult Hermann, Elem. DorJr. Melr. p. 158, ed. Glasg. 3. Seidler, de Vers. Dochm. p. 15. 4. In the fust foot of this line two long are resolved into four short.

OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER.

153

1.

2.
3.

Dochmiac dimeter. The same measure. The same measure.

Vss. 362-366 (Leipsic ed. 372-376).'

Strophe
1.
cj

g-\

dvo
I
]

nopog, og

\\

%epi

fiev
\

2. ixedfjK 3. 4.
5.

d rovg
\

\\

dXdar
I
|

opdg,

II

sv

6'

eXiKEOO
I

I j3ova
\\

kol
\

||

KXvTolg
epsfiv
I

7Teoo)v

alnoXlolg,
d.
|

ov

atjti

||

edei;<T

1.

Anapaestic dimeter brachycatalectic.

2.
3.

Iambic dimeter.

Choriambic and Iambic monometer.

Iambic and Choriambic monometer.
Iambic dimeter catalectic.

4.
5.

Vss. 369-371 (Leipsic ed. 379-381).

Antistrophe
1.

tw rrdvd' opojv,
opydvov,

dndvrcov
|
|

r' del

2. KdKcJv
3.

reicvov Adpriov,
r'
\

KaKomveardrdv

dXfuid orpaTOv.

Vss. 377-381 (Leipsic ed. 387-391).

Antistrophe
1.

$-'.

Zev,

npoyovCiV
-6?^
I

\\

rrpondrcJjp,
|

2. TTWf 3.

dv

ai/Lt

||

vXcor re
|

drov,
(5?all

||

exdpov

dXTji-i

d
|

Toi;^'

1.

al
I

liice

Line 360 (Leipsic ed. 370) lines 325, 328, 33 L

is

an antispastic monometer, al al al

154
4. 5.

CHORAL SCANNING
odpx&g
reXog
\

oXeaa
\ \

dg (idalXeig,
I

-ddvolii

\\

Kavr
\

og.

Vss. 384-400 (Leipsic ed. 394-409).

Strophe
1.

^'.

Iw
I

'

2.

OKOTog

ejiov <pdog
a)

3. epitog

(pdevv

OTarov, wf
e
I!

ejxol

4. eXead',
5.

eXeod
|

||

ju'

olKfjropd

sXeod

n'-

ovT
|

yap
rlv' elg

6. i^ewv ygvof, oi;0

dfiepicov^
\\

7. er'

a^

log

||

(^Xenslv

ova
\

aiv dvdp

(birCdv?

8.
9.

dXXd

jti'

5 At
6-

II

og

aXKi^d &og
|

10. Xedplov at

/ci^et
II

11. TTOi Tif

12. irol fioX

ovv (pvy
1

^
o)

(Jv [lev
||

\\

13. i

rd
I

//ev
ofj,
I

14. TolaS' 15. ficjpalg 16. Tidf de

17.

el (f)cX 00(v ow TTgA dg

II

oi
|

d'
I

dypalg
||

||

TTpooKelfi
|

edd
||

\\

orpdrog evoL %(pi 00V

I I

(JmaAr

6f av

jue

1.

Iambus.

2.
3.

4.
6.
6.

Dochmiac monometer. Dochmiac dimeter. Iambic monometer and dochmius.

Iambic dimeter brachycatalectic. Choriambic dimeter.
end of the doch-

1. Respecting the short syllable made long here at the miiis, consult Seidler, de Vers. Dochm. p. 85.

'^euv forms one long syllable here. Qui in fine trimetri addilus est pes, numero videtur trochaus manlus esse." Herm. ad (Ed. R. 1318.
2.
3.

The word

se-

OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER.

7.

155

Iambic trimeter and Semantus trochee.

8.
9.

Trochaic monometer hypercatalectic. Dochmiac monometer.'

Glyconic without a base.^ Trochaic monometer hypercatalectic.

10.
11.

12. 13. 14.

The same

measure.
catalectic.

Trochaic dimeter

Trochaic monometer hypercatalectic. 15. Iambic dimeter.

16.

Iambic dimeter hypercatalectic.

17. Adonic.

Vss. 403-419 (Leipsic ed. 412-427).

Antistrophe
1.
loj
I

^'.

dXlppodol TrdpdXd t' dvrpd, Kal veiioq eizdiCTldv TToXvv ^ 6dpov re dfj 4. TToXvv 5. Kdrel %t d[j,<p X TpoZI

2. TTopol 3.

||

\\

6.

dv ^povov dXX
I

ovK stI
I
|

[x'

ovk
||

7. st' dfiTT
8. d)
9.
l/cffi
I

vodg

||

exovr d tovt
II

o tI^

(ppovQv

\\

larcj

fidvdpL
|

ot

yecToveg poal

10. ev(ppdveg

11. OVK et'

I

"Apy dvdpd
\

elol^
II

ixfj
\\

12. rovd' Id

tjt' ett
Ij

og
ov-'
|

13. E^ip
1.

ecj j^ey

olov
loc.
first

Compare Hermann, ad
maintains that the

We

have given his reading, although

Wunder

syllable of oXidpiov cannot be thrown back to the preceding line. The latter editor makes oXsdpLov aiKl^cl a two short) and molossus. Hermann, dactyl (the long being resolved into

on the contrary, makes the dochmius end

long.
2.

in

two

short, resolved

from one

3.

Compare Herm. Elcm. Docir. Metr. p. 361, cd Glasg. We must read t^epiu here as a trisyllable. Porson and Elmsley
rille

at once, but the Attic prefer k^epu

does not hold good in

lyric verse.

Compare Hermann, ad

loc.

156
14.

CHORAL SCANNING
rlvd Tpot
I I

d orpdr
||

\\

ov'
diro
\

15. Sepxdfj 16.

xdovog
|

iioXovr'
|

\\

"EAAav
|

icJd^-

||

rdvvv

d' dri/i

1|

ibg

17. w(^e Trpo

/cetjiiat.

Vss. 589-598 (Leipsic ed. 596-608).

Strophe
1.
'^Si

77.

kXeiv
]
j

d lidXdiug
\

gu
\

fiev

nov^

2.

vai.
j

etf

dXtnXdyic
\

rog
og al

ev6aliiQ)v^
el
\
\

3. TrdcT

iv ireplcpdvT
d' o rX,dfi
\\

4.

eyw
dv
I

o)v iraX
Ae<ju
|

alog d0' ov
dirolv
|

xpo^og
r,ii4 (bv
|

5. ~I6al
I

nii^fiv

||

o
\

w^r

ju^v

6. 7.

fipWuog al
I

ev
\

evvuiid

%p6va) 8. Kdicdv
9.

rpvxonevog
eATTfd' 2%a;v

Ti

jite

ttot'

dvvaelv
|
|

10.

Tov dnoTpondv d

id^A

oi'
j

||

ddv.

1.

2. 3.

Glyconic hypercatalectic. Glyconic catalectic, with raolossus following.

Glyconic hypercatalectic. Iambic monometer and Glyconic.
Iambic monometer and Glyconic hypercatalectic, Glyconic catalectic, with molossus following.

4.
5. 6. 7.
8.

Iambus and choriambus.

The same

measure.

1. The diphthong ot in the word Tpo'tav is shortened before the succeeding vowel, and the first foot becomes a tribrach, answering to the trochee in the corresponding line of the strophe. Compare Spitzner, Gr. Pros. p. 7. 2. Herm. Elem. Docir. Metr. p. 362, ed. Glasg.

3.

4.
5.

We have adopted the reading recommended by We have adopted the arrangement of Hermann.
Herm. ad
loc.

Compare

line 195.

lus, Pers. 1055, " Versus G.

dvV uvV avid] ; antispasto incipit, quern sequitur penthemimeTes iambi-

Hermann. Compare .^schyAgain. 1162, tIto61 rSpQv aydvl, &c.

cum."

OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER.

9.

157

10. Antispastic

Dochmiac monometer. monometer and iambic monom. hypercat

Vss. 599-608 (Leipsic ed. 609-621).

Antistrophe
1.

T].

Kat
^vv
&eL
I

jUOi
I

2.
3.

dvodepdiTEVT eoTtv e<pedp dg

I \ |

og Al
ib

dg

fiol fiol

a fidvcd
\

^vv avX
o)

dg
dfj
|

4.
5.

6v l^

enefiip
|

\\

nptv
||

nore &ovp
6'

Icb
|

Kpdrovvr' ev ~Ap

el-

vvv
of
|

av

(ppevog ol 66C)r
|
|

6. 7.

0iA

otf /xeya "nlvd

d'
J
|

evpijral

ra

Trptv

epyd x^polv

8. fieylar

af dperdg
|

9. diplXd Trap' d(plXolg

10.

fiTTSff'

ETTsae iieX

got 5"

"ArpeZtJ

|1

ai^*.

Vss. 609-617 (Leipsic ed. 622-633).

Strophe
1.

i?'.

~H

TTOv
I
I

TTcAoi

II

[xev

evrpo(f)6g
|

d
|

jwepa

2. XevKU)
3. (ppevd[j,o

de y?/p
j

ll

a judr
||

rjp
|

vlv ordv
|

vooovvt
|

pwf aK
alXlvov

oi}(7^

4. alXlvov
j

5. ov6' o'lKTp
6.

aj"

yodv opv

Wog
ol 6'

drj
|

dovg
[iev Qtddg

^OBL

dvajiopog
\

dXV
\

o^vrovovg
\

7. &pr]vi]a 8. v
9.

el x^porrXJiKr
|

orepv oiat Treaoiivr dovTTol, Kal TToXt dg d

\

al
| \

fivyfid

x^lrdg.

1.

2. 3.

Iambic monometer and Glyconic. Iambic monometer and Glyconic hypercatalectic.

Trochaic dimeter brachycatalectic.

4. Dactylic dimeter.'
1
.

This veree

may

also be ecanned as

an iambus and chonambus.

158
5.
6.

CHORAL SCANNING
Choriambic dimeter hypercatalectic, with base. Choriambic trimeter catalectic, with base.
Choriambic
.

7. 8.
9.

aonometer hypercatalectic, with base.'

The same measure.

Phalaecian hendecasyllabic.

Vss. 618-626 (Leipsic ed. 634-645).

Antistrophe
1.

i9'.

KpeloaCiv
\

yap aS
\\

a Kevdfi
HJv
\

o)v 6 v6aG)V
\ |

||

jxaTdv

2. 6g eK

Trdrpo)
(x)v
[

ag
\\

i]k

yev^dg
|

dplar

Of

3. TToXvnov
4.
5.

~A

;t;ait5x'

OVK ST I
I

Gvvrpocpolg
sfiuedog dXk\
\

opyalg
c5

tKrog o\ilX

1
|

6.

TXd\i
|

dv ndrip

ol
\ \

7. TTaidbg
8.

6vO(p6pov dr

dv as nevel dv
ev

TTvdeod
|
|

at

dv

ovTT
I
I

rig eOpsip

9.

al(bv

Aid/crtJ
|

av a
|

repOe

rovde.
|

Vss. 674-686 (Leipsic ed. 694-706).

Strophe L
1.

ecjypl^
tcj,

2.
3.

tw,

spwT ndv,
I

II

I,

Txepl
I

xdpfjg

d'

dvenr
|

Ojuav.

ll

Ildv,

IXdv,
I

Hdv

dXlnXdyicr
iiTTOv
|
|

e
|

KvX-

Aavi
TTSTpai.

dg ^lovoicr
I

5.

d^ dTTo

(Jefp

ddog
I

6. 7. 8. 9.

0dv
o
I

7]d',

w
I

TTCog [lot
|

i9ewv xopoTTol 'Niiaid KvCboa

|

dvd|'
t

op;^;|

rifj^dr'

avrodd
|

^ ^vv
el
[

wv
|

di/>^f

wv
)

ydp
dv

e
|

juot jueA
I

^op

svaal
\
|

10.

iKdpToJv 6' VTTsp

TTeAdyewv fioXibv avd^ "AttoAX

|

11.)
12. 6
I

AdXtog ev
1

13. e/iot

^vvel
1.

rjg

yvdOTog 6t d navr
\
\

of ev

\\

(pp(iiv.

Called also a Pherecratic verse.

OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER.

159

1.

Iambic trimeter.

2. 3.

Dochmiac monometer.'
Glyconic.

4.
5.

The same The same

measure.
measure.^

6.

Glyconic, increased by a syllable before the base.' 7. The same measure.

Phalaecian hendecasyllabic.
LogaoBdic.

8.
9.

10, 11. Doclimiac dimeter

12. Glyconic. 13.

and iambic monom. hyperc.

Two

iambic monometers hypercatalectic, the second

with anacrusis.

Vss. 687-699 (Leipsic ed. 706-718).

Antistrophe
1.

i.

eXva
I

ev alv

|1

6v a%df
|

ott'
|

ohh

aribv
\

"^ApTjg

||

2.
3.

Icj,

IQ0)

vvv av,
I

vvv,
diiep

TiEv Txapa

XevK
| \

6v ev-

4.
5.

ov neXdaal
{

<pad(;

dou)v
I I

ioKvdXQv
[

vewv
ndXlv
|

6. or'
7.
8.

Aiag
cov 6'

XadiTTovog
|

de
I

av

TcdvOvrd

-deofi

t'
|

ef-

fivva',

evvojj,i
\

a
|

crgfi
[

wv
\

jwey
|

lara
[

ndvd' 6 jisy d<; xpov og fxdp alvsl 10. > Kovdsv dvavdrjrdv (pdrl^alp,' dv ev
9.
\

re y'

e|'

1 1. 3

deXTTT
I

II

wv
\

12.

Af

a?I

fierdveyv

(boOfj
II

13. -Bvnov

r' "ArpsicJ

aif

jwey

aAwvjj revet

/cewv.
|

1. Consult Seidler, de Vers. Dochm. The second vowel in p. 35. the verse is shortened before the one that succeeds. 2. In this and the three following verses Hermann gives a different The mode adopted above, however, is sanctioned by Seidarrangement. ler {ep. ad Loheck). 3. Consult Hermann, Elem. Metr. Doclr. p. 358, sej., ed. Glasg.

160
Verse

CHORAL SCANNING
TTOVOV
\

847. TTOVOg

TTOV(i>
I

11

(pEpsl.

\\

848.
849.

7Ta, TTa,
TTO,

yap

ovK &
|

\\

850. Kov6Elg

Irdar
\

\\

dv ey drat
\

oj
\

jxe

ovun

||

ddElv
\

Tonog

||

851. idov
I

852. dovTTOV
I

av kXv
y vd
dfj
| |

|i

w Tiv
/cotv
|

a
]

853.

?/j(idJv

Ij

05-

ottXovv

\\

OfuX

lav.
\

854. rl ovv

855. rrdv ear

I6^t
|

at TrAevp

ov ean

\\

epov

veuv
|

jj

856.

e^eii"

ovv
I

857. TTOVOV

ye
\

ixXfid
ifiol
||

1|

of ov(5
67] t7\v
| \

Iv slg
dcji'

\\

oiplv

nXeov
\
|

858. dXX' ov6' 859. KeXevd

|

\\

tjX
\\

\\

lov
\

j3oAa>v
II

1!

6v a

v^p ovd

djiov

dfiXol

(pdvelg.

847. Iambic dimeter. 848. Spondee (as part of an iambic line).' 849. Trochaic dimeter catalectic. 850. Iambic trimeter. 851. Iambic monometer brachycatalectic. 852. Trochaic dimeter catalectic.
853. Iambic trimeter.

854. Bacchic monometer. 855. Iambic trimeter.

856. Bacchic monometer. 857. Iambic trimeter.

858.

859.

The same measure. The same measure.

Vss. 860-868 (Leipsic ed. 879-890).

Strophe
1.

cd.

2.

Tig dv 67]rd dXldddv i^

1.

fiol,
I

rig dv

(plXdirovodv

^'^ dvTxvovg

dypdg
brachycatalectic.

Or, in other words, iambic

monometer

OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER.

3=
7]

161

Tig 6

Xvumd
j

6CSv
\
\

&e(jv

7]

pvTCJv

4.
5.

Bdandpt Tov Q [iddu

I

(ov izordiiibv tdplg

II

nov

el 7x661
I \

TrXd^o^evov Xevaaojv

6.

dnvol
I

oxf^rXld ydp

7. 8.
9.

ejj,e

ye rov paKptov
I

dXdrdv
\

7tovu)V

ovplG)
dX?<.'

pfj

TreXdaal dpopu)

djj,evfjvdv

dvdp

d
\

prj

Xevoelv
\

\\

ottov.
\

1.

Dochmiac

dimeter.*

2. Antispastic
3.

and doclimiac monometers.

Dactylic dimeter hypercat. and dochmiac monom.^

4. Dactylic
5. 6.

and dochmiac monometers.

lambico-dactylic and dochmiac monometers. Cretic dimeter.

7.

8. Cretic
9.

Dochmiac dimeter. and dochmiac monometers.^ Dochmiac monometer and Ischiorrhogic

iambic.''

Verse

869. 871.

ICO

fiol

uol
I
I

IC) rXfjfiibv

875. Ti 878. 879.

0) 0)
I

6'

eOTLv
|

p,oX ep,6jv

voardv
| j

pol Kdrs
|

880. rovde avvv

dv d^ avrdv w rdXdg
Trecpvev
\

881.

d) cJ

rdXal
\

(pp(oi>

yvvai
\

886.

pol epdg drag

olog dp' acpdxdfjg

\

887. d(ppdicrdg (plXdv 888. ey C) 8' 6 Trdvrd

\

Kdxpog 6
tto,
\

-ndvr' dlSp

Iq

889. Kdrfj
1.

peXi)

\\

ad

ird

2.

Seidlcr, de Vers. Id. p. 145.

Dochm.

p. 13.

3. Id. p. 123, 127. 4. " Versus 874 (859) iambico finitur ex eo genere, quod apte ischiorrkogiami appellari posse in elcmentis doctrines metrica dixi." {Herm.,

ad

loc.)

02

162
890. KtlraX 6
]

CHORAL SCANNING
dvarpdne
|

Xog

891. 6va
I

oJvvfiog

Aldg.

871.

869. Antispastic monometer. The same measure.

875. Bacchic monometer. 878. Dochmiac monometer.'

879. Dactylic trimeter catalectic, with anacrusis. 880. Cretic and dochmiac monometer.

881. Cretic dimeter.

886. Dochmiac dimeter.^

887. Dochmiac monometer. 888. lambelegus.'' 889. Iambic dimeter catalectic.
890. Dactylic trimeter catalectic. 891. Adonic, with anacrusis.

Vss. 902-910 (Leipsic ed. 925-936).

Antistrophe
1.

td.

efxeXXeg rdXdg
GTspeo(ppC)V dp'

ii^eXXeg %p6va)
I

2.

3. [xolpdv

d
I
\

TTelpeat

e^dvvoelv KdKdv u)V ttovcov rold

| |

fiol

* *' Trdvvv^d Kal (pdsddvr' 5. dvsar evdi^ eg ib^ocppov'

4.
\ \\
\

exdodon' ArpelSalq

6.

ovXiC)
I

Gvv nddel
\

7. fieydg dp' riv sKelv

1.

6g dpxoiv ^povog

" Monuit Seidlerus hunc versum conjungi posse cum seguenti in unum hexamclrum heroicum. At recte me moniiit Hermannus, non solere tragicos versum ilium ita nude ejusmodi numeris adjungerc, quotes

sunt qui atiteccdunt et sequunlur ," {Wunder, ad too.) 2. In the common text, verse 883 (Lcips. 905) reads as follows, tlvoq Kof dp' inpa^E jetpi dvdfiopoc, and is an iambic trimeter. Hermann, however, gives sp^e for lirpa^e, and makes the line consist of an iambic monometer hypercatalectic and iambic dimeter brachycatalectic. 3. Consult page 148, note ].
4. Two syllables wanting Elmsley prefers ava^.

to

complete the

line.

Hermann

reads upa.

OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER.

163

9.

* * * * oTxXuiv
I

ekelt'
I

'

dyu)V

nepl.

Verse

911. fw
913.
l(b

[lol fiol fiol fjiol

|

917. ^vvav6G) 920.

o)
/[iO(,

dvaXyfijibv
|

821. dta
I

crwv e0po
|

fiodg

dv
|

cvdov

922. epyov 'Arp stda^' rC)6' dx^l 923. dAA' dnslpy ol &edg 928. ^ pa KeXalvibTTdv dvnov e(pv6pl^ecg
\ |

929. 7ToXvT?idg dvrjp 930. ye Aa de roiffi

|

[lalvoiie.
|

volg dx^

olv
\

931. TToXvv
I

yeXo)T
|

||

a 0ev

0ev
^5*

932. ^vv 933. kXv

Tfi

dnrA

ol (3doiX
(

ovref "Arp

eldai.

The

scanning of these verses, from 911 to 933, corresponds, line for line, to that of verses 869-891.

Vss. 1136-1140 (Leipsic ed. 1162-1167).

Anap^stic Measure.
1.

saral
|

fieydXrig
I

||

eptdog
1|

rig dyOiv
\

||

2.
3.

dXX^

u)g

dvvdaal
|

anevadv
Twd' evd
I

KolXrjv

\\

TevKps rdx vvdg Kdnerov rlv' Idelv

| ||

||

\\

4.
5.

a
\

(iporolg
\\

rov dei
|

jj-vfjordv

\\

rdcpov ev

poJevr

a Kdde^

el.
\

(Paroemiac.)

1. Four syllables wanting at the beginning of the line. Brunck receives into the text the supplement given by Triclinius, namely, 'A^t^Muc ; but Musgrave, with more probability, suggests KpvcodiTuv, which is

approved of by Hermann.

164

CHORAL SCANNING

Vss, 1158-1164 (Leipsic ed. 1185-1191).

Strophe
1.

i/3'.

Tig dpd

vedrog

||

eg Txore

Xi]|

2. ^el
3.

TToXvnXdyKT Tav d TTavCTov

I

djv ereibv
|

dpldfiog

||

atev

e//ot

4.
5.

(J

op
I

vaaovTcbv
I |

noxOiov^

rav endyiov
I

ava
|

6. 7.

rav
Svg
I

evpdySf]

Tpoldv
I

rdvov oveZd

or

EAAavwv.

1.

Iambic dimeter catalectic.

2. 3.

Choriambic dimeter

catalectic.

Trochaic and choriambic monometers.

4. Glyconic.
5.

6. 7.

The same measure. The same measure. The same measure.

Vss. 1165-1170 (Leipsic ed. 1192-1198).

Antistrofhe
1.

tj3'.

6(pe.Xl

2. at fieydv
3.

npoTepov aWepd rov TrdXvKolv fj

||
|

Svv\

ov dddv
|

Kelvog
I

dvrjp

\\

og
|

4.
6.

del^ev
I

onXuv

arvyepdv "EAAaicj
|

GL

Kolvov "Apy'iv
I

6. 7T0V
7.
1.

oi TrpoyovoZ
I

novibv
| |

Kfeti'

Of

yap

t-rrepa

sv dvdpconovg.
in

verse 6.

molossus here takes the place of the choriambus, and so also Compare Hermann, Elcm. Doclr. Mctr. p. 360, ed. Glasg.

OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER.

165

Vss. 1171-1182 (Leipsic ed. 1199-1210).

Strophe
1.

ty'.

eicelv
I

og ov
j

2.

ovre (iddel

re arecpdvibv dv kvXIkcov
11

3. veliiev eiiol

repiptv ofilX
|

t
|

4.

re yXvKvv avX tji' oroSov 5. dvanopog ovr' cf vi';^iav

ov

6. repiptv 7.

lav
|
I

eiv

epwTwv
pwr
Keijti
I

8.
9.

wv

6'

dnenav
| |

trev
o^-

juot

ai 6' dutplnv
|

ovrwf

10.
11.

d
I

i TTVKLvaig
|

dpooolg

reyyo^evog

KOfidg

12.

Xvypdg

fivrjfidrd

Tpol

dg.

1.

Iambic monometer and choriambus.

2.
3.

Choriambic dimeter.

4.
6.

Choriambic dimeter hypercatalectic. Choriambic dimeter, with anacrusis.

Choriambic dimeter.

6. 7.
8.
9.

Choriambic monometer hypercatalectic.

Bacchic monometer.
Glyconic hypercatalectic, with base.

10. 11.
12.

The same measure, with The same measure.

Pherecratic.

anacrusis.

Choriambic monometer and iambus.

Vss. 1183-1194 (Leipsic ed. 1211-1222).

Antistrophe cy\
1.

Kal TTplv

uev ovv
I

\\

evvvxiov

3. deliidrdg

Tp

juot

irpoOoXd

166 CHORAL SCANNING OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER.

3.

4.
5.

^ovplog AT dg ovrog dvelr al arvyep(b dalfiovc rig fiol rig ir' ovv
Koi l3eXeu)v
6'
I

vvv

6. rep-ipig e-ntOT

al
|

7. yivoljidv
8. tV -yA
I

aev eirear
|

ttovtov
|

9. TTpo

pXrjfi'

dXluXvar
|

ov dKpdv

10.
11.

L'TT
j

TvXdKd liOVV
I

iOV

TCf itpcf
|

OTTW^

12. npoaelTT

ot/itv

"A^a
]

valg.

Vss. 1374-1392 (Leipsic ed. 1402-1420).

Anapaestic Measure.
1.

dXtg

fi

6fj

yap
I

|1

izoXvg Ik
\\

rerdral
\

2. xpo'i^og 3. %p(7i

dXX'
I

ol jiev
11

KolXrjv
i;i/>

Kdnerov
\

\\

rd^

vvETs
I

TOt d'
\\

I6drdv
| |

\\

4. rptTTod'
5. 6.

diJ,(p

CTTvpov
ll

Xovrpdv
6'
|

6aiu)V
||

\\

&ead' enl
|

Kalpov
II

juta

sk
|

aXlaldg
Ij

dvdpcjv
I

i/l^

Tov
II

yTratr

mdlov

7. KOGflOV 8. Trai

(pepsTd)
|

av

(5s
t
[

ndrpog
i^iyoJv,

\\

y' oaov lax

velg
e/iot
\\

||

9. (ptXoriir

||

nXsvpdg
\\

<7i;v
|

||

10. Tdad' enl

|

Kov(pl^'||

erl

yap
I
\

depfxal
||

Gvplyy eg dvo) 12. [xevog dXX' dye

1 1
. \
|

^vocoa
||

fieXdv
|

Trdf,
\\

(plXog da
\

rtf dv^p
||

||

13. (prjal Trap 14. T(x>v

elval,

aovadu)
II

j3dTU)
\

dvdp
I

I TTovcJv
I

TW

Trdvr'
ibv.
\

dyddil)

\\

15. Kovdevl
16.
17.

TTW Ao)

ll

ovi &vfir
\\

(Paroemiac.)
(Paroemiac.)
||

Aidv
I

fi

TToXX

rore (pdv rog or' fjv d PpoTolg ecrriv id

11
I |

w.
|

ovalv
|
\

18. yvajvat

nplv idelv
|

\\

6'

ovdelg
|

jiavTlg
i.

||

19. rG)v [xeXX

ovtcov,

\\

6 rl irpd^

(Parosmiac.)

CHORAL SCANNING
OF THE

(EDIPUS
I.

TYRANNUS.
Vss. 151-158.

Strophe
1. "i2

a.

Mog
I

dSve
I
\

nfjg (pdrl,

rig Trore

rag ttoXv

Xpvaov
2.
3.

Ilvdcjv

og

dyX

dag

eddg
\

||

Qfi6dg

lK.re.Td
|

nal (p66ep

dv

(ppevd,

delfjidTl

TrdXXcJv,
4.
5. 6.
I
\

rjls

AdXle
I

Haldv,
|

dfi(f)l
7]

aol
1 I

d^ofie

vog rl
\

fiol
|

rj

veov,

nepl
I

rsXXofie

valg

palg ivdXlv

7.

e^dvv

oelg XP^^^|

8. sine fiol,

w %pv(7 af reKVov
J

'lEXTcidog,

dudpore

1.

Dactylic hexameter.

2.
3.

Iambic dimeter acatalectic.

Dactylic hexameter.

4. Dactylic trimeter,
5.

with anacrusis.

Dactylic tetrameter.

6.
7.

The same

measure.

Dactylic dimeter. 8. Dactylic hexameter.

168

CHORAL SCANNING
I.

Vss. 159-166.
a.
| |

Antistrophe
1.

Ilpwra oe

KeKXd[j,e

vog

dvyd rip AZog

||

an^por"^

"A
I

ddvd,

2.
3.

yala

oxov
I

||

t' a(Jf A0
|

edv
|

'KpTEidv

a kvkXo
-^doasl
e
|

evr'

ayo
tw
| j

paf -dpovov

ev/c|

Aea
I

4.
5.

Koi
I

$ot6ov
\

Kd6oXov,
ol
| \

rplaaol a
|

Xe^tfiop

'7Tp6(l)d
\

v^rt

jttor,

6. el TTore

7. 8.

upors pdg a rdg vnepttoXu vdg opvvfie iKTonl cv (pXoya Tzrmdrog, Tjvvodr'
/cat
j

eAQere
|

/cat

wv.
II.

Vss. 167-175.

Strophe
1. "S2 TTOTTOi,
I

j3'.

2. 7TrjiJ,drd-

I'ocrei
|

dvapldp. de juoi
II ||

a yap
|

0ep(D
||

||

Trpondg

OToXog, ov6'

ert
j

j]

3. (ppovTidog

ey^o^-,
I

4. 5.
6. 7.

w
t^

Ttf
*|

a
I

Xe^sTol,

ovre yap
av^erai,
|
\

iKjovd
koIoIv
j |

kAv
I

ragII

x^^vog
Kdfxd
I

ovre to

(i)v
<5'
I

tG)v dve
\\

^ovat yv
j

valKeg
|

a/LAov
I

av dXX

ixpoald

oif, OTrep

evnTepov

opvlv,
\

8.
9.

Kpelaaov a

j-ialfiaKe
||

tov nvpog
T^eov.'
|

opfievov

dKTdv

Trpof earr

epov

1.

Iambic dimeter acatalectic.

2.
1.

Verse resembling an iambic

must pronounce

trimeter.^

that the verse

i?Eoi5 as one syllable, by synseresis, in order correspond with the last line of the antistrophe. Com" Veteres Atlici hanc vocem (i?eof) libenter pare Person, ad Orcst. 393 in sermone contraxisse videntur ; nomina enim a i?eof incipientia pronunciarunt, QovyEvidTj^, OovKvSidric," &c. " Versiim trimetro 2. Compare Hermann, ad loc. : efficiunl similcm

We

may

iambico, nisi quod

qumtus pes anap<Estus

ett."

OF THE CEDIPUS TYRANNUS.

3.

169

Dactylic dimeter, or Adonic.

Dactylic tetrameter.

4.
5.

Dactylic tetrameter, with anacrusis.

6. 7. 8.

Iambic monometer catalectic, with dactylic tetram. Iambic monometer acatalectic, with dactylic tetram.
Dactylic tetrameter. Iambic dimeter catalectic.

9.

II.

Vss. 176-184 (Leipsic ed. 179-189).

Antistrophe
1.

/3'.

o)v TToXTg
I

dvdpWn
|I

\\

og

bXk
\

vral
iredQ
||

||

2. vfiXed 3.

6e ylvlBX
I

a,

Trpog

^dvarij

(()0po)

||

KelToi dv

olKTtbg

4.
5. 6. 7.

ev
d/c

6'
I

dXo
\

xol ttoXl
|

at r'
\ |

em

pLdrepeg

rdv irdpa
\

(3(I)jii.6v

dXXodev
|

dXXal
larovd
\

XvypG)V

TTOV

11

ojv lur
\

fjpeg
|

in
|

xovolv
6[i
\

naldv
j

de Xdiirr

||

el

orovo

eaad re
|

yfjpvg

avXog'
8. U)V

vnep,
TTd
I

w XP^^^
II

^
I

''^^y^

Tp Alog,

9. fivw

7Te[j,ip

6v o/Lk
j

dv.

III.

Vss. 185-197 (Leipsic ed. 190-202).

Strophe
1.

y'.
|

''Aped
05-

T Tov
I 1

II

fxdXepov
II

2.

vvv
j

dxdXic

05- acTTT
||

idwv
j

|1

3. (pXeyel 4. 7raAia<T

jue Trept

66?]

to^"
j

avr

||

Id^
laal

wv
\

vtov
j

\\

dpdfifi
II

fid voJr

\\

irdrpag

|]

5.
6.

dnov
I

pov
I

eIt'

ef fieydv
II
\

7. slt'

'AfKpt Tplrfjg o^evov 6p[iOV If Tov arr ov kAu Jwi'a 8. QpTJKt

I

ddXdfiov

II

9. TeAfii
I

yap
\

ei

||

tI vv^
[j

d^i)
a^'
|

\\

10. tovt'

err'

Tj^idp

epx^T

170
11.

CHORAL SCANNING
Tov

w Tav
I

TTvpcl)

opiov^
\\

12.

dorpd

TTdv

Kpdr
|

fj

veil

dv Zev
\

1|

13. TTdrep

vno

reoj

cpdloov Kepavvcb.

1.

2.

Iambic dimeter brachycatalectic. Iambic dimeter acatalectic. Iambic trimeter catalectic.

Iambic trimeter acatalectic.

3. 4.
5. 6.

Iambic monometer and

cretic.

7. 8.
9.

Trochaic dimeter brachycatalectic. Dactylic trimeter, with anacrusis. Trochaic dimeter brachycatalectic. Iambic dimeter acatalectic.
Trochaic dimeter catalectic.

10.

11. Antispastic
12.
13.

monometer brachycatalectic.
dimeter.

Trochaic dimeter acatalectic.

Dochmiac

III.

Vss. 198-210 (Leipsic ed. 203-215).

Antistrophe
1.

y'.

AviceV
I

dvd^
I

||

rd re
II

ad.
| \\
\

2. ;]^pv<T0(7Tp 3. jSeAea
|

d(p(bv
\\

d'eXolfi'
||

dn' dyK vXiov dv ddd ^dr' ev

\ \

\\

ddrelad
|

al
||

4. dpu)
5.
6.

yd npoa
\

rddevr
||

d rag

1|

re ixvp

(popovg.

'Aprei^t

AvkV
rbv
I

dp

dq ^vv dig 6dg alyX id 61 doael

I

||

rpdv re kI xp^'^oiu (bvv 8. rdad' en jiov ydg

7.
I

icXtIokCo

\\

9. olvcJTT
I

d
\

Bd/c_^

II

ov ev
\

Xov

\\

10.

Malvdd

dv
\

ofi

||

oaroX
j

ov

11. TTeXdadrjvai

(pXeyovr'
ar-

1. We have adopted, in this and the two succeeding verses, the rangement of Hermann, as given by Erfurdt, ad loc.

OF THE (EDIPUS TYRANNUS.

12. *

171

*
I

oyAa

II

WTTt
| \

TxevKa

H'

13. 7rt

rov dTxorl

[lov sv deolg -dsov.

IV. Vss. 458-466 (Leipsic ed. 463-472).

Strophe 6\
1.

Tig ov

rtv a
I I

||

deanle
\

Treed
| [

AeX<pig
\

eItte
| j

Tterpd
|

2. dppfjr'

app^T

wv reAe
ddcjv
] |

oavrd

(fiolvl

aZat
|

3. 4.
5.

w
I

pa
I

I'iv

aeAA

iTT
(f)V

n(x)V
I

odevapG)

repov
fidv

ya

TToda
I

vw
|

6. fivoTrAo^-

yap
I

en'

av

\\

rov eirsvOp
6 Acog
at
\

(baKel.
\

\\

7. TTvpl Kal
8. 6eiv
I

GTepoTTalg
dp,'

\\

yeverdg

\\

at 6'
\

enovr
|
\\

9.

Kijpeg

dvdnXd

ktitoX.

1.

2.

Iambic monometer, with a logaoedic. Spondaic dimeter, with a logacedic.

Glyconic.

3. 4. 5.

The same

measure.

Glyconic catalectic, or Pherecratic.

6. Anapaestic dimeter. 7.

The same measure.

Glyconic catalectic. Trochaic dimeter brachycatalectic.

8.
9.

IV. Vss. 467-475 (Leipsic ed. 473-482).

Antistrophe
1.

6'.

eXdiMip

yap

||

rov

vt(po

evrog

dprl

(jg (pdv

etaa
1.

word of two

syllables wanting, according to

this

Hermann's arrangese-

ment.
2. The two spondees which begin mantus trochees.

measure are very probably

172
2. ^ajtta
I

CHORAL SCANNING
Hapvaoa
ov rov a
|
\

d^Aov

dvdpd

Travr'
\

3. (j)OiT

4.

vX
I

o yap vn' dyp iav av ava t' dvrp a at

I

5. Trerp

d^"
|

wf ravp
\\

og^

6. iJ-eXeog 7.

[xeXecj
I

ttoSi
\\

xW
el

vu)V
\ |

\\

rd

fiEOOjj,
I

^dXd ydg
rd
6' al
\

dTvovdocf)

t^cjv

||

8. juavT
9.

eld
I

^(bvrd

nepliro

11

rdrat.

V. Vss. 476-484 (Leipsic ed. 483-497).

Strophe
1.

e.

6elvd fiev ovv,

0erdf.

delvd rdpdao
ovr' dirocpdaK

el Gd(pog ol

wvo[

2. oi;T (Jd/coi}vr',
d'

ovd'- 6 rl
\

Xe^

dnopcj
d'
I

3. TTSTOfxal

eXmalv, ovt' evddd'

|

opuiv,

our'
|

omad
ttot*

4. Tt

ydp

?/

AdfiddKicJat^,
1

^
|

5. TGJ IIoAvfio?)

VECKog Kelr\

oi;T irdpol

0ev
|

6.

eywy' ovre rdvvv

|
I

ttw

7. ijidOov 8. eTTi
9.

Tipo^ OToi)

* * * *
|1
|

d?y
|

bdadvCi^

rdv
|

emdd
|

\\

^lov (pdrlv
|

elfi'

Ol6L7T6dd

KatddKL

dat^

erri

Kovpog

ddrj

Awv
|

T9dvdTdiv.

1.

Choriambic tetrameter.

2. 3.

4.
5.

The same measure. An anapaest, with a choriambic trimeter. An anapaest, with a choriambic monometer
Choriambic tetrameter.

hypercat.

6.
1.

Choriambic monometer hypercatalectic.

Consult Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 359, ed. Glasg. 2. A word is wanting here to complete the measure, and make the line answer to the corresponding one of the anlistrophe. Hermann suggests
;i;/3r/rj'r(/ZEi'or.

OP THE CEDIPUS TYRANNUS.

7. Anapaestic 8. Tlie

173

monometer and choriambic dimeter. same measure.

dimeter and choriambic dimeter.

9. Dactylic

V. Vss. 485-493 (Leipsic

ed.
.

498-511).

Antistrophe
1.

dAA* 6

fiev

ovv
\

2,tvq, o r' "Atto/I/L

wv
|

^vverol,

Kal ra fiporibv.
2.

eldoreg dvSp

wv
|

6' ore fidvr

Ig ttXeov

t]

ycj ^e-

perai
3. Kplolg ovK.
I

eartv dXfj
elev dvfjp\
|

drjg aocpla

6'
|

dv

od(f)idv

4. Trdpd^elil)
5.

aAA'
Idolfi'
|

ovttot'

lydy

dv nptv

opdov

sTTog,

[xeixcpo-

fievtbv

G.

av Kardcpal
\

7. (pdvepd

^v yap en av
| |

|!

rw
\\

TTTspoeoa' fidadvh)
|

^/I0e

Kopa

8. TTore /cat 9. TO)

aocpor d)(pd
jidg (ppevoc

tj,

&' FjSvTTdXlg
eel Kdaldv.
|

an' e
\

ovttot' ocpXfi

VI. Vss. 630-636 (Leipsic ed. 649-657).

Strophe
1
.

g-\
|

TTid
I

oi) t^sAt/
I

cd^- (ppovrj
||

ad^

r'
\\

drdf

Xlaaofial.

2. Ti (Toi
3.

iJeAetf

6f]r' el
|

Kddd)
\

Tov
I

ovre nplv
e(Tat.
j

vfj-nlov,

vyv
]

t' ev op/c

<j
|

fxeydv

4.
5.

KaralS

||

oiaS' oyv
I

d %p^^

II

ei?

old
\

a.

(ppd^

\\

e drj

tZ
\

(jifjg

11

6.
7.

TOV evdyr] (l>tXdv ovv d(l)dvel XoyCJ

nfinoT' ev alTtd
dTljj,dv fidXelv

1.

Cretic tetrameter, with anacrusis.

2.
3.

Iambic dimeter.
Cretic tetrameter, with anacrusis.

P2

174
4.
5.

CHORAL SCANNING
Iambic monometer.

Iambic trimeter.

6.

7.

Dochmiac dimeter. Dochmiac dimeter.

639-645 (Leipsic Strophe ^'.
i^ewv
| |

VII. Vss.

ed. 660-668).

1.

ov rov
I

TTavrCiV

-deov Trpo/iov

dXlov

2.

6 rl Trvfidrdv dOlog, dcpiXoq, civ el rdvd' s^^ 3. oXoliidv (ppovT]

ETvel
\ I

4.
5.

dXXd yd

ji'

a
I

6va[j.dp(bg^
et
\

(pdlvovad rpvx el ndK 6. Koi rdd'

\
\

|1

olt;

Kdic
|
|

d
\\

7. TTpoad-ipel rolg

-ndXal

rd upog

0(j)U)V.

1.

Ischiorrhogic iambi, with dochmius.

2.

dochmiac and

cretic

monometer.^

3. 4.
5.

Dochmiac

dimeter.

Cretic dimeter.

Dochmiac monometer
Trochaic dimeter

hypercatalectic.

6.

catalectic.

7. Antispast

and iambic monometer hypercatalectic.

VI, Vss. 655-661 (Leipsic ed. 678-686).

Antistrophe
1
.

g-'.

yv
66k

val rl [ilXX

elg ko[iI^
fj
\

elv Soficjv
II

tov6' eao)
|

2. fiddov
3.
I

od
\

y'

7]

\\

rig

rvxri|

fialg

dyv

wg Xoycjv
II

fjXde,

ddnr
|

el 6e

Kal

4.
1.

TO

nfi

'v
I

dliiov

We have

adopted Hermann's emendation,

fi'

u ^vafiopug,

in place

common reading, fioi. Sva/iSpc.), and have rejected ipv^uv, which the common text gives in the succeeding line. 2. The dochmius is here resolved into eight shctrt syllables {Seidier,
of the

de Vers. Dochm.

p. 6.3, scq.),

and the cretic into

five.

OF THE (EDIPUS TYRANNUS.

5.
6.

175
\

aju0otv

utt'
I

avT
\

\\

olv val
\

%i koX

11

rig fiv

Xoyo^ U

7.

ydg -npo-novovulvdg Eiioly' Iv avrov fievelv. evd' eXtj^ (palveral,

aXl^ dXlg
\

VII. Vss.

664-670 (Leipsic

ed. 689-697).

Antistrophe ^\
1.

'vd^

elnov
I

fiev

ovx
j

a-ad^ fiovov ladl 6e

(ppovifid

2. TTdpdfppovtf^ov,
3. 7T(pdvdal n'

dnopov dv el oe
\

em

vda(()l^oi.ial

4. ogr' [idv
5.

ydv
|

(plXdv

ovev TTOvolg dXv 6. odv Kdr' opOov ovpla

\\
\

7.

rdvvv

t' evTTOinr

6g el

dg dvval

||

o.

VIII. Vss.

836-845 (Leipsic

ed.

863-872).

Strophe
1.

77.

et

HOC

^vvel
ei)

||

?/

^sp

ovrt
|

||

2. jLiotpa
3. 'ipy
I

rav

oeTrrov dyveZ
|

dv Xoydv
ol
|

cJv T -ndv-cjv,
\ |

4. vil}iTTddeg,
5.

aWepd
|

ovpdvl divr reKvcb

11

wv v6|[i dv SV
\

npo

\\

Kelvral

eg ojv

"OXyfin

11

og

6. Trar 7. i9va

^p

jtiovof

ov
|

(5e

vlv

ra
I

(pvolg
\\

dv
|

IpcJi'

8.

erlKT

ev ov
\

de

9. jU?jv TroT

Aa
[

6d Kdrdnolii
\

dael
\

10. [leydg ev

-ov

rolg '&e6g

ovde
\
\

yfipdOK

si.
\

1.

2. Epitritic

Iambic dimeter and trochaic dimeter. dimeter and cretic monometer.

3. Epitritic

monometer, with anacrusis, and trochaic

and trochee.

dimeter brachycatalectic.
4. First paeon, dactyl
5.

Two

iambic monometers hypercatalectic.

176
6.
7.

CHORAL SCANNING
Gly conic.

The same measure.

Iambic monometer hypercatalectic. Choriambic dimeter, with a spondee.

8.
9.

10, Ionic a

minora and logacsdic, with spondaic ending.

VIII. Vss.

846-855 (Leipsic
Antistrofhe
i].

ed. 873-882).

1. vj3plg

(pvTBv

I!

el

rv
\

pdvvov
\

2. v(3pLg el ttoAA

ibv vnepTrXfjad
\

f]

fidrav

3.
4. 5.
6. 7. 8.

a
\

fi^

'mKalpd
|

nrjde
|

GvfKpep

ovrd
|

dKpordrov eladvad dnoTO fxov (b pov

\\
I

do' eg

oiv elg
6'

avdya

||

dv

evd'
I

;^;p77

ov TTodl XPV ral- to KaXOig

I

^?it^<^
\

e^ov

TToXel
I

TvdXalafi

\\

a
|

9. jU^TTore

Av
|

aai i^eov ai

TOVfxal
\

10. T9edv

oii

A^l

w
|

ttotI
|

Trpoard

rdv lax

<^^*
I

IX. Vss. 856-868 (Leipsic ed. 883-896).

Strophe
1.

&'.

el 6e
\

Tig vnep
<5
I

||

OTrra
\

2.

^ Xoy
I

TTop
\

II

eveT
rjTog,
||
|

x^P^^'^ al
|

II

3. di/c

dg d<po6

ovde
|

4. Salfiov
5.
/ta/c
I

wv
I

(5

^ aid
oIto
|

wv
j

d viv eA
| I

fiolpd
|

6.

dvoTTOTji
I

ov %a/3
|

il

iv %Ai(J

of
|

7. el
8. 9.

/^^
[

TO Kepddg

icepddv
I

et dt/c
|

ciwf

Kai
7/
I

TiovdoETTTcov

Twv ddlKTOJV
I

ep^e-al rai jttar ^e

I

ai^cJv
||

10. Tig eTt

ttot'
I

ev

\\

toIoS dv
|

7]p T?i;/i

ov 6eX
j

11. Ip^ETal xjjvx

Sf diivvelv

OP THE (EDIPUS TYRANNUS.

12. el 13. Tt

177

yap al rol
del
I

aids npa^elg
I

rl[uaZ

fJ^e

X^P

^i^';

1.

Trochaic dimeter.
Trochaic dimeter
catalectic.

2.
3.

Logaoedic, with anacrusis. 4. Trochaic dimeter catalectic.

5. 6. 7.

Logaoedic, with anacrusis.

Trochaic dimeter
Epitritic

catalectic.

monometer, with anacrusis, and trochaic

8. 9.

dimeter brachycatalectic. Epitritic monometer, with anacrusis, and cretic.

Epitritic

monometer,

Avith anacrusis,

and trochaic

dimeter brachycatalectic. 10. Iambic monometer and trochaic dimeter catalectic.

11. Epitritic dimeter. 12. Epitritic dimeter, 13. Adonic,

with

cretic.

with anacrusis.

IX. Vss. 869-881 (Leipsic ed. 897-910).

Antistrophe
1. oiiK

I?'.

er
I

rov

a, H
\\

Oiktov
|

elfu

||

2.

ydg

en'
| I

o^cpdX

ov oed
|

uv
vdov dv
[ |

3. ovd'

eg rov

"A
| ||

6alat

4. ov6e
I

Tdv

"O/L
\

vnnl
\

5. el
I

117]

rdde
|

x^^po
||

deiKrd
|

6. irdalv 7. dA/l'
I

dpiio

ael

Ppor
|

olg
(

cj

Kpdrvvcbv

elnep
|

opd' aK

ovelq

8. Tiev, 9.
I

10.

Aa^g Tdv re trdv d Odvdrdv alSv dpxdv oe, d ydp Adi ov irdX atd rd (pdlvovT
I

Travr' dvdaaibv,
\

j^

||

||

11. -Biacpdr' e^al 12. Kovddixov rl

13. Ip
I \

povalv
[xalg
|

rj6^
|

"AttoXXcjv

eficpdviig

pei

(Je

rd

deed.

178

CHORAL SCANNING

X. Vss. 1057-1067 (Leipsic ed. 1086-1097).

Strophe
1. eltrep
\
|

i.

lyd ^avTlg etjut Kal Kara yvwjtt rjv IdpTg 3. ov Tov ~0X v\nx6v an elpojv ovK eael 4. G) KWalpcJv,
||

2.

5. 6.

rdv avp
IJ,7]

tov
j

ov ae ye

ndvaeXilvdv Kal nxdrpl cDrav

\\
| I

OldXtrov
|

7. Kttt Tpofpov Kal

8. Kai 9.

nrJTsp' av^elv

x^pevFMd
I

at Trpof ^jUwv

a)?" fiTTi

^pa 0p
I

ov
I

10. 11.

ra TOtf
Z
I

Sjuoif

||

rvpdvv
col de
|

olg

Tjls

4>oi6,

ravr' dp

ear' el
\

rj.

1.

Choriambic monometer and trochaic monometer.

> Epitritic

2. ''
3.

monometer and dactylic

cretic.

tetrameter.

4. Epitritic
5. 6.

monometer and

Iambic monometer and

Dactylic tetrameter.

epitrite.

7. Epitritic dimeter.
8. 9.

The same

measure.

Dactylic dimeter hypercatalectic. 10. Iambic dimeter catalectic.

11. Logaoedic, with anacrusis

and

catalectic syllable.

X. Vss. 1068-1078 (Leipsic

ed.
c.

1098-1109).

Antistrophe
1.

Tig oe, TEKvov,

rig a' e
(bv
\

tIkte
\

||

2.
3.

Twv

dpd fidKpaloJv Ilavd^ op eaalbd rd ttov

I

} >

4. TTpdamXdadua*,

rj

ae ye

OF THE OEDIPUS TYRANNUS.

6. 6.

179

rig &vydT7]p,

Ad$tov
|

tw'
nol^-nda
|

yap

TrAa/cef

dypovo
|

at (plXal

7. eld'

Kv/lAa
BdKxsl
I

vat;

dvdaaojv

8.
9.

eW
wv
77

of ^eog val-

10. evpfifi
11. Nv//0

dKp a)v ope a de^ ar'

|| I

wv
|

e/c
|

rov
(jv
I

dv "EAt
I

/cwv?(J
I

alg

irXuard
\ \

av^-

TToi^

ei.

XI. Vss. 1155-1165 (Leipsic ed. 1186-1195).

Strophe
1.
'I
I

id.

w
V
\

ysveal

jSporoiv

2.
3.

(jjg

ndg lad Kal

\

to
\ j

[xrj-

dev

^u)
I

adq Ivdpldp,
\

w
irXeov
(j)spei

4. Ttf
5.

ydp, rig dvfip

\

rag ev
7/

6. 7.
8. 9.

TOCr
j

dalnovldg OVTOV OGOV

I

doKslv
I

Kal 66^

dvr' dnoKXl
\

val
|

TO aov
I

TOi ndpddelyii'
I

e^cjv

Tov

(Tov
I

dalfiovd,

rov
|

cov

d>

10. rXdiiOV 11. ov

I

OidtTTodd,
|

jSporuv

(Jevd ixdKdpl^

a).

Glyconic. Glyconic, with a spondee in the base. 3. Pherecratic.

2.

1.

4. Glyconic.
5. 6.

Glyconic, with a spondee in the base. Glyconic, with a trochee in the base.

7. Pherecratic.
8.
.

Glyconic, with an iambus in the base.

1 The choriambus in this line answers to the iambic syzygy in the Compare Hermann, Elem. Doclr. corresponding verse of the chorus. Metr. p. 160, ed. Lips. Id. Epic. p. 160.

180
9.

CHORAL SCANNING
Glyconic, with a spondee in the base.

10. Glyconic, with a trochee in the base. 11. Pherecratic'

XI. Vss. 1166-1176 (Leipsic ed. 1196-1203).

Antistrophe
1.
0(7
[

id.

Ttg Kad' vTvep

|

66Xdv
\ |

2. ro^ev
3. TTavr'

odg sKparrj
|

ev

dalfiovog 6X6
|

odg rov ov
|

4. 5. 6. 7.
8.

w
I

Zev, Kara [lev

yafj.ijj
I \

(pdlodg
|

TCbV

XPV^!^^
X^P9' ^ oy
I I

(bvvxd ndpO ^ov ddvdrC)v

|
|

evog
6' ifid

ag "^^pyog dveor Kal ddalXevg KaXel

\

9. tiibg,

/cat

ra neylar'

eri|

10. p-ddrjg,
11.

6^

ratf fisydXala balalv dvdoa wv.

I

Tv ev
|

XII. Vss, 1177-1187 (Leipsic ed. 1204-1212).

Strophe
1.

i/3'.

rdvvv
I

(5'

a/coi)

||

tlv,
tv,
|

rlf

d0A
|

IG)
|

|1

rspo^"
\

2. Tif ev
3.

TTOvola
[
1

11

xif
|

ralg dyp
|

lalg

^vvol

KOf aA/l
I

11

dyd
I

jSioi;
||

4. tw KXelvov
6. (0
6.

Ot(Jt

7T0V /cap

pey

df
/cat

Xlfi
H

\\

^v
ev
1|

avTO^"
I

ripKEG

7. "naWl

udrp
11

8. &dXd^fi

TToAw
I
]

Treaeiv

9. TTtJf TTore,

TToJg ttoO'
\\

at
|

ndrp
\

wat
|

a'
j

10. dXoKeg

(pepelv,
\

11. oly' edyvdoQi]

1.

rdXdg odv eg roaov

\

||

8s.

The

first

syllable of the

choriambus

is

resolved into two short.

OF THE CEDIPUS TYRANNUS.

181

1.

2.
3.

Iambic monometer hypercat. and dimeter bracli, Iambic monom. hypercat. and ischiorrbogic iambi.

Iambic dimeter.
Antispastic

4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

monom. and

trochaic

monom. hypercat.

Trochaic monometer hypercatalectic. The same measure.

The same measure.

Iambic dimeter brachycatalectic.

10.

Logaoedic. Iambic dimeter brachycatalectic. 11. Antispastic monom. and iambic monom. hypercat.

XII. Vss. 1188-1198 (Leipsic ed. 1213-1222).

Antistrophe
1.

ij3\
|

e(f)evp

e g'
\

\\

Kovd'
| \

o ndvd'
\

opuv
||

\\

xpovog
'
j

2. 3.

Mko,

diKd^W el TEKVovvr a nal

I
I

ydiiov a

ycjuov
||

TrdXaZ

||

tekvov
\

fievov.

4.

Id Adl
I I

elov
\ \

5. elds

o\ elds
e16o
I

tekvov *
juav
||

*
\\

6. ju^TTor' 7. 8.
9.

||

dvpofi

al
I
I

yap
IdKX

ojr

iTEpldXX EK arofid

li

l(^v
I

rwv to
|
\

6'
||

10. dvETTvev
I

ad

t' Ik
I

opdov asdiv
|
|

eItteIv
|

] 1

Kal KdTEKolfMTja

d rov

fiov o^fi

a.
\

XIII. Vss.

1272-1282 (Leipsic
Anaplastics.

ed.

1297-1306).

1.

d>

6eIv
I
I

6v tdelv

||

ndOog dv
Travrwv
|

dpCJnolg
||

||

2. (D 6eIv

OTdrdv
|

||

do' SyCJ
|

3. -npooEKvpa'
1.

v/tJ/J-

||

rtf a\

rXd^ibv

\\

We

have adopted Hermann's reading

in this

and the conesponding

line

of the strophe.

182
4. 7Tpoae6fj
5. iieli^ovd
I

CHORAL SCANNING
\

fidvid
6aLH<I)V

||

rig o

ttt]

Sfjadg
||

\\

\\

rC)v [xd
jiovl
||

K.lorC)V
|

6. Tcpog afi 7.

6va6al
I

||

jwlp

d
|

(pev <pev

6voTdv\
\ |

dXX' ov6'
\

(Paroemiac.) ealdelv
\\

8. dvvdfial
9.

o',
I

edeXcJv
\\

\\

iroXX' dvep

iodal
j

||

TToAAa
I

7TV

6eadal,
II

-rroXXd 6'
\

ddp

fjoal

\\

10. Toldv

(f)pT.K7]v

-ndpex^lg

jJ^ol.

(Paroemiac.)

XIV. Vss. 1283-1287 (Leipsic

Anap^estics.
1.

ed.

1307-1311).

at al,

al al,
\

\\

2.
3.

(pev, (pev-

dvord
rXd^ibv ral rdg
1

ll

vog
\\

lyd>.
\

irol
|

ydg

||

(pepoixal

ird fiol
|

(pdoyyd

||

4. dldTTlrl
5.
Id)

\\

did)
;

(I)6pdd7iv

6al[idv

tv' E^fiXXov.

XV.

Vss. 1290-1293 (Leipsic ed. 1313-1316).

Strophe
\.
Id)
\

ly'.

GKOTOV

IP
\

2. ve(()dg l[iov d-noTpoTTOV

3.

EmirXofievov dcpdrov*

dddfxdrov re nal
'
I

dvoovplarov ov

4. oijuoi.

1.

Iambic monometer

2.

Dochmiac dimeter.
of this

On the admissibihty in the first place. 1. proceleusmaticus Mctr. p. foot into anapsestic measure, consult Hermann, Eiem. Doctr.

243, ei. Glasg. " Ex mea , descnptione have adopted Hermann's arrangement. 2. clauversus uUimus constat duobus dochrmacts, quo genere versuum sape ad loc. Herm. duntur systemala, usque prcemisso procclcusmalico." the dochmiac 3. With regard to the iambic monometer preceding measure, consult Seidler, dc Vers. Dochm. p. 116, seq.

We

4. Respecting the resolution of the 63. p. bles, consult Seidler, de V.

dochmius

into eight short sylla-

5.

trochee. Regarded by some as a semantus

OP THE CEDIPUS TYRANNUS.

3.

183

The same

measure.

4.

Extra metrum.

XV.

Vss. 1297-1300 (Leipsic ed. 1321-1324).

Antistrophe
1.
tcj
j

vy' '

({)iXdg

II

2.
3.

av

iiev iiiog

emnoXog
rov
|

erl fidvifiog erX

yap

VTTOnevelg
0e{)
(f)ev.
I

fie

rvcpXdv Kfjdevcov

4.

XVI. Vss. 1305-1310 (Leipsic Strophe t6\

1.

ed.

1329-1334).

"Atto/I/Lwv Tad' rjv

"AttoA/L
\

u)v,

w
|

(ptiAoi

2.
3.

KdXd
I

rdd' sfid

reXoJv
\ |

KaKd rdd'
vlv ov
||

ifid Traded

enala
\

e 6'
I

av

||

roxip

rig

dXX
|

eycj

rXdnCiv
4. Tt
5. 6.

fi' opdv opwv TL firj dsv ^v ravO', onQg nep Kal

|

yap
I

edel

OT(x)

y'

II

rjv
\

||

Tdelv
j

yAv/cv.

||

\\

av

(j)fjg.

\\

1.

Dochmiac monometer and

ischiorrhogic iambi.

2. Ischiorrhogic
3.

iambi and dochmiac monometer.

Iambic trimeter and semantus trochee.

4.
5.

Dochmiac monometer.
Iambic trimeter. Iambic dimeter.

6.

XVII. Vss. 1311-1317 (Leipsic

ed. 1337-1343).

Strophe
1. Tt
I

le.

drJT' EfJiol
\

pXertrov
||

rj

2.

ov rj npoa Tjyop arepicrov 3. et' ear' dKov elv tjSov a <ptX

|

11

\\

ol

184
4.
5.

CHORAL SCANNING
dndytr' sicrdmov
cj
| |

otI rdxloTo,

fie

6.
7.

(plXol dndyeT' Tov KdrdpaTOTdrov

rov oXedpov fieydv

|

ert 6e Kal deolg

|

i^dpordrdv

fipoTcJv.

1.

Cretic dimeter, with anacrusis.'

2. 3.

Trochaic dimeter catalectic.

Iambic monom. hyperc. and trochaic mon. hyperc.

4.
5. 6. 7.

Dochmiac

dimeter.^

The same measure. The same measure.''

Dochmiac monometer.
'

XVI. Vss. 1320-1325 (Leipsic ed. 1349-1354). Antistrofhe td\

''

1.

oXoW
eppv
I

oorlg
\

rjv

og an'
|

dyp
|

ld<;
(i'
||

neddg

2. voiiddog 3.

EmTTod
II

lag
|

sXdte

dno re
ev elg

(povov
|

TO Kdv
|

eawa

ev ovd

x^P^^

TTpdaauiv
4.
5.

Tore ydp dv ddvibv ovK ?jv (l)tXol Giv ovd'

| II I

cjitoi

II

roaovd'
|
\\

aj^^of

Ji

6.

d^eXdyr
\

Kd

\\

fj-ol

tovt'
|

dv

ijv.

XVII. Vss. 1326-1332 (Leipsic ed. 1357-1363).

Antistrofhe
1.

le.

OVK ovv ndrpog

oi)(Je
I
II

y'

dv
\

(pov evg

2. fiXdov

vvficfu,
II

og

3. (3pdTolg

t/cA?]

0^v
ein'

wv
| |

^Ov

(ztt

||

4.
6.
1.

vvv

d'

a^eo^

juei'
d(f>'

dvoaldv 6s nalg

ofioyevfig 6'
rfe

CJv
|

avrog ecbvv rdXdg

Seidler,
7A2<i., p.

Fcr^iiu* Dochmiacis, p. 144.

loc.

2.
3.

58.

Compare Hermann, ad

OP THE CEDIPUS TYRANNUS.

6.

185

el 6e

tX npeadyrspov

e(pv
[

kukov kcLkov

7.

tovt' eXdx' OldtTrovc.

XVIII. Vss. 1490-1496 (Leipsic

ed.

1524-1530).

Trochaic Tetrameters Catalectic.

1.
0)

TTdrp

dq Qfi6 e TTovg od
I
I

\\

fjg

ev
\

oIkoI

\\

Xevaaer', kol Kpdr

0161
|

\\

2. 6g

rd
\

kXeIv' alv
I

\\

lyfidr'

rjdfj,

\\

lorog

\\

7]V

dv
|

Tjp
||

3.

oarlg

ov ^/jX

cj

ttoA
|

ltuv

\\

Kat

tvx

aig in

||

4. elg

6a
\

dv kXvS
6ev
\\

j|

ibvd
\

delvfig

|1

avfKbop

dg eA
evral

||

ffXy
5.

dare
\

-Byfirov

dvr', e

Kelv7]V

\\

ttjv

reX
j

|)

dv
6. Tj^ep
I

16
I

elv
||

dv en dv
I

laKon
|

ovvrd,

||

ju^dev

d.lfiif

||

iv

Trpiv
7. repfid
|

tov 61
wv.
I

||

oO Trep

dafj,

\\

[irj6ev

dXyelv

\\

ov

Trad

Q2

^V^^i^^^^^^W^V^^^^N#^MM*#'^^tfW ^^^'^^^>^^<*^^*>>'#'^^^<^^^^^i*W^^^*^^*>^^^i^^^^^^<^

PART

IV.

INDO-GERMANIC ANALOGIES.
^^^^^^^^rf^^^^^'*^ <#'^^^^^>^^*<^<*'rf*^^ ^ #<^*^^^^'**rf^'**'^'>^*^*^*^^^*'^ i^^r ^^ ^^^l^Nr*^^^

INDO-GERMANIC ANALOGIES.
I.

OF LANGUAGE IN GENERAL.

I. The farther comparative philology carries back its researches into the earlier periods of the history of language, the more convinced do we become that all the spoken idioms of the globe have originated from one

common may

source, and, consequently, that

all

the

members

of our race

parentage. II. The idea of a primitive language for our species, though often made a subject of ridicule by the superficial and half-learned inquirer, rests on too firm a basis to be shaken, and connects itself too closely with
the earliest traditions of our race, as recorded in the sacred writings, to
leave any doubt of
III.
its

trace their descent from one

common

truth

on the mind of the

language

philologist.
is,

What

this primitive

may have been

of course,

all

un-

and each investigator is here left to the conclusions of his own judgment. It would seem, however, that a very large portion of this early vocabulary consisted of terms which sought to imitate, by their
certainty,

sounds, the various

movements of the

natural world, such as the noise of

thunder, the roaring of the tempest, the gentle or rapid flow of waters, and the different cries of the animal creation.

IV. The simple narrative of Scripture, which represents the Deity as bringing into the presence of our first parent the numerous creatures that peopled his new domains, in order that the progenitor of our race

might give each

the

its

appropriate name,
is

is

only another

way

of stating that

germe of language

a faculty inherent in the soul,

to the various

and that the ap-

pellations given by

Adam

members
some

of the animal

kingdom

consisted simply of imitations of their peculiar cries, or of attempts to

express, in strong though inartificial terms,
structure.
striking peculiarity of

V. Following up

this idea,

we

will

come

naturally to the conclusion

that, in the ir/ancy of

our species, a close sympathy, founded on immutable laws, must have united the visible to the intellectual world, and

sympathy manifested itself in a variety of simple but expressive sounds, which, by gradual combinations and progressive
that the result of this

improvement, formed eventually the splendid

fabric of language.

190
VI. The

OF LANGUAGE IN GENERAL.
earliest

to the sensations

to e.xpress soft

spoken idiom of our race was necessarily analogous which gave it birth. Melodious sounds were employed sounds of a rough or harsh nature and gentle emotions
; ;

served to indicate what was painful or unpleasing beauty, activity, and it were, by different intonations, and strength were each depicted, as
thus each syllable

became
in

a kind of musical note, the peculiar force of

cases, able to perceive, though so

which we are

still,

many

many ages

have intervened.'
VII. To pretend to analyze, however, at the present day, all these to endeavour to accordances of the soul of man with external nature
;

shjw how each

rapid perception of form, of

affected in different

ways

the internal

movement, and of colour, sense, and was then enunciated

difficul-

by some particular sound, is a task which presents insuperable ties, and bids defiance to the most ingenious hypotheses.
VIII.

The utmost
is

that

we can
:

ascertain respecting the earlier

that primitive
all

move-

ments of language comparatively few

element of these

simply this

words must have been

;

in

number, and

of

syllables, designating as

them monosyllabic that each it did some principal object,

was soon

applied, in various combinations, to a series of other objects analogous to the first, which last served in their turn as types for new and that thus, by a progressive march, the same sounds beanalogies came applied to a multitude of things, always more and more removed
;

from each other, and the

tinually less apparent.

affiliation

of which, though real,

became con-

IX. Guided by that instinct of comparison or assimilation so inherent

in the

human mind,

nevertheless,

to the restrictive

thought, though infinite in its essence, submitted, forms of language, and yielded itself

to general laws, which arranged in the

susceptible of partial approximation.

same class all things that were Hence we see, in the most ancient

languages, and those that are nearest the infancy of our species, the ideas of height and depth, of hollowness and convexity, of light and heat, of cold and gloom, expressed by one and the same sound, as being of one

and the same

origin.

X. The rapid increase of the human family, and the corresponding increase of their relations and wants the modification of material objects
;

by the inventive

spirit

of man, and his subjugation of the domain of nait

ture, in order to adapt

more immediately

to his use, all

tended to the

gradual but sure development of what had at first been little better than and language, departing in this way the union of a few simple sounds
;

more and more from

its

monosyllabic, changed at last into what

may be

called a polysyllabic, character.

1.

Eichoff, Parallile des

Langues,

<fcc.,

p. 4, seq.

OF LANGUAGE IN GENERAL.

191

in quest of

XI. The division of the human family, by their necessary dispersion new and more distant abodes, soon brought about other and

Separated from each other by wide intervals, and intervals which great terrestrial revolumountains, rivers, seas, by tions contributed from time to time to increase, the various tribes that

more important changes.

had migrated from home wrought out each their peculiar idiom under Melodious in the temperate influences of the most opposite character. regions of the globe, languid under the fires of the tropics, strong and
rough amid the snows and ice of the north, language was employed under these different characters to depict respectively the contemplative
life

climes, and the

of the shepherd, the listless inactivity of the tenant of southern menacing cries of hardy and warlike tribes ; and, in this
at first intonations

way, what were

common

to

all,

became, under each of

these three distinct influences, as different as were the characters of the

ditferent tribes or races that

employed them.

XII.

Amid

the various

movements

of our race,

some

tribes, in re;

moving from others, more

culture.

the

common centre of

civilization, fell into

barbarism

while

fortunate, attained, in process of time, to a high degree of

Among

the former, continually agitated and divided as they

were by

intestine wars, language,

which had already begun to degenerate,

broke off into a multitude of idioms, as vague and fluctuating as they were strange and incoherent. Among civilized communities, on the
other hand, which, by reason of a fertile soil and peaceable possession,

had

it

in their

power

to lead

an intellectual
arts,

life,

and

to

make themselves

acquainted with sciences and

ished, and, extending itself

language became more and more polin a constant and uniform manner, knew no

Hence we perceive that the idioms of Europe have all a common physiognomy, whereas those of the aborigines of our own country differ almost continually in the case of
other limits save the frontiers of the race.

each petty tribe. XIII. The conclusions, then, which

wc

are authorized to

draw from
2.

a careful examination of
following:
1.

this

most interesting subject are manifestly the

language
;

There was

originally but one' single

What

are called languages are, in fact, only different dialects of this primitive tongue ; 3. The form of words varies, but their essence undergoes no
" Si se 1. comparan hoy la.s muchas lenguas que hay esparcidas por la superficie del glovo, se veri que todas eilas desciendeii de una KOla, y que guardan tal hermanda y analogia en su estruclura, qui; no seran otra co.sa que la nusma lengua priini-

" tiva variada, cambiada, enriquecida {Zama(ola.)"\\ rOsulte de cos priiicipes, que parnii les hordes les inoiiis oivillsees, il est irnpossildc d'en irouver une seule doMt le vocabulaire ne prestnte un certain nnmbre di: inots egalement usites dans les Mais les iniiumerr/: ling-um di.'<!i!miUimfF. infer se, tta vt dialecles les plusconnus nuihx mackiiiis ad com,nunem ortghiem retrahi possint,' voila ce qu'on cherchi'rait vain sur notre en globe." (Mcriaii, Principes de I'Etude coiiiparative des Langues,
'

p. 3, in notis.)

192
;

OF ROOTS.
is

change 4. The essence of words which compose these roots.

II.
I.

in the roots,

and in the elements

OF ROOTS.

In every word composed of several syllables, a single one alone of these comprises the fundamental idea of the word, and is termed the
radical syllable.

The

others are merely accessory, and serve to modify

the

meaning of the primitive one.

All roots are monosyllabic, and consist generally of three letters,

II.

a consonant, a vowel, and a consonant.

III.

"With regard to what are erroneously styled dissyllabic roots,

it

be well to bear constantly in mind the judicious observation of Ade" Every word, without exception, may be reduced to a monosyllung :'
will

and ought to be so reduced if we wish to follow the path which nature has traced out for us. If the grammarians, who laboured on the Semitic tongues, misled by a blind regard for rabbinical authority,
lable root,
still

hold to the doctrine of dissyllabic roots, this error only shows the

man towards everything complicated and intricate, at the expense of simplicity and the clearest indications of nature." IV. For example, to carry out the idea of Adelung, why are we to regard katal as a root in Hebrew, when we have in Latin cced-o, and in
proneness of

English cut ? Why call karab, galal, or marar radicals when they can be traced respectively to kar, gal, and mar 1 He who should doubt

whether the roots just mentioned be really so or not, would doubt, in like manner, whether the syllables ctxd in cmio, car in caro, cap in capio, mar
in mare, kv2. in kv/uu, eDi, in e12,u, be radicals,

and would end by with-

2 holding his assent from the clearest and most positive principles. V. similar error is sometimes committed even by those who inves-

tigate the Sanscrit language.

published by them,
stou,

we

find

Thus, in many of the elementary works such roots as bri or bhri, djna, kram, srip,

Now these are, in fact, only lengthened forms, tri, trip, trou, &c. The root of including a contracted root, or one that has lost its vowel. bri is bar, ber, &;c., and the contraction has given bri. This radical may
be traced
in the

Greek

tpep-u, the

Latin fcr-o, and the English " to bear.'^

The

root of djna is ken or gheii, the consonant

g being

pronounced

like

dj, as in

many English words

and

this root

may be

traced in the

Greek

yiv-uoKu and in the English ken. The root of kram is kar, lengthened into karam, and then contracted into kram. The root of srip is sar, ser,
&c., preserved in the Latin serp-o, the Greek
1.

'ipn-cj,

and the Latin

rep-o,

Mithridates, vol. Miriati,p.

10.

i.,

p. 301, .leq.

2.

Compare Klaproth sur

work.

les

Racines des Langues Semitiques,

appended

to Mferian's

OF ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT.

193

The root of stou is sat, sot, sout, &c., belonging to the same source. whence the Persian soutou or south-ou, and the Latin suad-co. And so,
in like manner, of the rest.'

III.
I.

OF ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT.
points of resemblance that
e.xist

The numerous

between

different

and striking, were we languages would be rendered still more apparent not often arrested in our inquiries by the change of consonants belonging
to the
II.

same

series,

and which are often employed the one

for the other.

In the European alphabets the utmost confusion prevails.

The

series of consonants is

nowhere apparent

in them,

and there

is

nothing

by which
the

we can

same organ respectively bear

perceive the relations wlrich consonants produced by to each other, and the propriety which

This propriety gives rise exists for their being mutually interchanged. to an almost infinite number of variations, to which we find it extremely
difficult to

accustom ourselves, from the irregular disposition of our own

is in this
its

alphabetic characters. III. The alphabet of the Sanscrit tongue

philosophically arranged, though
still

respect

much more
from be-

even

disposition

is far

ing perfect.

IV.

The

order in which the Sanscrit letters are arranged

is

as fol-

lows

First Series.

Long and

Second Series.

short vowels and diphthongs. Guttural consonants and their modifications.

k'h.
g.

k.

gh.

ng.

Third Series.
ding:

Palatals,

which have an analogy with the prece-

tch.

tchh.

dj.

djh.

ny.

Fourth Series. Consonants which by the name of cerebrals.^

t.

the

grammarians designate

th.

d.

dh.

n.

Fifth Series.

Dentals.
t.

th.

d.

dh.

n.

Sixth Series.

Labials.
p.

ph.

b.

bh.

m.

1.

HUrian,

p. 20, seq.

cerebrals are pronounced by turning and applying the tip of the tongue far palate, which i)ru(lucing a hollow sound, as if proceeding from the bead, is distinguished by the term murddkanya or cerebral. {Wtlkms, Sanscrit
2.

The

back against the

Grammar,

p. 8.) ^

194

OF ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT.
Seventh Series.
Semivowels.
y.
r.
1.

V.

Eighth Series.

Sibilants
ch.

and
s.

aspirates.
h. X.
if

j.

V. This arrangement would be more regular

confound themselves with these.
VI.

the sibilant and aspi-

rated consonants followed immediately after the palatals, for they often

An

alphabet rectified in this

way

will present four series of

homo-

geneous consonants, under which all those which one can imagine, and that can only be modifications of the former, easily admit of being ranged.'

Thus:
I.

II.
s.
j.

III.

IV.
r.
1.

i.
Jc'h.

n.

m
b.

g.

ch.
h.

y.

ng.
tch.
dj.
t.

p.
f.

kh.

V.

d.

VII. There exists an

affinity

between the
k, k'h,
t,

first

and second

series

by

means of
rated,

the mutual relations

which

and

and by means of those which

d, tch, dj,

have with kh or h aspibear to ch, s, and j.

VIII.
ertheless,

The

third

and fourth

series

often changes into h,

;

have fewer points of contact. Nevkh, and v ; the letters / and A are often

confounded

the v of the third and the

themselves with the vowel sounds; the liquids

y of the fourth series connect /, m, n frequently supply

each other's place

founded.

while, in

many

idioms, n, d, and r are also con-

IX. The mutual interchange of vowels

tliat it

is

of so frequent occurrence

cannot be taken
Indeed,

at all into
it

account in the comparison of languages

and

dialects.

often happens that, in the sajne idiom, the dif-

ference of vowel sounds only serves to indicate certain modifications of

the root.
First

Example.

Drawn from

the French.

J'-ai, ,tu fl-s, ils o-nt, j'-o-v-ais, j'-cw-s, j'-aw-rais.

Second Example.

Drawn from
I.

the change of vowels in the Gerp. 32.

Mtrian,

OF ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT.
man word
stein (stone),
:

195

which

in the different cognate dialects

varies as follows

German

196
same
family,

OF ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT.
what must the changes be
!

that occur in dialects belonging

this single

to difl'erent families of languages

And

remark

will serve us

as a guide in

many an intricate speculation into hnguistic aflSnities. XIII. Let us now pass to the variations of consonants, and give a few
in

examples

each of the series indicated under ^

VL

First

OF ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT.
The
interchange of

197

F and Kh
isle

exists in the difTerent dialects of Japan.

Thus, the inhabitants of the

of Sikokf say
the

Khirando
khana
khassi
khehi

for

Firando,

name

of a city.

fana,
fassi,
fch,
fisa,

the nose,

a bean,
a snake,
the knees,

khisa

khonc

fone,

a bone,
to shake. also very frequent.

khourou

fuurou,
or

The

interphange of S, H,

Kk,

is

For example,

German,
Latin,
.

salz, salt,
sal,

Breton, hal-on.

"

Old German,

hall.^

Slavonic,

serdtse, heart,
zim-a.,

German,
Greek,

hertz.

Slavonic,

winter,

x^'H-^t

Latin, hiems.

Changes

also take place

between the

sibilants
\

and gutturals.

Thus,

Armenian

sar

Hebrew
Greek
Slavonic

har

Afghan
Arintse (Siberia)

198
The
and where

OF THE AFFILIATION OP LANGUAGES.

root of the Latin fdba, " a bean,"
is

found in the Slavonic hob

cited

in the

is

French feve. put for B and

So

also

numerous instances might be

for

V.

Fourth Sekiks.
In

all languages there and R. Thus,

is

a mutual and very frequent change between

Greek

OF THE INDO-GERMANIC TONGUES.

199

lects of the parent Latin

are only, in strictness, so many corrupt diaSpanish, and Portuguese and yet, at the same time, they may be truly ;

said to possess an afEliation

IV".

among themselves.

Italian, French, Spanish, and Portuwe mean by affiliation in the case of guese, will serve to explain what As the former all sprang from one comthe Indo-Germanic tongues.

This

affiliation

between the

mon

source, the Latin, and have pursued an onward route, side by side, so the Zend, the Sanscrit, the Greek, the Latin, the German, and other

Indo-Germanic tongues, have all come from some parent tongue, nowsome of lost, and have all pursued routes side by side with each other, them attaining to an early, others to a late maturity. To quote the
graphic language of Ovid,

" Fades non omnibus una,

Nee
V.

diversa tamen, qualem decet esse sororum.'"

OF THE INDO-GERMANIC TONGUES.

I. The term Indo-Germanic is applied by philologists to the group of nations extending from India, along central Asia, and throughout the Continent of Europe.

II.

This group, more

strictly speaking, is

divided into six principal

Grceco-Roman, Slavonic, and Ccllic. III. All the languages coming under the general appellation of IndoGermanic, whether in India, Persia, or Europe, and whether considered with reference to their structure or phraseology, are originally identical ; that is to say, they are composed of the same primitive roots, which the
families, the Indian, Persian,

influence of climate, of national pronunciation, and of logical combinations, has in various degrees affected and modified.

IV. Before entering, however, more fully into the analogies between
these tongues, we will give a brief sketch of each language, in order that the points of resemblance between them may be more clearly understood.

INDIAN LANGUAGES.
I.

At

the head of these

is to

be placed the Sanscrit, the sacred idiom

source of all the languages of India. " altogether finished," from complete," "perfect," or " done " ;" and hence is equivalent to the stim, altogether," and krita,
of the Brahmins, and the name means "
Its

common

Latin confeetus.^
II.

This very name " Sanscrit"

;

is

one among many proofs of the high

antiquity of the language

1.

for if

it

state plainly point to an antecedent

p. iv.

Wilkins's Sanscrit

Grammar,

p.

l.Bopp, Vergleichende Grammatik,

200

INDIAN LANGUAGES.
when
as yet the language had not

of the tongue in question,

become
posi-

completely settled, and

tive literary

if,

as has been well ascertained, the

its

most

monuments

carry back the Sanscrit, in

actual form, to

more than
it

fifteen centuries before

our era

for

how

long a period must

have existed prior

finally

it

and changing state, before settled down into an established tongue, and became entitled
to this, in a fluctuating

to the appellation of " completely formed !"

but, upon exfifty characters powers with some degree of care, the number of simple articulations may be reduced to twenty-eight, namely, five vowels, and
III.
;

The

Sanscrit has an alphabet of

amining

their

twenty-three consonants.' IV. Sanscrit nouns are of three genders, masculine, feminine, and neuter. They have three numbers, singular, dual, and plural, and they
are declinable through eight cases in each number.^

V. The names of the cases

these will be explained

are, the

nominative, vocative, dative, ac-

cusative, ablative, locative, instrumental, and genitive.

The

force of

more

fully hereafter.

VI. The Sanscrit verb has two voices, the active and passive ; but the active voice has two forms, one with the ordinary transitive meaning, and the other with a reflexive or intransitive force, indicating that some
action
tage.
is

This

exerted on the agent himself, or for his advantage or disadvanlatter form is analogous to the middle voice in Greek.
in Sanscrit are five in

VII.
tial,

The moods

imperative, precative, and conditional.

number, the indicative, potenBesides these, there occur

in the
let,

and which corresponds

Vedas fragments of another mood, which the grammarians term to the Greek subjunctive.

VIII.
its,

The

indicative has six tenses, namely, a present, three preter-

and two futures.

The

conjugations are ten.

IX. The syntax of the Sanscrit is simple and logical, and the facility in compounding words, which the language so abundantly affords, opens one of the widest fields imaginable for the culture of poetry. Hence
poetic writing enjoyed a decided ascendency during
all

the four ages of

marked by the Vedas, was soon followed, about the time of the heroic ages, by the laws of Menu, the Pouranas, or Annals of Mythology, and the gigantic poems
Indian literature.
primitive and religious epoch,

The

of

Ramayan and Mahabharat, which

Those pretended
philologists

celebrate, the one the conquest of

1.

who

regard the

number of

alphabetical characters

in the Sanscrit as a proof oC tlie modern orijfin of the language, appear to forget that they are tliiis adducing an ar},'umen,t in favour of the very side winch they seek to opFor if tlie ajiiiellation of " Sansciit'' was only given to the tongue in question pose.
it was coniplctely formed, how many centuries must it have existed before its alphabet was vKidernized by this large increase of characters 2. Willans's Sanxnt Grammar, p. 36 and 1'21, seq. Bopp, Vergleickende Gram-

after

maiik,

p. 617, stq.

PERSIAN LANGUAGES.

201

which poems,
figures,

between two dynasties, and the authors of Ceylon, the other a contest at once bards and philosophers, appear like two majestic
after this suc-

Soon the rivals and contemporaries of Homer. ceeds the elegant and polished era, a short period antecedent to Virwhen Jayadevas produced his pastoral elegies, and Calidasas his gil, After these commenced the decline of the Sacountala. beautiful

poem

of the language, which shows

ductions. '

itself

more and more

in all

subsequent pro-

in India as the
state,

X. The Sanscrit has ceased to be a spoken tongue, and is now studied Greek and Latin are with us. Even when in a living
however, and
at the period, too, of its greatest extension, it

was

only spoken by the privileged classes.

The main body

"

of the people

natural" or that is, the sponemployed what was called the Pracrit, taneous" toncrue. This Pracrit contained the same elements as the Sanand differing in each loscrit, but under a rude and uncultivated form,
cality.

"

XI. Another language, more cultivated than the Pracrit, namely, the
Pali, and which

was spread formerly throughout the south of India, was the Brahmins adopted by the sect of the Buddhists, who, expelled by from their native land, carried beyond the Ganges into Thibet, and also
into China, their

dogmas,

traditions,

and

literature, as

preserved in their
in-

sacred books.

XII.

Of the modern

dialects of India,

which have arisen from the

various races as termingling of the ancient idiom with the languages of

brought in by conquest, we need only briefly speak. The most widely extended of these is the Hindoostanee, which, originating on the banks of the Indus, from the fusion of the Sanscrit and Arabic, has eventually
established itself throughout
India.
all

the

Mogul empire and

all

Mohammedan

Bengalee, peculiar to the banks of the Ganges and to the worshippers of Brahma, has deviated least from the primitive language The Mahratta tongue in the north of the peninsula, the of the country.

The

Tamoul and
and are
all

the isles of the

Teliiiga along the southern coasts, and the Maldivian in same name, are the most important of those that remain,

in a greater or less

degree derivatives from the Sanscrit,

or,

more conectly speaking,

the Pracrit tongue.^

PERSIAN LANGUAGES.
its primitive type the Zend, the sacred idiom of the magi, the language of Zoroaster, which, issuing from the same parent source as the Sanscrit, spread itself over the eastern part
I.

The

Persian family has for

1. Eichnff, p. 22. 2. Id. p. 23.

202

PERSIAN LANGUAGES.

of Asia, among the worshippers of the sun, and has been preserved for us in the valuable fragments that remain of the Zend-Avesta.i II. The Zend was in use among the ancient Persians, as the
Pehlvi,

another idiom intermingled with Chaldee, was spoken by the Medes and Parthians. More masculine and more concise than the Sanscrit, but less varied in their terminations, these two languages, appropriated to warlike tribes, were written in cuneiform characters before having special alphabets.

in. The theory of Rask attempts to explain the origin of the Zend

and Sanscrit by a bold and ingenious hypothesis. writer, the Scythian race had spread themselves, at
tecedent to
all

According to this remote period an-

positive history, over the

whole of Northern and Central

Asia, and had possessed themselves of India.

ever,

The

Japhetic race, how-

advanced subsequently into India from the eastern part of Persia, conquered the northern and more central parts of the former country, and drove the Scythian hordes towards the southern coasts, where the remnants of the race are. still, at the present day, distinguished by the darkness of their colour from the comparatively fairer hue of the Brahmins. Out of the Japhetic language were framed, according to Rask,
the Sanscrit and Zend.^

IV. The Zend and the Pehlvi were displaced, about the commenceera, by the Parsi, a dialect of the same family, which, after being restricted for a long period to Persia proper, where it perfected itself more and more, became eventually, under the dynasty of the Sassanides, the dominant idiom of the whole empire. It preserved itself

ment of our

pure and unaltered until the period of the Mohammedan invasion, when, from a union of the Arabic with the national idiom, arose the modern
Persian.

V. The
places
it

modem

in the

same

Persian, notwithstandmg its double origin, which relation to the Zend as that in which the

English

stands to the German,

force,
its
it

is

nevertheless distinguished by conciseness and

spirit.

and

full

of grace and poetic

The monuments
it is still

erected by

writers, the

Schahnameh
at

of Firdausi, and the Gulistan of Saadi, give

a high literary importance, and plainly

show what

able to ac-

one and the same time by Arabic and Indian roots, the terminations of which it abridges, simple and clear in its syncomplish.
tax, expressive in its

Enriched

compounds, it is with good reason regarded as the most polished language of modern Asia. VI. Around the Persian are grouped, at distances more or less re1. By the Zend-Avestaaremeanjthesacredwrilinps of the early Persians, in which the religion of Zoroaster is set forth. The work was (irat made known to Europe by Anquetil. 2. Ueber das Miter und die Echtheit der Zendsprache. Berlin, 1826.

GRiECO-ROMAN LANGUAGES.

203

in the

mote, certain rude and barbarous idioms, such as the Afghan, spoken kingdom of Caboul ; the Bdoutche, on the confines of India the
; ;

Kourde, among the mountaineers of Persia and, finally, the tongue of the Ossetes, in the range of Caucasus, which is the most remarkable of
all, as aifording indubitable traces of the great migration of Indian communities into Europe. VII. Before leaving this subject it is important to remark, that the modern Persian contains not only Sanscrit, but a large number also of

Zend roots, a fact which at once overthrows the opinion that the Zend was never a spoken language, but merely brought in as a sacred idiom
from India.

GR-CO-ROMAN LANGUAGES.
I.

The
The

Thracian, or Graeco-Roman family of languages, divides

itself

into four branches, the Phrygian, Greek, Etruscan,

II.
first

and Latin.

or Phrygian branch isthat comprising the languages,

now

were formerly spoken in Asia Minor by the Phrygians, Trojans, Lydians, and in Europe by the Thracians and Macedonians languages which now exist only in proper names (but which names are
extinct, that
:

sufficient to establish the Indian affiliation of these tongues),

and also

in

some fragments intermingled with

of Albania.
III.

the particular dialect of the Aruauts

The

second, or Greek, comprehends the Pelasgic idioms, or, in

other words, the language of that active and intelligent race which peopled Thessaly, Epirus, the coasts of Italy and Asia Minor, and the continent and islands of Greece,

Hellenes,

who gave to Europe IV. The Greek, considered

and from the bosom of which sprang the the most beautiful of its languages.
i

generally,

is

remarkable

for its

melody,

for the abundance of its inflexions, for the delicate shades of meaning marked by the tenses of the verb, for its clear and highly logical syntax, and its richness and facility in compounding. In this last-mentioned re-

fulness of its terminations, no language in the spect, as well as in the world approaches more closely to the Sanscrit than the Greek. V. The third branch is that of the Etruscans or Rhaseni, of whose

and of whose language so very little is known. As far as an opinion may be ventured, the origin of the race was a triple one, Peand Celtic, and their idiom, known only by some monulasgic, Lydian,
early history

mental inscriptions, which have never been satisfactorily elucidated, partook, in all probability, of the features of the Pelasgic, Lydian, and Celtic
1.

tongues.

The

identity of the Pelasgic

and Hellenic races

is

now

generally acknowledged

by scholars.

204
VI.

GERMAN LANGUAGES.
The
fourth branch is that of the Osci or Ausones, and of
all,

many

other, if not

of the Italian communities, the gradual blending of which with one another and with the Greek produced the Latin tongue.

This last-mentioned tongue, concise and energetic, more Indian in its substance than even the Greek, but less varied in its terminations, and
less pliant in the
it

combining of words, underwent several changes before

acquired an established character, an event which only took place about the commencement of the Christian era.

VII.

The Rustic

Latin, or the idiom spoken

by the lower orders of

the people and by the soldiers in the military colonies, and which subse-

quently became more and more altered by invasions from the north, end-

ed at last by transforming itself into various secondary idioms, which, adopted by the new conquerors of Rome, have prevailed since that period under the names of the Italian, French, Spanish, and Portuguese, throughout
all

the south of Europe.

VIII.

The Walachian,

spokeiin a corner of Turkey in Europe,

may

also be regarded as a fragment of the Latin, which, by its admixture with

the Slavonic, has

sents to the view but

interest.'

assumed a form quite peculiar to itself, but which prelittle culture, and possesses, therefore, but little

GERMAN LANGUAGES.
I.

The German

race, spread over the

whole of Northern Europe, ap-

pears to have been divided originally into several large tribes, the spoken idioms of which constitute five great branches, the Teutonic, Saxon,

Anglo-Saxon, Norman, and Gothic.

II. The first of these, comprising the nations of Southern Germany, produced the High-German, the monuments of which can be traced back to the eighth century of our era, and which was spoken .at the courts of

the Franc and

Saxon kings,

until

it

was superseded

at the

former by the

tongue, and at the latter by the Allemannic, which last was the poetic idiom of the Minnesingers and of the Nibelungenlied. At last, from the impulse given by the writings of Luther, in the sixteenth

Romance

modern German, so conspicuous as a rich, picturesque, and energetic tongue. If this language has lost that variety of terminations which once brought it into so close an approximation with the
century, arose the
Sanscrit, if its conjugation is too restricted, and its periods are too complicated, it has, at the same time, however, an incontestable advantage over all modern tongues in the exact derivation of its words, in their almost unhmited composition, and, above all, in the tone-

Greek and the

I.

Molnar, Walachisclie Sprachlekre, Wien., 1788.

SLAVONIC LANGUAGES.

205

accent, which, resting invariably on each radical syllable, imparts to the German an intellectual type, which no other idiom possesses to the same

degree.
III. The second branch, that of Western Germany, comprises the old Low-German or Saxon, from which has arisen the patois at present prethe Prison, which is now extinct, on vailing along the German borders,

the borders of Holland, and the Nethcrland, which, remaining in an uncultivated state in the Flemish dialect, has, on the other hand,
in

become
in

Holland a national and

IV.

literary idiom.

The

third branch, a mixture of almost all the rest,

was formed

England by the union of the Saxons, the Jutes, and the Angles, to whom were added, at a subsequent period, the Danes. Thus arose the AngloSaxon, the earliest monuments of which date from the eighth century of
our era, and which language, about three centuries later, combining in its turn with the old French brought in by the Norman conquest, gave
birth to the English tongue.

V. The fourth branch,

birth to the Old

that of Northern

Germany

or Scandinavia, gave

the sacred language of the Edda, superseded afterward by the Norwegian or Icelandic, in which the Scalds composed This last-mentioned idiom also fell into disuse about the their sacTas. O fifth century of our era, and from it arose the Swedish and Danish, two

Norman,

regularity of the
their

which to the force and languages intimately connected with each other, German add a peculiar clearness and conciseness of
VI.

own, and the culture of which is far from being neglected. The fifth branch, formed from the conquering nations which covall

ered Eastern Germany, but the dialects of

is

of

whom

are

now

extinct,

known

to us

are preserved

merely by the Masso-Gothic, some fragments of which This precious monument of the in the Bible of Ulphilas.

fourth century, the

most ancient

that

remains to us of the

German

idi-

oms, displays to us, in its rich grammatical forms, the common bond that united these idioms to one another, and shows, at the same time, the
allihation,

no

less intimate

and

real,

which connects them

all

with the

Latin, the Greek, and the Sanscrit.

SLAVONIC LANGUAGES.
Slavonic family, which occupies the eastern part of Europe, divides itself into but three branches, which may be denominated the
I.

The

Servian, Tchekhe, and Letton.

II.

The

first

of these comprehends the eastern Slavi,

whose language
of the ninth

was

the old Slavonic, employed, about the

commencement

who was also the inventor of their alcentury, in the writings of Cyrill, This old Slavonic has given birth to several dialects, still used phabet.

206
in Illyria

CELTIC LANGUAGES.
and Servia, but it has become an ecclesiastical and dead lanwhere it has been superseded, in all the ordinary relaby the Russia7i, which only
little

guage

in Russia,
life,

tions of

differs

from

it,

however, in

some small degree. III. The Russian language, but

the abundance of
its roots,

known beyond
its

the precincts of
in

that empire, yields not, however, either to the

Greek or the German

the regularity of

derivations, or the happy

in sweetness and harmony.

combination of words, while, on the other hand, it surpasses the latter Around the Russian are grouped, with a
striking analogy, the Servian, Croatian,

and Winde, spoken by the Slavi

of the Turkish and Austrian provinces. IV. The second branch, that of the western Slavi, comprehends the

Bohemian, formerly a cultivated tongue, and of which the Slovaque, in Hungary, is a rude dialect, the Polish, the Wi7ide, and the Sorabian, the

two

latter of

which remain

still

in

an uncultivated

state.

V. The
two, which

third branch, very different in its character from, the other

it

in all probability preceded, is that of the central Slavi,

is

whose

primitive idiom, the Pruc'ze,

now

entirely extinct.

The

Lith-

uanian, however, and the Lelton, spoken at the present day in Lithuania

and Courland,

still

offer to the consideration of the philologist the

most

Slavonic dialects, whose interesting subjects of comparison with the other elementary forms they reveal to our view, as well as with the Sanscrit^

with which they appear immediately connected.

CELTIC LANGUAGES.
I.

This ancient family, which

first

we have

reserved for the end of the

list,

as having been the

removed from
lic

its

was separated, and, consequently, the farthest Asiatic source, is divided iuto two branches, the Gaethat

and Cymric.
II.

The

Gaelic branch, that of the pure Celts,

who

fled to the north-

ern part of England and to Ireland, is marked by frequent aspirations, by a scarcity of terminations, and by the monotony of its combinations,

which leads

to the supposition that there

were

earlier flexions than those

which have reachi^d

us.

This language, after having attained to a constill

siderable degree of culture,

Irish

exists, in

some obscure degree,

in the

and the mountaineer-Scotch.

III.

period by the
tions
It

The Cymric branch, that of the Celto-Belgae, known at a later name of Bretons, is remarkable for its moveable articulaits

and

close affinity to the

Latm, the

result of the

Roman

sway.

remains

land,

two popular and the Bas-Brcton

in

dialects at the present day, the

or Brei/zad in France.

Welsh in Eng-

INDO-GERMANIC ANALOGIES.
Such

207

are the languages that compose the Indo- Germanic group, and an examination of the analogies between which we will now devote have omitted, in the enumeration the remainder of this volume.
to

We

above given, the Basque tongue, spoken in the southwestern part of EuThe reason is, because in the northeast. rope, and the Finnish dialects
that of all the languages they present a physiognomy too different from the same we have just been considering to admit of their being ranked be observed, however, that the Finnish dialects It class with them.

may have borrowed many words from

the

German and

Slavonic, while the

of conBasque, notwithstanding its African origm, displays many points tact with the Celtic and Latin.'

VI.
I.

INDO-GERMANIG ANALOGIES.

In conducting the present inquiry, we will first turn our attention to the interchanoe of sounds, consonants as well as vowels, traceable in

words etymologically corresponding to each other European and Oriental sister tongues.
II.
It is

in the Sanscrit

and

its

in highly probable that,

all

vowels languages, only the simple

all other vowels arose out of these a, i, and u primarily existed, and that three elementary sounds by mixture, or, in some instances, by their mu-

tual influence

word and
III.

in

when placed in close proximity to each other in the successive syllables.'^

same

distinct characters
in the

In Sanscrit, the short vowels a, i, and u only are represented by and if we consider the extreme accuracy with which,
;

Devanagari alphabet,

all

the varying articulations of the

human

voice are expressed,

we

are driven at once to the conclusion that, in the

to fix the various sounds and comage when that alphabet was invented binations of sounds occurring in the Sanscrit language, the latter pos^ sessed no other short vowels but these.

IV.
idioms
ilar to

It is

even remarked by a recent

current in India, he never
c

writer,'' that, in the

vernacular

now

was

able to detect any sounds sim-

the Italian short

and

o in the pronunciation of natives

from

all

the different provinces of India. V. In the Gothic, the short e and o are in like the short

manner wanting, and

German

Thus, (or faltJia, Gothic giba, the corresponding form

1.

corresponds to in Gothic, we have

e

a,

i,

in

and u of the former tongue. German {icli) falte ; and for the
is

in

German

(ich) gebc.

2. 3.

Eir.hnf.p. 24, seq. Pott, Ely molugische For!chungen,\<.

Pott,
I.

1.

c Journal

of Education, No. 20,

p.

ZW.Bopp, Vergleichende Gram-

malik. 4. Colonel Vans Kennedy, Researches, &.c., p. 243.

p. 3.

208

SANSCRIT AND TEUTONIC.

SANSCRIT AND TEUTONIC.

'

1.
I.

Vowel-changes.
o,

For the Sanscrit long a the Gothic has almost always long
this latter tongue.

the

long a being entirely wanting in

In contractions,

Sometimes, in Gothic, long e is however, this long o becomes short a. found to correspond to the Sanscrit long a, as, for example, in the genitive plural of the masculine and neuter.
II.

For

and

in Sanscrit, the

Gothic has

and

ei,

which

last is ev-

erywhere equivalent to l, and in the old High-German appears as such. In the modern German this old I is most commonly changed to ei. Thus,

mein

in

German, mei?ia

the Gothic genitive,

t

min

in old

High-German.

III.

As

a general rule, the

as a final vowel disappears entirely in

Tlius,

German, and most commonly

Sanscrit.

in Latin.

SANSCRIT AND TEUTONIC.

Gothic.

209

210
shouna,

SANSCRIT AND TEUTONIC.

SANSCRIT AND GREEK.

frijo

211
prinami.

("

I love"),

dfrindmi,^
dfs,

ahva?

(" river"),

ap

(root).

V. Frequently, however, we have flections, or grammatical additions, which do not obey the laws regulating the interchange of consonants,
but remain true to the primitive sound.
tains the original
t

Thus, the old High-German

re-

person singular and plural ; as, for ex" they have ;" with which compare ample, hapet, "he has," and hapent, The Gothic, on the other hand, has hahaith the Latin habet and habcnt.
in the third

and Jiaband.

sive voice, the old

So, also, in the participle present, and in that of the pasHigh-German adheres to the t, as hapenter, hapeter, whereas the Gothic, under the influence of the n that precedes, brings
in the d
;

as,

halands, gen. habandins

habaith, gen. habaidis.

SANSCRIT AND GREEK.^

1.
I.

Vowel-changes.
u, in Sanscrit, generally correspond to the

The
a,

short vowels a,
i,

1,

Greek

v.

The Greek language has seldom

;

substituted these three

e

vowels one

for another

but

its

two short vowels,

and

o,

have each their

fol-

The share of the province which in Sanscrit is left to the a solely. some tlus subject. to tluow serve upon light may lowing examples
I.

Sanscrit a corresponding to a in Greek.

1.

In

roots.

Sanscrit.
labh
(" to take"), (" to bite"),

das

dam
tan

(" to tame"),

("to extend"),
(" to kill"),

han apa

asm
sata

" from"), (" oflf," (" a tear"),

(" a hundred"),
(negative prefix),
2. a-.
suffixes,

In terminations,

&c.

as, the termination of the accusative case of the plural

number of

masculine words, the crude forms of wh'ch end

sponding to the Greek af
"
I ble.ss,"

in

a consonant, corre-

in Xiovr-ar,

&c.

from the Sanscrit root pri, " to love," with the preposition a prefixed. 1. " 2. The Zend afs and Sanscrit ap denote water," and the Gothic form is explained the by frequent change of p into k, (or which tlie law that regulates the inlercliange of consonants requires h. Compare the Latin aqua. 3. Pott, Elymol. Forsch. p. \80. Journal of Education,'No. 20, f.Zi2,seq.,vi\ieto an able abstract is given by Rosen of part of the German work.

212
man
is in

SANSCRIT AND GREEK.

Sanscrit the termination of a

number of

substantives, de-

rived from verbal roots, and generally denoting the result of the

" birth," as, ganman (nom. ganma), " " to produce ;" karman (nom. to beget," from the root gan, " a " an deed," whether good or evil, from the action," karma),
action implied by the verb
;

root krl, " to do."

fix -/la,

To
;

this termination

corresponds the Greek suf-

from opuu,
bind,"

" "a anything seen," spectacle," gen. -fia-oc as in opa/ia, " to "a " to see and tie," from 6eu, ;" d?//xa 6^fia,

" to tie," &c.

an

is

in Sanscrit the termination of the

crude form of the numer-

als for five, seven, -eight, nine,

and

ten,

panchan, saptan, ashtan,

navan, dasan.
the final
tained the
7i,

The corresponding Greek numerals have dropped

a,

and three of them, iTrrd, kvvea, and de/ca, have rewhile irevTc and o/crw' have kept it only when placed
;

in composition before other parts of speech

fj-Tjvog,

as, 6/craeT7?f, okto.-

TtevTaiTTjg, TrevTumjxvCt <5lC.

II.

Sanscrit a corresponding to in Greek.

1.

In

roots.

Sanscrit.
pat
po.ck

Greek.

(" to fall"),
(" to cook"), (" to eat"),

nET,

ad
tap taksh

(" to be hot"), (" to build"),

(" near"), (" around"),

abhi

pari

aham
kyas

(" I "),

("yesterday"),
2.

In terminations, &c.

a, the

augment of several forms of the preterit tense in Sanscrit,

e.

has in Greek become

as in Sanscrit
plural
is

the termination of the nominative case in the

substantives, the crude form of

number of

which ends

in a

consonant, corresponding to the Greek -eg in Movr-sg, &c.

III.

Sanscrit a correspondmg to the

1.

Greek

o.

In

roots,

&c.

Sanscrit.
sad
(" to go"),
(" to go"),

Greek.

OA,

66-6g.
'!To6-6g.

pad

nOA, TTOvg,

SANSCRIT AND GREEK,

pati

213
7r6ff(f.

("master," "husband"),
(" house"),

dama
pra,prati,

dofiog.
T^po,

npSc, izpori.
in composition.

sama
sah

(" alike,"
(" he"),
2.

" the same"),

6/zo,

o,

of (for ovrog, ode).

In terminations, &c.

as

is

in Sanscrit the termination of the genitive case singular of

substantives, the crude forms of

wluch end

in a consonant, cor-

a,

responding to the Greek of in 7iovt-oq, &c. as the termination of the crude forms of a large number of Sanscrit

nouns (substantives, adjectives,

participles), corresponds, in
;

the majority of instances, to o in Greek "a tTTTTOf ; vrika, wolf," Tlvkoc, &c.

as, asva,

"a horse,"

IV.

The

instances of words in wliich a Greek

are few in number.
:

Sanscrit

The

i corresponds to a in following are some of the

principal ones

Sanscrit.
pat,

Greek.
niT,
n-iTVG).
"
.

khara
as,

(" an ass"),

/cj^Xof.

la-dc.

was,

ia-ria, Ionic la-Tirj.

2. Consonant-changes.
1.

Gutturals.

Greek generally correspond to I. The guttural letters in Sanscrit and each other. Thus, in the case of the Sanscrit k, we have the root At?,
" to " to do," and in Greek Kpaivu, accomplish," with which

may be

compared the Latin

(Alexandrian
Gr. KVjiCog, &c.
II.

creare.
;

So, also, kapdla, "the head," Gr. Ke(pah/

/cefiaA?/)

kapi,

"an

ape," Gr.

kijtvoq

kumba, "a vase,"

Sometimes the
;

Sanscrit

as,

fjSr],

or z sound in guttural in Greek corresponds to a y Sanscrit root yar (compare the Latin juv-enis), where,
;

and rinap, gen. rjwar-og, moreover, the v sound has passed into a /3 where the Sanscrit has yakrit and the Latin jecur. The old form of jecur is thought to have been jecurt^ {jecurit), which would supply the
link.

III.
1.

Sometimes the Sanscrit k changes

;

to a

tt

in Greek.
;

Thus we

Instances are found also in Gothic thus, sibun (S. saptan) vari) ; Jimf {ii. pantsch) ; kiiimis{S. hanu) ; &c. 2. Pott, Etymol. Vorsch. vol. i., p. 113; vol. ii., p. 290, 609.

Jidvor (S. tshat-

214
have in Sanscrit,

SANSCRIT AND GREEK.

in the case of the interrogativ&

pronouns and

particles,

kas, ka, kim, &c., and in

whence come
is

tvov,

Greek the pronominal roots 1102, IIH, It is worthy of remark, Kodev, -nOTEpoc, &c.

HON,
that k

used

for

tt,

however, not only

in Ionic, as kov, koOev, Korepoc, &c.,

but also in JHolic Greek, the oldest of the dialects, and more extensively,
too, in this than in Ionic'

The

Latin gu, equivalent to

k,

may

also

be

compared with
IV.

this.

The consonants ksh

;

in Sanscrit

.^olians say kg) " the right," Gr.

as,

aksha,

answer to ^ in Greek (where the " a daksha, chariot," Gr. u^-uv {axis)
;

c5ef-idf.

Sometimes, however, the k

;

KTlvvvfii,;

Greek, but the sh changes into a r as, " a with which riksha, bear," Gr. apKTOQ
;

preserved in " to ksliinomi, destroy," Gr.

is

may be compared

vakshas,

" a breast," in Latin pect-us.

2.

Palatals.
cJi

I.

The

palatal consonants in Sanscrit are

and

_;',

and

their respect-

ive aspirates chh and jh.

Neither of these sounds seems to have exist-

ed in Greek or Latin, and, accordingly, we must expect to tind their places occupied by different letters in such words as are common to either of these languages with the Sanscrit. Ch has often passed over
in Latin into q, and in

Greek

into

or

r.

Thus,

Sanscrit.
chatur

Latin quatuor, Gr. Tscrcrapeg, JEol. mcvpeg. " quinque, Gr. nevTS, iTi/XTTe " Gr.
voco,

FfTTOf.

" "
"

coquo, Gr. iziiiTu.

que, Gr. re.
J)OSt.

3.
I.

Deyitals.

The

letters of the dental class, the

common

and

d,

with their asfor the

pirates,

and

n, are very extensively

used
in

in Sanscrit,

and have,

most
be

been preserved unchanged the Greek and Latin with the Sanscrit.
part,
cited.

such words as are

common

to

Thus, among others that might

SANSCRIT AND GREEK.

II.

215

In some instances, the Sanscrit

in Latin.

has become a in Greek, but re-

mains unchanged
Sanscrit.

Thus,

tuam

(" thou"),

Gr. ov, Dor. and "

^ol.

tv, Latin tu.

chalur ("four"),
pat

Gr. reaffapsg, Latin quatuor.

(" master,"

husband"),

Gr. Tcoaig, Latin polcns.

III.

The

instances where d has been kept unchanged are very frequent.

The

following are a few of the

S.4.NSCRIT.

number

ad

(" to eat")
(" to subdue"),

Greek
"

e6u, Latin edo.

Safiuu, Latin domare.
Ai2, dldujiL, Latin do.
daiofxat,

dam
da
da
sad
IV.

(" to give"),
(" to cut"), (" to sit"),

" "

whence

6a'i(.

"

'EA,

e^ofiai,

Latin sedere.

The number
may

served unaltered in
following

all

of words with n, which letter has generally been preThe the cognate languages, is also considerable.
:

serve as specimens

S.\NSCKIT.

man
nri
7iau

(" to think"), (" a man"),

Greek
"
"

MEN,
uvrip.

fiefiova,

Latin memini.

("a

ship"),

vavg,lu2Lt'm navis.

nas

(" to die"),
II.

Latin nccare, ncx, Gr.

NEK,

veKpoc,

&c.

GRAMMATICAL ANALOGIES.l
I.

Ground-form.

I.

The

inative is
this

Sanscrit settles the long-contested question whether the nomIn a case, or only the form from which cases are derived.

the nominative, and from which the noihinative itself

language there exists a theme or ground-form entirely distinct from is formed by add-

ing a distinctive termination. II. Before we proceed to describe the manner in which the respective cases are formed,
it

will

be important

to

make some

general remarks on

the end-vowels which connect the case-suffixes with these ground-forms

in different words,

and on the points of resemblance or difference,

in this

respect,
III.

between the Sanscrit and the other Indo-Germanic tongues.

three ground-vowels a,
i,

The

u, appear in Sanscrit, as well short

The short a is alas long, at the end of the ground-forms of words. ways either masculine or neuter, never feminine, and we find a corresponding a in Zend and Lithuanian.
1.

In the

German

dialects,

however,

Bopp, Vergleickeiide Grammatik,

p. 133, seq.

216
even in the Gothic,
lects is superseded
(2.6yo-(:)

SANSCRIT AND GREEK.

this

by m or
this

a very seldom appears, and in the younger diac In Greek, the o of the second declension

answers to

same

a, as

was

also the case in the early Latin,

where they said domino-s in the nominative for dominu-s.^ IV. The Greek masculines of the first declension in a-f, together
the form in
??-f,

w^ith

proceeding from them, point at once to the connexion between themselves and the Sanscrit masculine a, while, on the other
hand, their identity with the o-stem is shown by the termination ov in the genitive. So, too, in the compounds ixvponukrj-^, nat.6oTpL6r]-g, the vowel 7] appended to the roots Ili^A and TPIB takes the place of the
Sanscrit a in similar compounds, where in
appears.

Greek the o-sound generally

V. The short
in the other

i,

which

is

Indo-Germanic tongues.

of three genders, answers to the same vowel In Latin, however, this i is some-

times interchanged with

we may compare
i is

e ; as, facile for fadli, mare for mari, where the Sanscrit root vdri, " water." In Greek, this same

weakened, for the most part, before another vowel, into s. VI. The short it also appears in Sanscrit in the three genders, like

the

Greek v and the Gothic

u.

To

this

corresponds the Latin u of the

Sanscrit mostly to the femi-

fourth declension.

VII.

The
a

long vowels

a,

i,

u belong

in

nine, never to the neuter, very seldom to the masculine.

In Zend, the

shortened in polysyllables. So, also, in Gothic, where the Sanscrit feminine stem in a long changes to o long, this o becomes

long

final

is

short a in flectionless nominatives and accusatives singular.

The Latin

also has shortened the old feminine long a in flectionless nominatives

and accusatives, while the Lithuanian, on the other hand, preserves the
a in the nominative lono-.

VIII.
teristic

The long i appears most frequently in Sanscrit as the characaddition for forming the feminine stem. Thus, from mahat

Zend.

The same thing occurs in (" magnus") comes mahati (" magna"). The Lithuanian, however, has preserved this i as a feminine
is

characteristic in the truest manner, for in this language an i the old participle-sufEx aiit ; and thus we have csanl-i (" she

added

to

lu-sent-i (" she about to be").

i

being") and In Greek and Latin this long feminine

generally disappears, or else,

also find, at the

same

time,

when traces of it happen to be found, we some letter added as a kind of support for

the case-ending. This addition is in Greek an a or d, in Latin a c. Thus, the Greek ?;Je(a corresponds to the Sanscrit svadv-i, from svadu,

"sweet."

And

so also in Greek, -Tpta and -rpid in opxTjarpLa, and

1.

Struve, uber die Lat. Declin.

p. 11.

SANSCRIT AND GREEK.

IrjOTpii, 7i.rjaTpL6og,
itri,

217
-tri in

answer the same purpose as the Sanscrit

gan-

which

last

again corresponds to the Latin forms genetri-c-s, gen.

geniiri-c-is.

syllable back,

IX. In such Greek forms as -yevETsipa the feminine i is removed one and the same analogy prevails in fiD'Miva, TuAaiva, ripsi,-

va, &c., and also in such substantive forms as Tinraiva, -depdnaiva,

?i.eaiva.

The

instances in Greek where the feminine

limit themselves to feminines

(7,

and the v

is

i is supplied by a, from forms in vt, where the t changes to transformed into an v or i, or else its place is supphed

by the lengthening of the preceding vowel.

ovcr-a,
ELff-a,

Thus,
ua-a,
avr-a,
va-a, vvr-a.

Eaa-a,
evT-a,

for ovT-a,

EVT-a,

X. The long u appears in Sanscrit very seldom at the end of groundThe most usual terms with this are forms, and is mostly feminine. " a mother-in-law " earth " a wife ;" hhru, ;" svasrii, vadhu, ;" bhu,
" the eyebrow."
the genitive.

To

this last

corresponds the Greek b(ppvg, which has

also a long v in the termination of the nominative, though the short v in

e,

XI. Very few ground-forms in Sanscrit end in a diphthong. None in and only one in ai, namely, rai, " a thing," " wealth," which in the
for rai-s,

nominative makes rd-s

Latin
res.

and

is

evidently the

same with the

XII. Ground-forms in o are seldom found in Sanscrit. The only two In the former of these thus far ascertained are dyo, " heaven," and go. the 6 changes into a in the accusative as, dya-m, with which we may
;

compare the Latin accusative diem. The latter, namely, go, has sev"a eral significations, the most common of which are, in the masculine, " a " steer," in the feminine, cow," and also the earth." For the last of
" meaning of
these significations the Greek employs the form yij or yd, but for the " cow," &c., it brings in the diphthong ov, and bull,"

changes the old guttural

letter into the

cognate labial

(3,

forming in

this

way

(Sovg.^

most remarkable
to

The XIII. Ground-forms in au are also few in number in Sanscrit. " a is nau, ship," with which we immediately compare

the Greek vavc and the Latin navis.

This Sanscrit root nau is thought have been originally snau, from sna, " to bathe," and which probably " to swim," with which, in this sense, we may comsignified at first also

The digammated form pare the Latin na-lo and the Greek vu-u, ve-u. vaFeg may easily be assimilated to the Sanscrit nav-as. In the Latin a
foreign appendage presents itself; as, navis, navi-bus, for nau-s, nau1.

Bopp, Vergleichcnde Grammatik, p. 146.

218
bus.

SANSCRIT AND GREEK.

As
for

the half vowel v easily hardens into a guttural,

we

find a sister

form

nav, nav-am, in the

German

nach-en,

" a wherry," which in old

High-German is nacch-o. XIV. We now pass to

the consonants.

Of

these, n,

t,

s,

and r most

All the other frequently appear in Sanscrit at the end of ground-forms. consonants are found only at the end of radical words that are of rare

occurrence, and appended to certain verbal stems whose origin

clearly established.

is

not

the gutturals, again, namely, k, kh, g, gh, we find none at the end of the more familiar verbal stems, whereas in Greek

Of

and Latin they are of frequent occurrence, as iPIK, KOPAK, <I>AOr, ONTX, DUG, VORAC, EDAC, LEG, &c. The d seldom appears in
Sanscrit ground-forms
rence.
ful,
;

the

t,

The Greek,

besides

r,

on the contrary, is of very frequent occurshows also 6 and &. must be care-

We

however, not to regard such words as K0PT9 and OPNI0 in the In the former of these the G is part of the root light of simple roots.

GH or
In the
galee

GE, and
latter
orojii,

from

-deu,

forest," whence the Greek opvi, which, with G added " to run" or " move swiftly," indicates a creature that flies

case " a

the term denotes originally something placed on ihe head. we trace the etymology to the Sanscrit arani, in Ben-

swiftly through the woods,

XV. Ground-forms
last

no unapt designation, certainly, of a bird. ending with a labial, the nasal being included

in this class, appear in Sanscrit only in the case of

naked

roots, as the

of a compound, and even here not very often. have, " however, as an isolated root, the term ap, water," whence the Latin

member

We

aqua, the
can,

p being changed
river,"

into qu, as in quinque,

"

from the Sanscrit pan-

five,"

Latin am-nis,

and a vowel being added. From " a like somnus for

'5

this

same ap comes the

XVI. Of

the Sanscrit sibilants, the

sopnus, and aefivoQ for aeBvog. and sh appear only at the end
s,

of radicals, and therefore but seldom.

The

on the contrary, becomes

;

a closing letter for a very usual suffix in the forming of words as, for example, in as, which is employed in the formation of neuter nouns.

The Greek
sibilant in

apparently
is

is

without any root in

but, the truth

is,

this

rejected between two vowels, especially in the last syllable, and therefore neuters like fxevog and yevo^ (from

Greek

commonly

MENE2

and

PENES,

the e being changed to 0) form the genitive /nsv-

0f and yiveog, for fihscog and yivEaog.

II.
I.

Individual Cases.

Sanscrit cases, as has already been mentioned, are eight in number, namely, the nominative, vocative, dative, accusative, ablative,
locative, instrumental,
II.

The

and genitive.
its

The

locative refers not only to place, as

name

imports, but also

NOMINATIVE.

219

to the point of time conceived as space, and to the state, condition, or circumstances made up of time and place.
III.

The
is

instrumental case indicates the instrument or means by which

done, and, under the general idea expressed by this latter means," are included the individual ideas of the accompanying or amount effected. person, the member or part affected, and the quantity

anything term "

IV.

The

genitive

is

placed

last,

as

it is

a case per se, standing in the

to the verb, and, although usages and acceptations.

same

relation to the

noun as the other cases do

all

a single case, imbodying

their different

Hence

Latin, and

the wide range given to the genitive in the Sanscrit, Greek, German ; and hence, also, this same case has been styled the

adnominal, since it is properly used with the noun, while the other cases have been termed adverbial, from their relation to the verb.
Nomi7ialive.

nominative singular in Sanscrit masculine and feminine stems that terminate in a vowel is s, and the origin of this may " this one." Thus we " have, be traced to the pronominal stem sa, he,"
I.

The

suffix of the

among

masculines,
vrika-s
pati-s

(stem vrika),
(stem pali),

" a wolf."
" a lord" or " husband."

kawi-s

(stem kawi),
:

"a poet."

And among

feminines the following

priti-s

(stem

prili),

tanu-s

(stem tanu),

" love." " a body."

ndu-s
II.

(stem naw),

"a
a,

ship."
u,

In Zend, this

s, if

preceded by

changes into

and then the a

and u are blended into

fore sonant
letters.

The same happens in Sanscrit, but only beThus, in Zend we have vehrko (from vekrka-u,
6.

stem vchrka),
scrit,

sulo

mama,

" " a So in Santhis," for ka-u (stem ka). wolf," and ko, son." but sula-s from suta-u lava, ; son," "thy "my
in

III.

This nominative sufRx s appears also

Thus,

Greek, Latin, Lithuanian,

;

and Gothic.
pccu-s, voc-s,

Xviio-c, Koai-g, ttItv-c, oTT-g, eko-c

lupus,

hosti-s,

opus ;

Lithuanian, wilkas, pati-s,

sunus ;

Gothic, vulf's,

gasfs, sunus, &c. IV. The Gothic, however, suppresses a and i before the s, except in would be impracticable. monosyllabic words, where such suppression " he " who ;" but vulfs, gast's, for vulfas, ;" is, Thus, it says hvas, MascuUne stems in ja must be excepted from this rule, since

gastis}
1.

Gothic

to Cicero, wasj also

The term gasti-s means " a stranger," whence the English " guesl." With the which, according we may compare the Latin hnsti.a, in its original acceptation, " "
a stranger."

Thus, he remarks,

Hoslis enim apud majores

220

NOMINATIVE.
it

they retain the vowel at the end*only softening

to i

as, harji-s,

" an

army."
andei-s,

If,

however, what

is

frequently the case, a long vowel or

final

more
as,

than one syllable precede the " the end

syllable, then ji

changes to ei;

;" raginci-s,

" advice."

V. In others of the Teutonic dialects the nominative-ending s has " this " he " who ;" de-r, ;'' hue-r, ;" passed into r ; as. Old German, i-r, " blind." Old Norse, ulf-r, " a wolf ;" son-r, " a son ;" blind-r, plmte-r, " blind." German, er, der, wer, hlinde-r. Swedish and Danish, blind-r. In the rest of the Teutonic dialects the nominative-characteristic is lost.
VI. If the ground-form
in Sanscrit
;

end

in a

consonant, the s

is

omit-

ted in masculines and feminines

and when two consonants close the

ground-form, the latter of the two is rejected by the same law of euphony. Hence we have bibhrat for bibhrat-s, " he that bears ;" tudan for tu" he that afflicts." The Zend, Greek, and Latin, on the other dant-s,
hand, preserve the s, and therefore stand, in this respect, on earlier ground than the Sanscrit. Thus we have, in Zend, df-s (for ap-s), " water ;" " a The Greek and Latin, when the final consonant of body." kerefs, the stem will not unite with the s, prefer giving up a part of the stem itself,

and hence we have

X'^P'-i for A'"P''''"f>

comes

for comit-s.

Moreover,

the Latin, JEolic Greek, and Lithuanian agree in a surjirising manner with the Zend, in that nt, when uniting with s, gives the form ns.

Thus we have amans ; ridevg ; Lithuanian, sukans ; Zend, sravayans, "he that speaks." VII. A final n after a short vowel is no favourite in Sanscrit. Hence we have the n rejected from a stem in the first part of a compound ;
as,

rdga-putra,

" the king's son," for ragan-putra.

It is rejected also

from the nominative, in which rejection a preceding short vowel is made " a Thus, rdgd, king," long if the stem be of the masculine gender. " from a from ragan, masculine, and ndmd, riamart, neuter. name,"

The Zend
"

ening of the vowel

agrees in this with the Sanscrit, except as regards the length" the as, ashavd, pure," from ashavan, masculine
; ;

the eye," from cashman, neuter. cashma, VIII. The Latin follows the Stoscrit and Zend in suppressing n in the nominative of masculines and feminines, but not in neuters as,
;

sermo, sermon-is

actio, action-is

but nomen, not nome or nomo.

not,

The

root can at the end of

however, reject the n, in order, very probably, to prevent any further weakening of so feeble a Hence we have tubi-ccn, fidi-ccn, os-ccn, &c. The term lien syllable.
is

compounds does

a mutilation from lieni-s.

Pecten appears to be an isolated case.

r,

IX. If the theme in Sanscrit end in

the r is omitted

neither does

nostras is dicebatvr, quern nunc jierrgrinum dicimus" origin o( lioslts, iberefore, is fully apparent.

(De

Off". 1,

12).

The Indian

NOMINATIVE.
any nominative
ened.
ddtdr,
suffix s appear.
blirdtd,

221

Thus we have

"a

father."

The preceding vowel also is lengthfrom bhrdtdr, "a brother;" data, from " a mother; pitd, from pilar, "a giver ;" mdld, from md/dr, the place of of the vowel The lengthening appears to supply
r.

the rejected

X. The Zend and Lithuanian follow the analogy of the Sanscrit, and the other hand, the Teutonic dialects, together reject the r, while, on Thus we have, in Gothic, brothar, with the Crreek and Latin, retain it.
svistar,

daughtar

in the old

High-German, pruodar, suestar,

;

tohla.r ;

in Greek, iraTfjp, soror,

(irirrip,

-dvydri^p, dai'ip

question here presents be the earlier ones, or whether the rejection of this same letter be not

&c.

The

in Latin, paler, mater, /rater, itself, whether these forms in r

more

ancient.

careful examination of the point will result in favour

In the first place, we have the testimony of the of the latter opinion. for the early origin of the rejection of r ; and Lithuanian Sanscrit, Zend,
and, in the second place, such Greek forms as Trarrjp, f^tjTijp, &c., show in their declension something peculiar and strange, since, as p and c are the case-sign and retaining unwilling to coalesce, they prefer giving up takes place in the stem-consonant, a directly the reverse of what

process

the

lengthen

more regular forms, such as iraic and Tiovc, for Trald-g and -rroS-g. XL Masculine and feminine ground-forms in Sanscrit that end in as the vowel a in the nominative singular. They are mostly com-

in this composition a neuter subpounds, and have for the last member " bestantive in as. Thus, dur-manas, bad-spirited," from dies (which " comes dur before the sonant letters) and the neuter noun mands, spirit"

but certainly the source whence (the root, probably, of the Latin animus, come mens and have, therefore, in the masculine and femjievog).

We

inine,

durmands, but in the neuter durmands. The analogy between this The to 6v(t/u.vec, is very stxiking. and the Greek 6, 6vuiiEv{]r, neuter Sanscrit genitive, again, is dusmanas-as, with which we may compare
/;,

the old graph,

Greek form SvajxEvca-oc, whence, according to a previous paracomes the received form dvajiEve-og. The f at the end of the
is to

nominative

before which the stem-consonant

be regarded either as a stem-consonant, or a case-sign The former of these f has fallen away.

and derives support from the analogy opinions is the more probable one, of the Latin, where those masculine and feminine forms of the nomina-

which correspond to the Sanscrit stems in as arc, in like manner, without a case-sign. Thus, the Sanscrit comparative suffix -iyas becomes in Latin -ior, with the usual change of s into r, and the nominative

tive is without the case-sign in both the masculine

and feminine

but in

the neuter

we have

us, corresponding to the Sanscrit as, the

u being

T2

222

LOCATIVE.

Hence friendly to a final s, and protecting it from being changed into r. gravius answers to the Sanscrit gariyas. XII. Feminine ground-forms in d lose the s as, dshiwd, " a tongue,"
;

kd,
kci,

" which." " which

The same
and so
the
in

takes place in

Zend

;"

Lithuanian, rankd,

as, hizwa, "a tongue," " a hand ;" with all which
;

may be compared
&c.

Greek and Latin forms

;i'wpa, fiovaa, terra,

musa,

Zend, feminine nominatives in e ; as, pereni, " " a maiden full,'' kaine, ;" and these nominatives resemble very closely in appearance Greek nouns in //. The Zend form in c, however, appears
find,

We

also, in

to be merely euphonic, and the e has been changed from an a through the influence of a suppressed y (com.pare the Sanscrit form kanyd, where

y appears). Hence it is not unreasonable to suppose that the e of the Latin fifth declension, as in almost every instance an i precedes it,
this

has been changed from an a by the influence of this i. This may serve to explain why we have occasionally two forms for the nominative, one
of the
ries
fifth

and the other of the

first

declension

as, for

example, mate-

and materia, the latter of which follows the analogy of the Greek, and allows a to remain unaltered before i, as in GO(^ia. The Ionic form,

on the other hand, follows the Zend, as

aoflr].

Vocative.
I.
is
it

The

vocative in Sanscrit has no peculiar case-sign of

its

own.

It

often identical with the nominative, and

where

it

differs

from that case

coincides very nearly with the naked theme or ground-form. II. In monosyllables the vocative is the same as the nominative.
have, nom. bhi-s, "fear," voc. bhi-s,

Thus we

"oh

fear," like

/cj-j-

and

other monosyllables in Greek. III. In other kinds of words an a at the end of the stem remains unaltered in Sanscrit and

Zend, but in Lithuanian

is

weakened

into e.

The Greek and

e in

Latin, like the Lithuanian, change o and

into a short

the corresponding declension, as Xiike, lupc.

We

must

not,

how-

ever, regard this e as a species of case-ending either in the

Greek or the

Latin. The forms Ivke and Iwpe bear the same relation to the Sanscrit vrika that rcevTe and quinque do to pancan ; that is, the old a, which in 2.VK0( appears as o, and in Ivpus as u, has assumed the form of a short e.

IV. Sanscrit stems in

also the pure vowel.

and u are increased by guna

;'

neuters have

Thus we have

in Sanscrit pati, vocative

oi pali-s,

"husband;" sunb, vocative of sunu-s, "a son;" nama, vocative of nanian, " a name," neuter. V. The guna-form in 6 (from a-J-w) agrees in a remarkable manner

"a

lord" or

^F
1.

Guna,

Ui.iking

a+i

in Paiuscrit, means the insertion of coalesce into e, and a-{-u into <5.

a short a before

and

u,

and in then

DATIVE.
with the Gothic and Lithuanian.

223
have, in the two latter, su-

Thus we

nau, sunaii, and in Sanscrit su7id (from sunaii).

letter in the vocative as in the nominative,

VI. The Gothic and Latin, where the stem ends in n, suppress this whereas the Sanscrit and

Zend restore to the vocative the nasal letter taken from the nominative. Thus we have in Sanscrit dtman, in Zend asman, but m Gothic ahma',
with which compare the Latin sermo
in the vocative.

Greek, in numerous instances, takes its vocative pure from In others, it gives this case the naked stem, or else the nominative.
the stem only so far altered as euphony or assimilation requires. Thus Tu7.av as the vocative of ruAa^, ;);apt'ev (for x'^P'-^vt) as the vocative of ;^;apiif, and rval (for Tvald) as the vocative of Tra^f. The

VIL The

we have

Latin carries out still more fully the example of degeneration set for it by the Greek in the case of the vocative, and, with the single exception of the second declension, makes the vocative the same as the nominative.
Dative.
I.

The
e.

dative in Sanscrit ends properly in

all

e,

which termination de-

rives its origin, in

probability, from the demonstrative pronominal

stem

bhrdlr-e,

The Zend has a similar ending. Thus we have in Sanscrit " to the " to the brother ;" duhitr-e, daughter ;" and in Zend,
in a,
i,

hratkr-e and dughdher-e.

II.

Feminine stems

u,

and occasionally those

in

and

u,

lengthen

out, in Sanscrit, this termination e into di.

Stems

in a have,

moreover,

an
I

inserted

as, givdi-di,

and u take the guna before e ; In Zend, feminine stems in d and

III.

" to the tongue" (stem givd). while those in " to a son" as, sunav-e, (stem sunu).
i

have also the ending of the dative

in

di, as in Sanscrit.

since e

aya.

makes
IV.

Sanscrit stems in a add another a to the case-sign e, and then, here equivalent to a-\-i, there results from this union the form Hence we have vrikaya, " to the wolf" (stem vrikd). The Zend merely di ; as wehrkdi.
is

The

the particle

wa with an
Pali,

Sanscrit forms the dative-ending of pronouns in smdi, from " to " to i this," kasmdi, appended as, tasmdi,
;

whom."
and

In Zend, this

In Pracrit and

sma changes to hma; as, kahmdi, "to whom." also, wc have the converted info an h, but the h
are ])laccd in an inverted order,

m at

the

same time

mho, used for hma.

In Pracrit, therefore,
;

which compare the Greek ufifZEg nsa, in u-nsa-ra and ti-nsi-s.

whence we find wc have amhe, "we," with and from mka we come to the Gothic
i ;

V. In Lithuanian

the dative ends in

as, wilku-i,

"to the wolf;"

224
sunu-i,

ACCUSATIVE.
"to the son."
to

" tam, VI.

him

The

good." usual Greek and Latin dative are taken from the original O
;"
is liere

gcram,

In adjectives and pronouns " to the

it

ends in

m;

as,

lo-

cative, to

which the student

referred.

Accusative.
I.

The

characteristic of the accusative in Sanscrit, Zend,

and Latin^
In

is the letter

in

Greek, v

is

substituted on grounds of euphony.

Lithuanian the old

m
is

is still farther

weakened
and

into a species of nasal n,

lanffuacres
itself as

which

Sanscrit

termed anusvara.

The Germanic
this loss

have
early

lost the accusative-sign in substantives,

shows

as the Gothic.

mination appears, and

In masculine adjectives and pronouns, however, a terthis termination in Gothic is na, but in the old

High-German more correctly n. II. The following tabular view

Sanscrit.
vrika-m (wolf)
paii-m
(lord)

will

make

this subject

more apparent
Gothic.

Zend.
loehrke-m

Greek.
?t,vKo-v

Latin.

Lith.
wilka-n
pati-n
sunii-n

lupu-m
hosLc-m

vulf
gast''

jmti-m

TTUCL-V

sunu-m ddna-m

(son)
(gift)

pasu-m
date-m
6upo-v
ttItv-v
in Sanscrit,

pecu-m donu-m
socru-vi

sunu
daur''

***** *****

tanu-m (body)
III.

lanu-m

handu.

Monosyllabic words,

termination of the accusative

am

in

and du, make the place of the simple m, and this apending
in i,u,

somewhat of a polysyllabic ap" " a Thus, hhi, fear," and nau, pearance. ship," do not make in the accusative bliim and ndum, as we might be led to expect from the analpears to be done in order to give them

ogy of the Greek vavv, but bhiy-avi, ndc-am. With this agree the Greek stems in ev, since they make, in the accusative, e-a, from cF-a, instead
of Ev-v
;

as,

j3aaLM{F)a

for (3aai?^v-v.

in the erroneous, however, to regard, as many do, the Latin termination of the accusative as originating from an earlier ending em ;
It is

IV.

to make, for example, lupu-m come from lupo-em horam from em fruclum from fructic-em, and diem from die-em. That a mere

and

horanasal
his-

letter is

amply

sufficient to indicate the accusative, appears

from the

tory of not only the whole class of

crit,

Germanic tonges, but

also the Sans-

Zend, Greek, and Lithuanian. V. The Latin cm in the accusative of the third declension

is

of twofold

origin.

belongs to the stem, and stands for i; as, e-m in ign-cm (Sanscrit agni-m), which corresponds to i-m in Sanscrit,
the
e

At one time
l-v in

i-m in Zend,
times,

Greek, i-n in Lithuanian, and i-na

in

Gothic

at other to

when

the stem terminates in a consonant, the e of

it

em answers

the Sanscrit a, to which

also corresponds in

numerous other

instances.

ACCUSATIVE.
VI. Sanscrit and Zend neuter stems in
in
a,

225
and those related
to

them

Greek and Latin, take an

and nominative
;

m for

the termination of both the accusa-

a guard," in Sanscrit sayane-m SMjana-m, So in Latin and Greek, donu-m, dupo-v. All other stems of in Zend. the neuter gender remain, with a few exceptions in Latin, unaccompanied by any case-sign in the nominative and accusative, and present in Latin, changes a final i into merely the naked stem, which, however, " water." The Greek, however, e ; as, mare for mari, in Sanscrit wdri,
tive
as,
;

"

like the

Sanscrit and Zend, leaves the

unaltered

as, Upi-c, ISpi, as

in Sanscrit, sucis, suc-i.

Examples of neuter w-stems, which supply

the place of both nominative and accusative, are, in Sanscrit, madh-u, " sweet ;" in Zend, woh-it, " tears " wine " ;" sicad-u, ;" asr-u,

honey,"
VII.

" wealth

;" in

Greek,
in

/xei^-v,

The 2

Greek neuters, such

6dKp-v, rjd-v ; in Latin, pec-u, gen-u. as yivog, fj.evog, evyevec, has

al-

The case is the same to the stem. ready been explained as belonging it is, with respect to the Latin s in such neuters as genus, corpus, &c.
;

in fact, the earlier form of the r of the oblique cases, as in gener-is, cor-

with the latter of which we may easily for-is, for genes-is, corpos-is, " a the Sanscrit vapus, also signifying body," genitive vapus-as.

compare

The

and repaf, is 2, also, of neuter stems in T, for example, rervcpog

not to be regarded as a case-sign, but as having been changed from T, which latter is never tolerated at the end of a word, but is cither thrown

away

case o{ fiDu entirely, as in the

and

Trpuyfia, or

is

exchanged

for the

is formed from the Sanscrit prali, through the cognate 2, just as wpog intermediate ^'Eolo-Dbric form Trpori.

VIII. Gothic neuters and masculines want the case-sign m. In Lithuanian the neuter entirely disappears in the case of substantives, and has only left a trace behind in pronouns and adjectives.

IX. Pronominal stems in a have

in Sanscrit

t,

in

Zend

t,

as the flec-

and accusative neuter. The origin of the tion-sign of the nominative " " this he," neuter case-sign / is to be found in the pronominal stem ta, " used
one," Greek

TO, Gothic

THA,

&c.

The

Lithuanian

(ai,

that,"

as a nominative

and accusative, corresponds to the Sanscrit ta-t, the Zend ta-t, the Greek to, &c. The final i appears to have some affinity to the demonstrative t in such forms as ovtocl, eKeivoai, and both the
Lithuanian and Greek terminations

may be

traced to the old Sanscrit

form

it,

appears

occurring in the Vcdas, and which, on account of its antiquity, to have lost all regard for the particular gender of its termina-

tion, since,

itself also to masculine though neuter in form, it attaches This same it appears to be the sister-form pronouns of the third person. of the Latin id and the Gothic i-la.

226

ABLATIVE.

Ahlalive.
I.

The abladve
is to

in Sanscrit has

for its characteristic, the origin

of

which
ta,

be traced,

in all probability, to

" this."
II.

the demonstrative pronoun

vowel

This case-letter, however, only appears with stems " from the wolf." is lengthened before it as vrikdt,
;

in a,

which

III. In Zend, the ablative, " from the wolf ;" but stems in

in like
i

manner, ends
;

in t; as,

have

6i-t

as, dfritoi-t,

wehrhdt, " benedictione ;"

" institutione." radshbi-t,

IV.

The

old Latin agrees in this respect with the Sanscrit and

to a very remarkable degree.

Thus we have on

the

Zend Columna Rosirata,

and

in the

decree of the senate "

De

Bacchanalibus,^' such forms of the

ablative as prcesented dictaiorcd, allod marid, senatud, &c. prcedad, The Oscan also formed the ablative in d, as appears from the Bantian
inscription,

where we

find dolud, mallud,

cum

prcivatud, toutad, prcE-

senlid,

&c.

We

may remark,

in passing, that the old Latin

and Oscan

giva-tat,
self

forms of the third person of the imperative, namely, es-tod and es-tud (for es-to), correspond surprisingly to the Veda-form obtained from Panini, which as well " vivat" as " and which itsignifies

vive,"

may

be compared with " vivito" of both the

classical Latin

V. In

we

and second person. meet with a kind of ablative form in the

third

in-

separable pronoun met, which, from having originally belonged only to the first person, as far as we can hazard a conjecture (supposing it to be cognate with the Sanscrit ablative mat, " from me"), passed subsequently over to
all

the persons.

The

conjunction scd, too, appears to

have been nothing more, originally, than the ablative of the reflexive pronoun sc. In the decree of the senate " De BaccltanaUhus," scd occurs twice as a pronoun governed by inter, whence we may infer either that
inter
sative

was construed, in early Latin, with the had then, in some instances, the same

ablative, or that

the accu-

force as the ablative.

In

favour of the latter opinion

ted in Plautus, and the
ter) in the

we may

cite the accusative

use of

med and
neu-

employment of ead

for ea (accusative plural

decree just referred to. find, in this same decree, the This will serve preposition extra appearing under the form of extrad.
to strengthen the opinion that the Latin prepositions in

Wc

a were

all origi-

nally ablative cases, and even pro

would seem

to

have been

at first writ-

ten prod, as an ablative, since

we

find traces of this early

form in prod-es,

prod-eram, &c., whereas, in prosum, the d has disappeared from before s by a law of euphony. VI. The ablative in Sanscrit expresses removal from a place, answer" and this is its true and original meaning, ing to the question whence

LOCATIVE.

227

which the Latin has preserved only in the names of places. From the idea of " whence," the ablative passes over to the relation of cause,
since that,

on account of which anything takes

place,

may be

regarded as

In this way the dothe spot or place from which the action goes forth. mains of the ablative and instrumental cases touch each other. When

used adverbially, the ablative embraces a

es, in the

still

wider range, and express-

case of some words, certain relations that are otherwise quite

In Greek, adverbs in uf may be regarded as sister-forms foreign to it. of the Sanscrit ablative ; so that u-g, from a stem in o, bears relation to
the Sanscrit
6jiu-c
is

d-t,

from a stem

in a, just as dlduat

does

to dadd-ti.

Hence

related to the Sanscrit samd-l,

"

similarly," both in its ending

and

its

stem.

Now,

in the

the end of a word

total

was

to 2 at Greek language, the change from absolutely necessary, in order to prevent the
;

we may safely suppression of the former letter and, therefore, conclude that such adverbs as o/zu-f, ovtu-c, oi-f, came originally from have a similar analogy in the Latin adovTU-T, u-r, &c.
S/xu-T,

We

verbial forms guomodo, raro, vero, perpetuo,

&c.

Locaiive.
I.

This case has,

in

Sanscrit and Zend, an

for its characteristic

letter.
II.

In Greek and Latin the locative has united

itself

under one form

with the dative, but still without losing its Hence wo have Aci6ui'i, MapadCtvi, place.
fiai.

own
its

peculiar reference to

I,a/iafiLVi, iiypu, ockoi, xo--

So

also

we

find this

same case
;

retaining

reference to a point of

time conceived of as space as, ry avry r/fzepa, ry avry vvkt'l, and in " in the " in the Sanscrit divasd, night." day," nisi, the III. When the stem ends in a, case-sign i passes into e in both
Sanscrit and Zend, except that, in the latter language, bi also stands for a singular analogy between Zend loe, which circumstance produces
catives in oi and such

Greek datives

as oIkoi,

fioi,

ao'i.

IV. In Lithuanian, the stems in a agree surprisingly in the locative with the Sanscrit and Zend, since they convert this a, together with the

into the

which nowhere, any more appears pure in this tongue, " in God," stem diewa, with which we saying diewe, and the Zend da&ve. dtve Sanscrit the may compare V. Masculine stems in Sanscrit that end in i and m, and occasionally " in the also feminine ones, have a locative ending in an. ; as, taiiau,
old iocativc-sign
i,

vowel

e,

body."

The Zend gives to stems in u the genitive ending o, while to form eu-s is more usually employed. express a genitive meaning the VI. In Zend and Sanscrit we discover in several instances a species
of alhance between the genitive and locative, and the one appearing for

228
the other.

INSTRUMENTAL.
The same remark
this

holds good with reference to the Latin

language the genitive of the first and second declension only appears with a locative meaning, for example, RomcB, Corinthi, humi, not in the third declension nor in the plural, the opinion has been

and as

in

advanced that the Latin genitive of the first two declensions is derived from an ancient locative. It would seem, therefore, that when the first
declension lost
its

genitive in d-s, the dative (in

its

origin a locative)

was compelled
sponding to

also to supply the place of a genitive.

o-i,

In the second de-

clension, the form in

which belongs properly to the locative, correthe Greek o and ot, and of which examples still remain,

It lost in the one as popoloi Romanoi, underwent a twofold change. case the vowel that marked the ending, as domino ; while, in the other,
it

dropped the stem-vowel and retained the ending, as domini

of these settled

the for-

mer

down

into a dative, the latter into a genitive.

VII. This view of the Latin cases frees that language from a gross absurdity of syntax invented by the grammarians. According to them, the name of a town is put in the genitive when the question is " where

provided that name be of the first declension but if it be of the third The declension or of the plural number, the name is put in the ablative truth is, what the grammarians mistake for a genitive in the one case,
;
!

and

for

an ablative

in the other, is in

both instances the same, namely,

a locative, and the error has arisen from confounding similar forms.

Instrumental.
I.

The

instrumental case has d for

its

characteristic letter in Sanscrit,

and

this termination appears to

a,

the pronominal stem "

be nothing more than a lengthening of and identical with the inseparable preposition a,

"on," "along,"
II.

to,"

which comes from the same stem.

In Sanscrit, masculine and feminine stems ending in a short vowel If the vowel at the end be a it is changed into e. take a euphonic n. Hence we have vrike-n-a, "by the wolf;" sunu-n-a, " by the son."
III.

The Vedas show

likewise the remains of a formation without

n;
or-

as,

swapnay-d, "by

sleep," for swapnS-n-a,

theme swapna; and the

" through dinary language exhibits two forms analogous to this in may-d, " ;" and tway-d, through thee," from ma and tiva. IV. In Zend the instrumental case is marked, as in Sanscrit, by a, Thus we have zaosh-a, " through but more commonly short than long.

me

design ;" wchrk-d,

by the wolf" Monosyllabic stems, however, in a, " proprio." always lengthen the case-ending as, kha, V. In Lithuanian, this case ends in u, a, and mi. Stems in a form " Deo their instrumental in ti ; as, diew-u, ;" feminine stems in a retain " this vowel as a case-ending as, ranka, by the hand ;" while all other
; ;

"

GENITIVE.
etems take mi as the tennination of the instrumental
the son."
;

229
as,

sunu-mi,

"by

VI. In Latin, the ablative

is

the instrugenerally employed to denote

ment
still

Traces, however, of an independent instrumental case " " well," hardly ;" bene, appear in such adverbs of manner as dure,
or means.

&c.
VII. In Gothic, the instrumental, usually called the dative, ends in a; " it remains as, gast-a, by the guest." In the other Germanic tongues in certain pronominal adverbs of manner ; as, in old High-German, diu,

swa, wio

in

Anglo-Saxon, thus, swa, hu

Genitive.

in

Enghsh, thus,

so,

how

I.

The
as,
is

terminations of this important case, in Sanscrit, are

first

s,

sya, as,

and

whereof the

three are

common

to the three genders, while

the last
II.

confined to the feminine.

i and u take the guna, and this is also the " of a son " of a husband case in Zend ;" in Zend, ;" suno-s, as, pate-s, " of a " of a husband Lithuanian and The tancu-s, ;" body." patbi-s,

In Sanscrit, the vowels

;

els in a

Gothic, on the other hand, take the guna in the case of these same vowmore limited degree. All zi-stems in these two languages in-

sert

an a before their

final

vowel, and thus the Lithuanian sunan-s and

the Gothic sunau-s correspond to the Sanscrit suno-s, from sunau-s. The guna, however, limits itself, in Gothic, in the case of t-stems, to

feminines merely; as, anstai-s, "of favour." III. The Sanscrit genitive-ending as passes over, in Greek, intoof in
the case of
last
t

vowel of which

and v stems, as also where the stem ends in a diphthong the Thus we have -nopri-og, Ixdv-oc, {iaatM-og. is v.
iropTSi-g, lx6ev-g,

In these no guna appears, such as

forms utterly un-

known

in

Greek

as genitives

but,

on the contrary, the true forms cor-

Sanscrit genitive of consonant-stems, pad-as, respond, like no6-6(, to the " The Latin, on the other hand, agrees vocis," &c. "pedis ;" vac-as,

more

not so far as to have the closely with the sister tongues, though In the case of the Gothic gasti-s. guna, and hence hosti-s resembles Latin M-stems (4th declension) the lengthening of the u may take the or perhaps, more correctly speaking, this class of place of the guna ; words follow the Greek or consonant-principle, and the vowel which has
fallen

s is compensated by the lengthening of m. and also the pronouns of the third person, of which, however, only one, namely, amu, ends with any other vowel but a, have in Sanscrit the fuller genitive-sign sya; as, vrika-sya, "of the wolf;" " illius." In Zend, this ending takes amu-S7ja, ta-sya, "hujus," &c.

away from before

a,

IV. Stems in

the form oihe; as, vehrkahe,

"of

the wolf;" ka-he,

"of whom."

230

GENITIVE.

in sya.

this genitive ending Thus, since Sanscrit stems in a answer to Greek ones in o, and since a towards the end of Greek words, when placed between two vow-

V. The Greek and Latin show manifest traces of

els,

generally disappears, there can be but

little,

if

any, doubt that the

old epic genitive-endmg in to is a mutilation from aio, and that, for example, in Tolo (compare the Sanscrit ta-sya), the first o belongs to the

stem, and lo to the case-ending.

Tolo {togio),
it

As

regards the dropping of

<j

from

may be remarked,

that the

Greek language

exhibits an-

other olo, from which a a has been dropped, namely, 6l3oIo, the old form of which was diduiao, just as ITiiyov comes from sMyeao, and t(^i6ov

from edi6oao.

It is

from TOGLo, and that

the
also

easy to infer, therefore, by analogy, that toIo comes this last is identical with the Sanscrit ta-sya. In

common
c,

and makes

language, this form toio, after parting with the old a, loses to-o, out of which comes, by contraction, the form rov.
part of the subject,

The Homeric
to this

same

termination ao, in Bopi-ao, Aivei-ao, and the like, belongs and stands for ai-o, which last was ori-

ginally a-Gio.

The

Latin, on the other hand, changes the Sanscrit sya

into jus, with the favourite conversion of a into

for

before a final s

as,

example, hu-jus, cu-jus, e-jiis, illius for illi-jiis, &c. VI. The Lithuanian genitive of the a-stems deviates
that of the other declensions,
is

in a

remarkable

manner from
thus

and has o

for its case-sign, in

which vowel there

we have
little

wilko,

a blending also of the vowel that closes the stem ; " of the The Gothic has prewolf," for wilka-s.
full

served as

as the Lithuanian any trace of the

genitive ending sya,

i,

and the Gothic a-stems are in

this case like those in

the a being weak-

ened before a

final s

into

i,

so that

we have

vulfi-s for vulfa-s.

The

consonant-stems have in Gothic a simple s for the case-sign of the geni" of a brother." " of a name The earlier tive ;" brothr-s, as, namin-s, sister languages, however, lead us to infer that this 5 was originally pre;

ceded by an

a, and at a later period by an i, which vowels subsequently disappeared, like the a from the nominative vulp-s for vulfa-s. VII. Feminines have in Sanscrit, as has already been remarked, a

fuller genitive ending,

namely, as.

The Greek

is

somewhat analogous

to this in the long vowel

nine of the

first

which characterizes the genitive singular femideclension It appears also as, G(^vpug, M.ovGrig, &c.
;

in the old Latin genitive of the first declension, escds, terras,

&c.

Dual Cases.
Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative.
I.

These three cases have

aic,

in Sanscrit, in

masculines and feminines, the

ending

which arose very probably from as by vocalizing the

is

consequently,

s, and, nothing more than a strengthening of the plural ending

DUAL CASES.
as.

231

plurality,
tion,
it

Since the dual implies a clearer designation than mere undefined and involves more of strong expression and lively personificaloves the broadest endings, as well in the cases here

named

as in

the others that remain to be mentioned.

II.

While

the Pracrit

and Pali have

it,

lost the dual, the

Zend, on the

other hand, has preserved

yet in such a

its place. frequently occupies however, in the case of verbs.

way only as that the plui-al The dual in Zend is much less frequent, The Sanscrit ending au becomes in Zend
is

do.
III.

In the "Veda dialect, the ending au

the latter clement of the diphthong being suppressed.

ilar

mutilated frequently to a, In Zend, by a simtoo,

process, a

is

used for ao, and more frequently,

than the

full

form.

From this Veda-ending d, and the short a that often stands for it in Zend, we easily come to the Greek dual f, since this vowel is fond of taking
and as, in the vocative, the place of the old short a at the end of words ?iVK stands foi: vrikd and vehrkd, so, in the dual number, uv6p-e (with
;

the euphonic 6) corresponds to the Veda-form nar-d and the Zend nar-a. IV. In Lithuanian the dual termination of masculine stems in a is m

contracted from wo

and the Veda-form vriM, the Zend vehrkd, and the

In the vocative, the LithLithuanian wilku, are in principle identical. a shorter v, and hence throws the accent back on the peuanian

places

nult

as, unlkii

'.

which resembles the change that takes place in the

irdrsp.

Greek

irar/jp

and

in i and u suppress, in Sanscrit, the stead lengthen the end-vowel of the stem as, " two " two The sons," from silnu. liusbands," from ipaLi ; sunii, j)ali, " same principle operates frequently in Zend ; as, maimju, two spirits ;" " two like manner, suppresses the in The Lithuanian, crezu, fingers." of the dual in its i and u stems, and lengthens the end-vowel

V. Masculine and feminine stems

its

dual-ending an, and in

case-ending

" two full accordance with the Sanscrit rule ; as, awt, " two and from the Sanscrit aici from sumi, avi) ; avi, (compare sheep," sons," from su7iu (compare the Sanscrit sunii). VI. In Greek, the dual of the first two declensions follows the same
of the stem in
principle.

In the
tj,

first

declension, the nominative singular,

it

is

true,

often ends in

in the dual
is

but the stem always terminates in u, and this becomes In the second, the u of the as, Ke(pa?.-a, rifi-u, KOfi-a.
;

dual

a lengthening of the o in the stem as, Aoy-w, 66-6, 6up-u. VII. Neuter nouns in Sanscrit have in the dual not au, but i for an
i.

indiniT, as in the pKiral they have not as. but a short of the stem coalesces with this i into c, and hence

An

a at the end
sate,

we have

" two

Other vowels hundred," from sata-t. euphonic n ; as, talu-n-i. VIII. Lithuanian dual-forms of the feminine gender ending in i agree
insert a

232
The

INSTRUMENTAL, ETC., DUAL.

c in Sanscrit
is

with those ending in

and Zend

as, ranki,

from ranka.

accusative dual, however,

formed

in Lithuanian, contrary to the

other sister tongues, after the analogy of the singular, by

sal letter
;

means of

a na-

as,

wilkun.

IX.
ginally

The study of comparative grammar shows that the dual was oricommon to the different branches of the Indo-Germanic family,
it

has gradually disappeared from the greater number of them. in the Sanscrit and Zend, for example, whereas in Pali it occurs only in the two words dui, " two," and oubha, " both." Traces of it are found in the Golhic, but not in the more modern Teutonic dialects.

but that

"We

find

it

It

modern Greek

occurs in Greek, but often with a mere plural meaning, whereas in it is unknown. In Latin we find it remaining only in two

words, duo and ambo, exactly as in Pah.

Instrumental, Dative, and Ablative.
I.

These

three cases have a

common

termination in the dual

number

in both Sanscrit
itself to

and Zend, whereas in Greek the genitive has attached The the dative, and borrowed its termination from the latter.
is

Sanscrit termination for these three cases

curtailed to bya.
II.

bhydm, which in Zend

is

Connected with

this dual termination is, in the first place, the

first

end-

ing

bhyam of
is

the pronouns of the

and second person

in the dative
first

the pronoun of the singular and plural, but which, however, in

son,

per-

curtailed to

hyam.
alluded to at the close of the preceding paragraph

III.

The curtailment

appears to have existed at a very early period, since

ble coincidence, as regards this form,

we

find a

remarka-

between the Latin and Sanscrit,

the Latin pronoun mi- Az corresponding directly to the Sanscrit wia-Ai/am, and the Latin ti-bi, on the other hand, to the full Sanscrit form tu-bhyam.

is

IV. In the second place, connected with the dual termination bhydm the form bhyas, which marks the <lative and ablative plural, which in

byd, and in Latin bus, by suppressing in this last-mentioned language the letter y, and by the usual conversion of as into us. alone remains to inV. In Lithuanian, in the dative dual, the letter

Zend becomes

dicate the dual

as, for

example, wilka-m.

This m, however,

is

not to

be regarded as the
bial

final letter

of the Sanscrit bhy-dm, but the

initial la-

converted into a nasal.

VI.
is

The

dual-ending bhydm

is

also related to the Sanscrit Mis,

which
which

the

mark of

the plural instrumental.

bis,

This
in

latter termination,

in

Zend becomes

has settled
;

down

Latin into the case-sign for

the dative and ablative

as, for

takes the place of bus, that

comes from bhyas.

example, in no-bis and vo-bis, where bis In Lithuanian, on the

INSTRUMENTAL, ETC., DUAL.

233

Other hand, mis (the labial being changed to a nasal) is peculiar to the and the instrumental, and pati-mis answers to the Sanscrit pali-bhis

Zend pati-bis. VII. The old

of the subject

in rpic ending

Greek

in ^l

and ^iv belongs

is

to this part

On

the supposition that

<l>iv

the earlier form of the

two,

we

in /xeg,

we may easily hazard the conjecture that it arose from fic, just as which ending trace /xev from /zff in the first person plural of verbs moreover, corresponds to the Sanscrit mas and the Latin mus.
;

'n accordance with this idea, the old

Greek form

(pig

will

answer

to the

It is highly probSanscrit bhis, and to the Latin bis in 7iobis and vubis. between ^t and (piv, and able, too, that originally a diilierence existed

that the former belonged to the singular, the latter to the plural, having between them as bi and bis in the Latin forms ti-bi and the same

analogy

vo-bis,

and mi and mis

by the eyes."

the Lithuanian aki-mi,

"

by the eye," and aki-

mis,

"

VIII. That the endings

well known.
tions in

principle

and (piv belong especially to the dative is and instrumental use of the same terminasuch forms as avToipi, &vprj(pL, (3l7^(j)tv, is easily explained on the that the common dative itself has assumed a locative and in(pc

The

locative

strumental relation.

however, have at any time a be denied ; since when prepostrong genitive meaning may very safely with a genitive, appear also sitions, that are otherwise construed in Greek

That

(j>i

and

fiv,

with cases ending in

(pc

or

(piv,

there

is

no need whatever

for

us to re-

All or as supplying the place of a genitive. gard these last as genitives, in Greek with a genitive would be much construed are that prepositions
better joined with an ablative or locative,
if

such cases existed in Greek.

as supplying the place of the genitive ending, is, strictly speaking, of genuine ablative signification, expressing as it does the departing from a place.

Even

the suffix -Qev, which

is

commonly regarded

IX.

The Greek

dual-ending in lv appears to be a curtailing of the

language,

Sanscrit form bhydm, by throwing out the initial labial, as, in the latter vrikais is formed from vrikdbis, and then by contracting yam

" to into IV, just as, in Sanscrit again, ista is said for yasta, from yag, " The third dehaec," is formed from ryam. offer," and in Zend im,
clension in Greek might, by
its

rise to the suspicion that otv,

latter,
IV,

and not

dual termination, as in 6aiu6v-OLv, give The iv, was the true endijig.
first

however, appears in both the

and second declensions, where

vowel of the stem
;

and not

oiv, attaches itself to the final

as,

MoiJaa-

IV, ?^6yo-iv,

&c.

Hence,

in the third declension,

we

are to regard the

o before iv merely in the light of a connecting vowel between the stem

and case-ending. X. On the principle

that the dual-ending in tv

is

contracted from

My-

U2

234

NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE PLURAL.

also the origin of the iv

dm, we discover

certain pronouns, namely, r/n-lv, vu-iv, a^-iv.

appended to the dative plural of This latter iv appears to

have been of very early

for the

origin, since

we

find that the Sanscrit has

bhyam

ending of the dative plural of the pronouns of the first and second From this bhyam we come as person, but in all other words blnjas.
easily to iv, as from the dual termination
this

same ending,
:

in

such forms as

j-dv

bhyam. The accusative use of and vlv, may be explained in two

ways
in V

either

by supposing that the original dative force of the terminaforgotten, or that the analogy of the accusative ending
|Ut-i',

tion had

become

was

followed,

vi-v.

Genitive and. Locative.

I.

These two cases have

in Sanscrit the

common

ending

bs,

which

may

possibly be connected with the genitive ending of the singular. Thus we have vrikay-bs, paty-os, tanu-os.
II. In Zend, this ending seems to have disappeared, and its place to So also in Lithuanian, where, for exhave been supplied by the plural. ample, awj-u is both the dual and the plural genitive.

Plural.
Nominative and Vocative.
I. Masculines and feminines in Sanscrit have the nominative plural ending in as, with which case, as in the sister tongues, the vocative is

identical in all the declensions.

to be nothing

more than an enlargement of the

This plural termination in as appears s which forms the case-

sign of the nominative singular, in order that by such enlargement the idea of plurality might be symbohcally, as it were, expressed. II. The neuter, as in the singular and dual, so also in the plural,

wants the

letter s,

which would seem, therefore,

to

have too much of a

personal reference to harmonize with this gender. III. In Zend, as becomes 6, but before the particles ca and

cit it

changes merely to as\ with some limitations

In Greek
in

it

Latin

it

appears under the form ff, though maizes Is ; in Lithuanian, when the

stem ends
merely
as^-ca
;

in r, the termination of the

nominative plural
;

is es,

otherwise

s.

Hence we have

in Sanscrit duhitar-as
;

in Greek, dvyaTEp-eq

in

Zend, dughdharLithuanian, dukter-es ; with all which Zend, and Gothic

in

we may compare
IV.
that

the Latin m,atr-es.

in Sanscrit,

The masculine pronominal stems

in a

nominative sign, but, in place of this, they lengthen the stern by the addition of an i, which vowel, on being blended with the a of the stem, becomes in Sanscrit e, and in Zend e or

end

do not take the

full

Cii.

Hence we have

in Sanscrit

te,

in

Zend

le,

and in Gothic

thai, all

ACCUSATIVE PLURAL.
"
signifying

235
same case and

these," whereas the feminine forms of the

number
just

are tds, tdo,

in the

and

thos, corresponding

to the

masculine forms

mentioned
this
i,

Greek
is

toi (Doric for ol).

to the

In Greek, and Latin,

however,
ic
is

which

added

stem

in Sanscrit,

Zend, and Goth-

only in masculine pronominal themes, takes a much wider range, and to be found connected with all other stems of both the first and sec-

ond declensions.

Hence we have

X'^P'^h ^vkoi, for ;^;6Jpa-ef, XvKO-eg

and lupi (from lupoi), terra (from lerrai), for lupo-es, terra-es. V. Stems in i and u have in Sanscrit the guna, and hence we find This guna has been patay-as and sunav-as for paty-as and sunv-as.
preserved in the Gothic, though in
its

weakened form

i,

which before the

Hence in Gothic we have sunj-us, " sons," vowel u changes into a j. In the Gothic i-stems the guna-i blends for suni-us, from stinau-s.
with the
gasli.
i

of the stem and becomes long

(written ei)

as, gastei-s,

from

VI. Neuters in Zend, as in the sister languages of Europe, have a

short a for the ending, the remains, in all probability, of the fuller form too much of personal refas, after the s had been thrown away as having

erence to harmonize with the neuter.

sative, since masculines and feminines

This a remains also

in the accu-

most commonly have as

for the

termination of this case.

VII. Corresponding has neuters in i, which

an

earlier a.
this

Zend-European neuters in a the Sanscrit vowel is evidently a weakening merely of The end-vowel, moreover, of the stem is lengthened, and
to these
latter
is

between

and the case-endmg a euphonic n

inserted
in a

whence we

have ddnd-n-i, varl-n-i, madhu-n-i.

r excepted, place before the

Stems ending
nasal,

consonant,

n and

same a

and lengthen the preceding

vowel

as, vacdn-si.

isolated neuter-forms
Qiaic).
he,

With this insertion of i we may compare the very which appear in the Latin qua {guai) and h(tc But the analogy is most striking between qua and the Sanscrit
ka-\-i,

formed from

which appears as a dual, but was

originally also a

plural form.

Accusative.

Stems ending with a short vowel in Sanscrit affix an n and lengthen hence we have vrikd-n, pati-n, sunii-n. the final vowel of the stem This n in the accusative plural is a curtailment of the full form ns, which
I.
;

The has remained fully in the Gothic as, rulfa-ns, gasti-ns, sunu-ns. but converted the v Greek, on the other hand, has retained the sibilant,
;

into a

i^ ;

as,

Mkovc.

The form

?.vKovg, therefore, bears the

same

anal-

that rvirrovaL ocry to TiVKOvg

II.

does to Tvnrovai (formed from tvtttovti.)

like,

For w6ai-ag, IxGv-ac, and the

however,

we

cannot expect that

236

ACCUSATIVE PLURAL.

any such old forms as TrSai-vg, ixSv-vg ever existed. In the case of their and V stems, the Greeks constantly follow the same rule as in stems

we

ending with a consonant, namely, by appending ag, as in Sanscrit, where have padas corresponding to the Greek -rrodag. III. This as for ns may be compared with the Ionic arat, oto, for

vrai, VTO, a form

which has extended

;

itself

from cases where the vocali-

as, 7rE7ri.6arai, TTpu(j)araL, for zing of n was absolutely necessary itenEidvTai, rerpiKpprai, even to those where v could very properly have

been allowed
TlLVTaL.

to

remain

as, TrEiravaraL, nEK'^laTaL, for iriTravvTai, kek-

IV. Feminine stems ending

in a

vowel follow

in Sanscrit the
a,

analogy

of consonant stems, with the suppression, however, of the

have therefore s
en
this, in

for as or ns.

Feminines ending

in

and they a short vowel length-

order to compensate, very probably, for the suppression of the

Something

hence we have prUi-s from priiy-as, and tanu-s from tanu-as. like an analogy with this may be found in the Greek forms

of the accusative plural ending in tf and vg, but these are not limited to feminines, and the same terminations occur in the nominative also for
i-Eg

and

v-sg.

V. The Zend

follows, like the Greek, in its

;

gy of consonant stems
gairi-s,

while

in

feminine stems in

and u stems, the analoi and u we sometimes

find a form corresponding to the Sanscrit in i-s, u-s ; as, for example, " mountains " Masculine stems ending in ;" perelu-s, bridges."

a have

in the accusative art ; as, im-an, hos ;" mazislan, maximos." VI. In modern Persian, animate objects form the plural in an, and inanimate in ha; as, merd, "a man," plural, mcrd-an, "men ;" murg, "a

"

"

bird," murg-an, "birds;" ruz,

table," khiican-ha,

"a

day," ruz-ha, "days ;" kluican,

"a

" tables." neuter suffix in the singular

VII.

peculiar

number of Sanscrit
This occurs
still

nouns

is

found, as has already been remarked, in as.

more
Jia.

Zend, and forms, in this latter language, its plural in The modern Persian Aa, with its vowel lengthened, stands in close
frequently

So also in the modern German many striking resemanalogy with this. That the German blances to the modern Persian may easily be found.
worter (" words'"), however, shows an analogy in termination with the Persian hd, can only be discovered through the medium of the Sanscrit and Zend. And this discovery is readily made when we call to mind
that the old
s into r,
e.

changed

High-German, in its earliest periods, almost continually and as frequently converted a into i, which became at

a later period

PLURAL CASES.
Instrumental.

237

Instrumental plural has already been referred to under the head In Sanscrit it ends in bkis ; in Zend, in Ms ; of the instrumental dual.

The

in Lithuanian, in

mis

in Gothic, in

in Greek, in 04 or

<^lv

in Latin,

in bis,

&c.
Dative and Ablative.

I.

The

suffixes of both these cases

all

the Latin,

that remains of the termination bus in the first

have already been referred to. In and second

is merely the letter s ; as, pcnm-s, terri-s, lupi-s, dmnini-s ; except forms in a-bus, presently to be mentioned. II. The vowel i in terris, lupis, &c., belongs to the stem, not to the

declensions

Lupi-s, in fact, is for lupo-bus, according to the analogy of From o-bus, the language passed over to i-bus, for amho-bus, duo-bus. the purpose of lightening the end-vowel of the stem, just as in the becase-sign.

ginning of some compounds

plex.
III.

we

find multi-plcx for

muUu-plex or multolower orders,

:

and hence

The form i-bus remained we have in Gruter

in the vulgar dialect of the

(2, 9,

24

6,

46, 9

5,

618, 3

&c.)

such forms as dibus, diibus,

nius, ap. Charis., p. 4.)

filibus, parvibus,

&c.

(Compare

also

En-

IV. In the

first

declension the form a-bus has remained in several in-

stances as a convenient

mode

of distinguishing between feminines and

Still,

masculines.
ever,

No

traces of i-bus are found in this declension.

how-

we can

hardly suppose that the language passed at once from a-bus

to i-s.
into
I,

It is far

and that

this

more probable that a-bus weakened the stem- vowel a, t was subsequently lengthened as a compensation for

the removal of bu.

just as the verb

Hence

terri-s

arose from terri-bus, for terra-bus;

mdlo arose from mdvolo.

and

V. The Erse language makes aibh the termination of the dative plural, this striking analogy connects that language at once with the case-

system of the other European tongues. Thus we have, in Erse, ghri" to" or " with men." " to" or " with suns ;" fearai-bh, anai-bh,
Genitive.

Genitive plural in Sanscrit, in the case of substantives and adThe Greek ov connects itself in dm ; in Zend, in anm. jectives, ends at once with the primitive am, just as, in verbs, kdld-uv answers to the
I.

The

The Latin has preserved the final Sanscrit adad-dm. unaltered, but has shortened, through the influence of this letter, the preceding vowel ;

238

PLURAL CASES.

and hence we have, in this latter language, ped-um, whereas the corresponding form in Sanscrit is pad-am. II. The Liihuanian terminates the genitive plural in u, rejecting the

m, and

in this rejection of

m
o.

the

German

agrees with

it.

In Gothic, the

in like

manner disappears, and

e or

the vowel that remains assumes the

form either of an
III.

an
in a

Stems ending

The o appears in feminine o and n stems. vowel, with the exception, generally speaking,
;

of those that are monosyllabic, insert, in Sanscrit, a euphonic n between the case-ending and the stem and when this is done, the end-vowel of

This insertion of n appears to be of very early date, since the Zend participates in the same, though in a more limited degree namely, in stems that end in a and a ; as, vehrkathe stem,
if

short, is lengthened.

Analogous, in a striking degree, to this is the genitive of the corresponding class of words in old High-German, in old Saxon, and in Anglo-Saxon, which genitive ends in b-n-b or e-n-a.

n-anm, gihoa-n-anm.

Thus we

have, in old

High-German, kipb-n-b

in old

Saxon, g'ebb-n-b

in Anglo-Saxon, gife-n-a.

IV. Pronouns of the third person have in Sanscrit the genitive plural It is probable that this sdrn was the ending in sdm instead of dm. earlier form of the two, and that dm is merely the ending of this ending.

The High-German has here, as in many other instances, changed the sibilant to an r. The Latin docs the same, as in istorum, istarum, &c.
V. This rum,
fifth

in

the

termination of the genitive plural, has passed

first,

over, in Latin, from the pronominal inflection to the

second, and

declensions.

And

this

was

the

more

easily effected, since these

pronouns of the third person are all in the genitive plural of either the second or first declension. Forms, however, occasionally present themselves, especially in earlier Latin, which show that the language was not
always equally favourable towards the reception of this ending in rum, and hence we have such genitives plural as the following, socium, deum

amphorum, drachmum, agricolum, &c.

Latin rum and Sanscrit sdm would lead us to expect auv in But still the forms that do Such, however, is not the case. occur in u-uv and e-cjv, such as avru-uv, avre-uv, uyopu-uv, ayope-uv, It remains a point very plainly to a consonant that has fallen out. ques-

VI.

The

Greek.

tion, therefore,

cr

in pronouns,

whether a a has been dropped and in other words a v, as in

in

every instance or only

/isi^u,

from

p.e[^ova.

If

this latter

a-v-uv

view be correct, ?ivkuv will be for 7mko-v-uv, x^^pduv loixupbut tQv for toouv, and rduv for Taouv.

PLURAL CASES.
Locative.
I.

239

The

characteristic of the locative plural in Sanscrit is su,

which

is

converted also, on some occasions, into shu. For this in Zend we have shu and hu. The primitive form in Sanscrit, however, was swa, from

which comes shwa

and hu.
II.

in

Zend, which

is

more usually employed

for

shu

The

primitive ending swa.

is

identical with the reflex possessive

stem swa.

And

as in Latin si-hi points to an earlier form su-hi, su-i

;

which
tu-hi,

we would be led to expect from which we may compare with the

and

ti-hi to

an earlier form

Sanscrit tu-hhyam, so the

Greek dative

locative ending in oi (or aiv) points at once to the Sanscrit su.

III. Stems in a append to this vowel, as in many other instances, an and from the blending of a-j-i arises e, to which the Greek oi correThe l in Greek passes over sponds, as in T^vKOL-ai., Sanscrit vrike-shu.
in

i,

from these stems to others

or as a subscript
rjai,
l.

d and

rj,

and either appears

in its full force

Hence we have THaraMaLV,

'OXv/iniaai, 'A'&rjv-

&c.

IV. In Lithuanian, the endings of the locative plural are for the masculine se, for the feminine sa. This sa appears to have arisen from swa,

by rejecting the w.

240
o
(U

NUMERALS.

t^

v2
'3!u

-3
^w
~-i
to
to (,

ja,

fi

a
-to

ii

to

K5

'O

2-

o
a>

a a o u

S
c>

O 3 3 a 3
CO

1-3

11

P
f4
03

<i1

T3

K H
O
i^

c3

J3
P^
<^

h5

>
-3

<U

>

<;

oj

O
=*

"^

o >

NUMERALS.
Remarks.
I.

241

A very slight inspection of the preceding table will

words contained
in

show that nearly

all

the
its

them

are derived

by each language from some

of

cognates, or by

all

from a

common

source.

II.

Certain consonants, or certain classes of consonants, in one lan-

guage, are almost uniformly substitutes for certain others in a different lancuacre. And one of the most striking facts that appears on comparing these lists of numerals
is,

that in

some

of the languages of

Western

E\irope guttural or hard palatine consonants abound, and take the place of the sibilants, soft palatines, and dentals, and even of the labial con-

sonants which are found in the more eastern and in some northern lan-

guages.
III.

The

following examples will prove the truth of this remark.

Numeral
chatur,
Sanscrit,

4.

chetyre, chehar,

Russian,
Persian,
\

ch

rsTTapeg,
TTtavpeg,

Greek,

K
\<

>

become

<

q,

pedwar,
petor, fidwor,
fiuuar,

Welsh,
Oscan,
Gothic, Teutonic,

k, keathair, in

quatuor, in Latin, Erse.

Numeral
pancha,
penj,
irevTE,
TTE/nre,

5.

Sanscrit,

Persian,

Greek,
((

pump,
fimf,

Welsh,
Gothic,

^ p and ch p and j 7r and r >become TT and TT p and p f and f )

q and

q,

k and

g, kuig,

quinque, Latin, Erse.

Numeral 6
shash, shesh,
se.x,

Sanscrit,

Persian, Latin,

sh and sh sh and sh
s s

ch and ch
[

saihs,

Gothic,

and X and s

>become

guttural,
( (')

}
Numeral
7.

and

f,

chwech, Welsh. b^, Greek.

)
J

saptan,

septem,
saith,

Sanscrit, Latin,

s s s

and pt
and pt
>
)

become
:

<
(

Welsh,

and th

s and cht, h and ft, (') and ttt,

Erse. Persian. Greek.

Numeral
ashtan,
hesht,

8.

Sanscrit,

sht
sht
th

ocht,
OKTCO,

Erse. Greek.
Latin. Gothic.
seq
.

Persian,

oclo,

wyth,
1
.

Welsh,

ahtan,
p. 40,

Prichard, Eastern Origin of the Celtic NatioTis,

242

NUMERALS

dashan,

Sanscrit,

sh

vinshali,

Sanscrit,

sh

trinshat,

Sanscrit,

sh

satam,
sad,

Sanscrit,

Persian,

NUMERALS.

243

V. The Latin displays nearly the same phenomena as the Erse. It puts c or q, equivalent to k, in the place of the letters above mentioned. Neither the Erse nor the Latin adopts the p of the Welsh and ^-Eolic
Greek, but they have c or j instead of Sanscrit has ch.
it,

as in other instances

where the

VL The

Gothic and other Teutonic dialects resemble the

Welsh and

the ^Eolic Greek, except in the circumstance that they prefer aspirate thri consonants, as finfc for tte/xtte or pump ; fidwor for pcdwar or nirvp
;

for tri.

They hkewise

substitute the simple h in the place of palatines

and

sibilants in other languages, as may be seen in a variety of instances, as in the numerals, 6, 8, 9, 10, 100. The Persic and the Greek lan-

guages use the aspirate in some instances in a similar manner.

More
I.

Specio.l

Analogies in the Cardinal Numbers.

1.

In designating the number one a great diversity prevails among the Indo-Germanic tongues, owing to the circumstance of pronouns of the
third person being employed to express it, and the wide scope thus afforded by the early richness of their forms. II. The Sanscrit eka, the comparative of which we have reappearing

in

Greek in the form SKuTspog, appears to have arisen from the joining of the demonstrative stem e with the interrogative ka ; which same ka " " " unites likewise with api, also," forming kopi, any one," whosoever."
III.

The Gothic
connects
one."
this

ain's,

from the theme aina, the same as the Gerwith the Sanscrit defective pronoun
trace the old

man
ena,

ciner,

itself in origin

"

To

this

same pronominal stem we may

Latin form oinos, the accusative of which, oinom, appears in the inscripFrom this oinos comes the later tion found in the tomb of the Scipios.

unus, by the

common change
same time,

the vowel at the

in order to

of the old o into u, with a lengthening of compensate for the i which is

thrown

out.

IV. Besides the analogy pointed out in the preceding paragraph, the Latin unus also shows a surprising resemblance to the Sanscrit una-s, " " little which properly signifies less" (compare the German wen-ig, ;" " before is numbers in order to exand less"), placed higher wen-iger, " as, una-vinsati, nineteen," in Latin undepress diminution by unity " in Latin una-lrinsat, undctrigintd, &c. twenty-nine," viginti ; V. The Greek ev connects itself very probably with this same Sanscrit
;

ena, and has lost

its final

masculine, namely, ain's.

vowel, like the Gothic aina, in the nominative The Greek olo^, " alone," in Latin unicus,

comes
oinus.

in

all

likelihood from an old form oti^of, analogous to the old Latin

244

NUMERALS.
2.

The theme in Sanscrit is dwa, which is naturally inflected with the dual endings. The Gothic has in place of this tica, and as it dispenses with a dual, it inflects this theme like a plural, Nom. twai, twos, twa ; Dat. twaim Accus. twans, thwos, twa. With twai the form bai, " both,"
I.
;

connects

itself

from the root

ha.

Dat. laim; Accus. hans.

Tliis ba is

supposed
II.

to

come from

the Sanscrit ubha, stem oho.

dvcj,

In Greek and Latin,

dm, and

duo, have changed the old

into M, but have not parted with the end-vowel of the

stem

6vu agrees

with the masculine dwa, found in the Vedas.

In Sanscrit, the a of dioa

;

becomes weakened
"

into

at the

having two mothers."

;

The

beginning of compounds as, divimdtri, Greek, where such a form as dFi is im-

employs 61 markably in altering

possible,
into 6

as, difiiircjp.

The Zend and

this dwi, since they

by a hardening pronunciation.
In old Norse

Latin agree very rethrow away the d, and change w Hence we have in Zend bipaitis-

tana, and in Latin biceps, bidcns, &lc.

III.

we
is

find swar,

which appears

in tkriswar,

"three

times," and with which

connected the syllable ce, in the English tivice, This swar may be traced to var, which corresponds to the thrice, &c. " time." Thus we have Sanscrit vara, and this latter indicates ekavdra,

"once," and vdramvdram, "repeatedly." Now from vara comes the Persian bar, also referring to time; as, bar-i, "once;" and from this same source, in all probability, is derived the Latin termination her, ap-

pended

to the

names of months

as,
;

Septem-ber, &c., meaning literally

Octo-hcr, the eighth
;

the seventh time-portion of the year the ninth, &c.

3.

Novem-ber,

The theme in Sanscrit, Greek, Latin, Lithuanian, and Slavonic is in Zend and Gothic thri. tri, for which we have II. The declension of this theme is in most of these languages quite
I.

that in Gothic, on account of the word being a monoregular, except the vowel-ending does not disappear, but becomes syllable, the i before
ij,

and hence
III.

The

we have the genitive thrij-e, and nominative neuter thrij-a. Sanscrit and Zend, however, have, the former tri, the latmasculine and neuter.
In the

ter thri, only as a designation for the

feminine they employ the Sanscrit tisras for tisaras, from the root iisar,

and the Zend

tisaro.

4.
is chatasar, which follows the analogy of tisar mentioned in the preceding paragraph, and the resemblance beI.

The

Sanscrit feminine theme

NUMERALS.
tween the two
chatasar
is is

245

formed from tisar

so striking as to lead rs at once to the supposition that (itself a weakening of lasar) by the addi-

tion of the particle cha,

"and."

Viewing tasar as

identical with the

demonstrative stem in Sanscrit,

we may
;

obtain a glimpse of the earliest

and most natural mode of counting

II.

The Gothic fidcor connects

itself

namely, it, this, that, and-this, &c. with the Sanscrit cAa/rr by the

This form chatvdr is the stronger, and ordinary change of consonants. chalur the weaker, one in Sanscrit. The Lithuanian keturi may also be

compared with the same but still more clearly the Latin quatuor (i. e., The Greek TerTap-e^ (riaoap-eg) connects itself with the Sanschaivor).
;

crit chatvdr-as, the

is cha/ldr-6,

nominative masculine of chatvdr.

this

In Pali the form

t

and both

and the Greek TETTapeg gain the second

by

assimilation.
III.

The Zend

converts the softer form chalur into chathru at the

beginning of compounds, which agrees in a very striking manner with the Latin qitadru in quadrupes, quadruplcx, &c. IV. The adverbial s, by which are formed in Sanscrit dwis, " twice," The tris, "thrice," is dropped in chatur, "four times," for chaturs.
Latin drops the s in both three and four
5.
is the theme, and the genders were not distinguished in this and the following numerals. Moreover, we have the nominative, accusative, and vocative always in the singular
I.
;

as, ter, quater.

The Sanscrit-Zend panchan

panchdndm,

neuter form, whereas the other cases show plural endings ; as, genitive in Zend panchananm. This irregularity in inflection prepares us for a total want of
II. It is also
it

in the

Greek nevre and Latin quinque.

worthy of remark, that the final nasal in panchan appears in none of the sister European tongues, whereas the n of saptan, 7tavan,

m Lithuanian and Gothic. The final n in the Zend numerals was properly a later addition, and the origi" nal termination would seem to have been cha, and," which occurred as a prefix in the case of the number four in Sanscrit. Analogous to
and dasan
is

found also

Sanscrit and

this are

" atid both the Latin quinque, ending with qzie, ;" and the Greek re. In nevTE, ending with the enclitic pan-cha, therefore, the root pan will be euphonic for pam, and the final m.will be the neuter case-sign,

while pa, as a pronoun, will be identical with ka, to which we have reThis interchange of p and k ferred in our remarks on the numeral one.
has already been alluded to, and we niay compare the old Latin form as iroloQ for Kolog, &c. pidpid for quidqnid, as well III. From what has been premised, it would appear that the numeral " and one," indicating the one, five, when traced to its origin, meant,

X2

246

NUMERALS.
to four,

namely, which, on being added

made up

the

number

five.

We

" the may, however, derive fanchan at once from the Sanscrit jiani, hand," and malce the term refer to the number of the fingers on the hand,
just as the v/otd finger is to be traced, through the Gothic _^^ots " five." fingrs) to the numeral filnf, i. c.,fimf,
6.
I.
(i.

e.,

For

the Sanscrit shasJt, the

inasmuch as

Zend has cswas, and it is highly probable, sh does not properly commence a syllable in Sanscrit, but
it,

requires a A to precede

that the original

form

in this latter

language

was kshash.
II.

In Latin, Greek, and

German

the guttural appears to have

been

inverted,

and hence we have

in Latin sex, evidently inverted

7.

from xes.

has haptan, which closely resembles the Greek form ; the Lithuanian, on the other hand, has septyni, and the Slavonic sedmi.
I.

The Zend

The m in seplem and sedmi appears to have come in from the ordinal number, which in Sanscrit is saptama, nom. masc. saptama-s, and in Slavonic scdmyi. The same remark will apply to osmi, " eight," and to the Latin novem and decern, in Sanscrit navama-s, dasama-s, " ninth" and " tenth."
II.

It is

not probable that the

final

n of the Sanscrit
of
it

cardinal

forms

changes to

in seplem,

&c.

The change
in

especially at the

end of words,

which case
to

very frequent, becomes in Greek a nehardly ever

to

is

cessary alteration.

But the change from w

8.

m is

met with.

termination au in asht-au reminds us very strongly of the av in the Latin octav-us, of the oY in the Greek uy6oY-o^, for oydoog, and of
the

The

ow

in the

Teutonic dative ahlow-en.

I.

The Lithuanian
first

appear, at

has dewyni, the Slavonic devyati. Both of these view, altogether different from the forms that occur in

On a closer inspection, however, we will find the other sister tongues. that they all agree, the nasal letter being converted in the Lithuanian
and Slavonic numerals into the medial, just as we have dpofog in Greek from the same source with the Sanscrit mrita-s, with which compare the
Latin mort-uus.

indicating a

" new," as Etymologists deduce the Sanscrit navan from nava, new number after eight and they refer, in support of this " second," from sequor. etymology, to the Latin secundus,
II.
;

NUMERALS.
10.

247

tailmn involves two peculiarities of that language. In the first place, the letters h and r never allow a pure i or u to precede them in Gothic, but always call in the aid of the guna, converting, therefore,
i

The Gothic

into ai,

and

\i

into au.

In the next place, the old a does not every-

where remain unaltered

in Gothic, but is frequently, through the influ-

ence of a liquid that follows after, converted into u, not only in the radical syllables, but also in endings.

20100.

The increase by tens is expressed in Sanscrit by sati, sat, or ti, and in Zend by said, sata, or ti. The words to which these terminations
I.

are appended are substantives with singular endings.

II.

The analogy
ti,

is

very striking in Greek and Latin as regards the

termination

for

which

we

have

tl,

ra,

ti,

la.

Thus,

248

PRONOUNS.
Tabular View of the Ordinal Numbers.
Feminine Gender.^

1st

PRONOUNS.
Dual.
Sanscrit.

249

250

PRONOUNS.
Remarks.

I.

The

Indo- Germanic tongues

all

agree, after a remarkable manner,

in forming the nominative singular of the

pronoun of the first person from a theme altogether unlike that whence the oblique cases are deduced.

The am in aham is only a termmation, as in twain, and in the European languages, with the exception of the Greek and Latin, all traces of this In ^Eolic Greek we have lyuv, which comes nearer ending disappear.
the Sanscrit than the later form syu.
son,
all

In the pronoun of the second per-

European tongues, including the regular Greek and the Latin, It occurs, however, in dialective varieties, such drop the ending am. as the Boeotian romi, and the Doric and Laconic tvvt] and tow?}, where
the traces of the ain are very apparent.
II.

The

noun of
in

the

oblique cases have in Sanscrit ma for the theme of the profirst These themes person, and twa for that of the second.

stem

some cases coalesce with an i, and become me and twe. ma the Greek stem MO connects itself, and forms the
jnoi.

With

the

basis of the

The in arises from the strong tena vowel to stems beginning with a consonant ; as, for example, in ovofia, oSovCt ofpvg, tvlajiV) where in Sanscrit we or 'EMO, the o interchanges have nama, danta-s, bhru-s, laghu-s. In
genitive iiou and dative

EMO

dency

in

Greek

to prefix

MO

with

e,

and hence we have

and the

kfielo, k/nedsv, for

kfioio,

tfio-dev

(compare
a later ad-

TTodev, uXXo-Oev,
e/iov, /lov.

like), as

also ijiio for kiioo,

/z(}f,

and
a

hjiEv, fieij, for

is

In the jEolo-Doric forms

ifiovc, the

dition (as in Tei'C, Tcovg)

genitive, after

and was brought in as a characteristic of the the old genitive sign s, which in the o-declension stood

not at the end, but in the middle (compare toIo for tooio), had completely disappeared.
III.

The theme
in

of the pronoun of the second person, namely, twa, as-

Greek two forms, according as the a or w is dropped. In the former case we have 2T, in the latter 20, and the o is interchanged with e in aeio, aidev, and the like.

sumes

IV.

The Gothic weakens

whence
arise the

the a in

ma

to

an

i,

and contracts the va ot

tva to M,

two themes MI and THU.

The

Latin, like

the Gothic, shows the a of

in the dative,

where

in

ma weakened to i, and hence wc Sanscrit we find 7na-hyam. The

theme
Jiosti,

have mi-hi
accusative

me

is

for

mem,

as hoste-m, from the

and the ablative

is

me

is for

med,

like the Sanscrit

mat.

The

genitive mci

connected with

From the form mei the locative may-i (euphonic for mi-i) in Sanscrit. we would expect, by analogy, some such a form for the genitive of tu
as tvei, from the Sanscrit tvay-i, but euphony changes the v after a con-

sonant into u, and at the same time rejects the vowel that follows, aud

PRONOUNS.
hence

251
and the Sanscrit tu-bhyam

we have tui.

The analogy between

ti-bi

need any comment. V. In almost all the Indo- Germanic tongues the nominative plural of unlike that the pronoun of the first person comes from a stem altogether I is not of the singular, for the idea expressed by the personal pronoun since there is but one I, whereof
is too striking to

plurality, susceptible, strictly speaking, as the term we indicates merely one's self along imth others.

In the Vedas

we

form asnie as a nominative plural, instead of the more usual This asme comes from a theme asma, out of which Sanscrit vayam. and with tlie cases in ordinary Sanscrit are formed last all the
find the

oblique

theme asma the JEo\\c

itself,

ufifieg,
kfin'c,

by assimilation

for m/ieg, closely

connects

by assimilation for EG/xi, connecting itself " I am." The forms vfieic, vftsk, on the other with the Sanscrit asmi, such themes as v/ii, vfii, where the weak i takes the hand,
just as

we have

presuppose

From stems in i are also to be deduced final a. place of the Sanscrit the genitives a/i/is-uv, vfi^e-uv, for ufifii-uv, vfi/il-uv, and the datives i/fiiv, The accusative ?i/iuc, vfiag, become in ^olic for v/ii-iv.
v/ilv,
rjfj.i-i.v,

uftfiE, vfi/x,

which

later

forms connect themselves

(for

at

once with the San-

scrit,

asmdn, ynshmdn
It will

asma-ns, yushma-ns), by a rejection of the

i

case-suffix.

VI.

nas and vas appear cumstance shows conclusively

be seen by an examination of the table, that in Sanscrit This cirin the accusative, dative, and genitive.
that the s cannot be a case-sign,

and

hence, reasoning from the analogy afforded by the Zend, we may regard nas and vas in the accusative as abbreviated from nasmdn and vasmdn,

and

in the dative

am, vasmakam.

and genitive from nasmabhyam, nasmakam ; vasmabhyAfter removing the residue of each of these forms, we

have na and va remaining as the chief element in either case of personal designation, and from these latter come the dual forms ndu and vdm
(for vS.u).

in the preceding paragraph

VII. The principle on which nas and vas were sought to be explained may also be extended to the Latin. The
this for plural nominatives,

stems na and va would lead us to expect in as nu and vu (no and to), as also ni and vi
nos and vos for accusatives.

language such themes and

But we

find nos

m the

nominative, and the

final s

maintaining

its

and vos already appearing ground even in the pos-

sessives nos-ter, ves-ter (for vos-ter).

Hence

the os in nos and vos can-

not well be explained in the same way as the os, for example, in Ivpos, and we must therefore regard these two words, like the Sanscrit nas and

from some more extendvas, in the light of abbreviations or curtailments It is very ed form, in which, very probably, the pronoun sma appeared.
singular that

we

met actually find traces of such a form in the syllable

252

PRONOUNS.

appended to various pronouns, as egmnet, memet, tumet, nosmet, vosmet, &,c., and this met connects itself readily with sinat the ablative, from

which we pass

at

once

to the Sanscrit ablative plural, a-smat,

is

yu-shmat.

employed also by the Sanscrit grammarians as a species of ground-form for all cases and numbers, we may easily account for the free employment of met in the Latin tongue.

Now,

as this last-mentioned case

dual has N2 and S<I>i2 as themes for the pronouns and second person, and from these conic vui. and cr^ut. The peculiar form of vC)i and a(fC)i, as duals, has led to the supposition that the i is a weakening of the a which originally formed the dual-ending of

VIII.

The Greek

of the

first

the masculine and feminine, and which a, in the ordinary declension,

was

changed

to

e.

Tabular View of the Pronoun of

Singular.

the

Third Person.

PRONOUNS.
this

253
it

pronoun the analogy of the second person, and distinguish

t.

from

the latter by the initial s for

They

also, like the Latin,

Greek, and
re-

German, dispense with the nominative, since they use the pronoun
flexively
;

and they employ the singular instead of the

plural.

Remarks on
I.

the

Demonstrative Pronouns.
signifies in Sanscrit

The stem ta (feminine td) " that one." The Zend-form is

"

he,"

"

this

one,"

identical, except that the middle

;

mutes

often take the place of the tcnues

as, for

singular masculine, where for ttm

we have

dcm,

example, in the accusative or, more frequently, dim.

In Greek and

German
is

this

a part of speech that

uanian, and Slavonic.

wanting

pronoun has supplied the place of an article, in Sanscrit and Zend, as in Latin, Lithfeminine rd, ti], Gothic tho, correspond ; with which the Lithuanian demonstrative

n. The stems
stem
in the

to,

Gothic tha

to the Sanscrit-Zend ta
ta,

and

td,

ta, is completely has no demonstrative pronoun from a similar stem which it employs by itself, if we except certain adverbial accusativeforms, as turn, tunc (like hunc), tarn, tan-dem, tam-en, and certain deriv-

nominative masculine tas, feminine

identical.

The Latin

atives from such a pronominal source

tot,

totidem, toties, totus,

&c.

as, for example, talis, tantus, demonstrative, however, of the form

;

here referred to appears in the compound

the
first

iste,

and

is

declined with

it,

being an old unchangeable nominative masculine, the case-sign of which, as if unconscious of its as, istius for ejustius, &c. origin, remains also in the oblique cases
part of the

compound, namely,

is,

in. In the nominative singular masculine and feminine the Sanscrit and, in surprising accordance with it, the Gothic, substitute an s for the t,

which

in

Zend becomes an

h,

and
;

in

Greek the rough breathing.

Gothic, sa, so, thata
ri).
;

Thus
em-

we

have in Sanscrit

sa, sd, tat

'a,

in

in

Zend, ho,

hd, tat, and in Greek, 6,

to (the Doric a for

The

early Latin

ployed a form in the accusative closely connected with the primitive stem ; namely, sum for cum, and sam for earn, and used also sapsa as a nominative for sa-ipsa.

There are remains of the old s-form

arJTec,

also in the

G^eek

though here, since these compounds express an accusative, not a nominative meaning, the Attic rii/iepov, -ijTEg are more in unison with the Sanscrit usage, ta being the general theme, and
adverbs
ct'ijiEpov

and

sa only that of the nominative.

pirate takes the place of the
a'l.

It is

^sound

in the

an anomaly in Greek when the asnominative plutal also, as ol,

The Doric form

is

much more

accurate, toI, tci,

and harmonizes

with the usage of the sister tongues.

254

PRONOUNS.
General Observations on the other Pronouns,.

I.

The change from

a tenuis to a middle

mute has already been

re-

must again be mentioned as playing a very important part in comparative philology. Thus, for example, 66e is not compounded of 6 and dt', as is generally supposed, but the latter part of the word is
ferred to, and

evidently to be traced to the demonstrative stem to, the vowel changing

from o
as
[li,

to

e,

as in the vocative of the o-stem, and also in such accusatives

&c. In the word ode, therefore, both parts of the compound are of similar origin, and we are reminded of the doubling of the pronoun " in Sanscrit, Latin, and other tongues ; as, yd yas, quicunque ;" yan
as, e,

" yam, quemcunque ;" and in Latin, quisquis, quidquid, sese, &c. n. The principle alluded to in the preceding paragraph is farther

il-

lustrated by the Sanscrit neuter forms i-dam, " this," and a-das, " that,"

where

just as in the Latin i-dem, qui-dam, being all traceable to the demonstrative. Examples of a similar kind occur in the Latin dum, dcni-urn, don-ec,
t,

the d takes the place of

&c., the syllables dam, das,

&.c.,

den-ique,
altered,
this

&c.
its

The

adjective totus, on the other hand, retains the

une.,

and

primitive

meaning evidently
" whole." "

is,

"this and this,"

i.

and the other

half, or the

III.

The pronominal
one."

i-stem, consisting merely of a simple vowel, exthe

presses in

Greek and Latin

meaning

he," but in Sanscrit and

Zend

has no declension of its own, but has only left behind certain adverbs, such as, ilas, " from here," " from there " so" have also ;" itha, (compare the Latin ita), &c. from the same pronominal root i the derivatives itara-s, " the other" (whose accusative ilera-m reminds us at once of the Latin iterum), id," The Latin is enlarges its theme in many cases by such," &c. risa, means of a w or an o, in feminines by an a ; the i also is converted into
this
it

"

In the two latter languages

We

an

e,

especially before vowels

hence, as from the verbal root

come

eo

and eunt, in opposition to is, it, imus, itis. Ham, &c., so from our pronominal root come cum, eo, eorum, eos, and the feminines ea, ecs, earn, To the primitive i-type there belong merely is, id, the old forms earitvi.
im, ibus, the genitive and dative e-jus and
e-i,

and the locative

ibi.

IV. The stem of the relative pronoun in Sanscrit and Zend is ya, femThe Greek 6f, TJ, 6, converts the initial y into an aspirate, a inine yd. " to change that often occurs as in vfid^, for yushme ; a^u, from yag,
;

revere," &c.*

V. The interrogative stem in Sanscrit, Zend, and Lithuanian is KA, from which came the Greek interrogative stem KO. This latter was preserved by the Ionic dialect, but was converted in the others, from
the ease with which gutturals and labials are interchanged, into IIO.

PRONOUNS.
The
rtf,

255
or

actual declension, however, of this and we have therefore remaining of

;

KO
it

IIO was superseded by

only certain adverbs and de-

rivatives

as,

KOTE, TTore

Sanscrit kataras,
all

; Kug, Trwf ; Korepov, noTepov (compare the " which of the two") Koaog, noaog koioc, Tiolog
;
;

which point clearly enough to the existence, at one period, of such a form as KOf, ki), k6. This interrogative stem afibrds a basis, also, for
those cases of the Latin interrogative and relative which belong to the

second declension, namely, quod (compare the Zend

the plural, qui, quorum, quos.
alogy, and ought to be qua.

kat), quo, and, in

The

neuter plural qucs deviates from an-

It is possible, however, that this qucE may be the remains of an old dual, subsequently received as a plural, since it The Latin feminine has, in its agrees precisely with the Sanscrit ke.

different cases, a Sanscrit-Zend feminine

stem

for its basis,

;

namely, kd,

and hence we compare quam with the Sanscrit kdm

quarum with kdstem

to an h,
it

sdm ; quas with kds. VL The Gothic changes

the k of the interrogative

and

as the gutturals are fond of uniting in this language with a v, out of this last-mentioned letter after the h, making thus

places

HVA

KA, and

HVO
V
its

out of kd.

The

Latin, like the Gothic, loves to place a euphonic

after the gutturals,

and hence the Latin

QVO

corresponds to

HVA,

iu

departure from the Sanscrit Gothic ahva, " a river," just as

KA

and so also aqVa agrees with the

is

angVis

related to the Sanscrit ahi-s,

"a snake," and the Greek

e_;^;^f.

VIL The interrogative stem ki also occurs in Sanscrit, from which there appear to have been formed, in this same language, kit, and, before This reminds us at once of the Latin forms quis the vocal letters, kid.
and quid.
nominative

That there existed

kis,

at

one time,

in Sanscrit, a

masculine

analogous to the Latin quis, is proved conclusively by the compound forms mdkis and nakis, which appear in the Vedas, and with the latter of which we may compare the Latin nequis.

Vin. The Latin

ing, to

hic appears, notwithstanding its difference of meanIt has be derived from the same parent-source as quis and qui.

the same peculiarity of declension, hu-jus like cu-jus, huic like cui, and, besides, the nominative plural neuter shows a strong analogy to the cor-

The final c in hic appears responding part in quis and qui, namely, qua. to be shortened from cc, which remains in hicce (more correctly hice), and is analogous to que, pe, quam, and piam, in quis-que, quip-pe, quiS'
quam, quis-piam,
all

forms of the Latin

quce.

which terminations are nothing more than different And as these terminations, on being appended
its

as suffixes to the interrogative stem, change the interrogation, the

meaning and

part with

same thing operates

in hic.

The

earlier

form ap-

pears

to

have been

cic, cccc, coc,

and traces of the

initial c still

remain in

256

PRONOMINAL ADVERBS.
we have
the remains of the opposite pronoun

ci-s, ci-tra, just as in ul-tra

ilk (oUe), deprived of

its last syllable.

Pronominal Adverbs.
Locative adverbs are formed in Sanscrit by the suffix tra, which " here connects itself immediately with the theme as, a-ira, ;" ta-tra, " where 1" &c. " there same are To this source the Latin ad;" ku-lra,
I.
;

verbs ci-tra, ul-tra, to be assigned.

formed also

in

Zend by

the suffix dha,

Locative pronominal adverbs are which reminds us at once of the

Greek termination

i?a, in

tv&a, ivTav-&a, &c.

the suffix tas, adverbs are formed not only

IL

In Sanscrit, by

means of

from pronominal stems, but also from substantives and adjectives, and these adverbs denote the removal from one place to another sometimes,
;

they take the place of the ablative. Analogous to this, in some re" from heaven spect, is the Latin termination tus in cccli-tus, ;" divinialso,

tus, fundi- tus,

&c.

The

final s

and the
"
here,"

first

part of the

word connecting

appears to have changed to r in igi-tur, itself with the Sanscrit iha,

we have

for the primitive

meaning of
is

igitur,

" from here,"

i.

e.,

" on these " therefore." grounds," or IIL In Sanscrit the termination tas

sometimes converted into dhas,

Thus,

from which

last

come

the

Greek

-Qev

and the Slavonic du.

Sanscrit.

Greek.
k6--&ev,
To-i?ev,
b-'&EV,
illic,

Slavonic.
ot-kii-du.

ku-dhas,
ta-dhas,

ot-tu-du.

ya-dhas,

W
c
V".

ju-du-sche.
istic,

The

locative adverbs Mc,

were

originally datives, of

whose primitive form we have a

trace remaining in ruri. The enclitic being added to hi (changed from hui), illi, and isti, converted them into adverbs, and at the same time distinguished them from datives.

Adverbs of time are formed

;" tadd,
re,

" when

in Sanscrit by the suffix da ; as, kadd, " at which " then The Greek ter;" ya-dd, time," &c.

mination

in similar adverbs,

appears to be analogous to this

as,

TTore, TOTE, oTE, &.C.,

and

we may

also find a trace of the Sanscrit termi-

nation in the Latin quan-do.

Verb.
of personal terminations belongs to all Sanscrit verbs, and the diflTerences of conjugation which are distinguished by grammarians consists in the changes which the verbal roots undergo. The folI.

One system

lowing

is an example displaying the terminations of the present tense, as they are subjoined to the verbal root tud, " to strike," in Latin tundo.
1.

PricharcVs Eastern Origin of the Celtic Nations, p. 94, seq.

VERB.

257

258

VERB.
Augmented Preterit.
1st Person.

2d Person.
Alagas,
> J
) )

5d Person.
Alagat,
E?lEyE.
) ) )

Sing.

Alagam,
eXeyov,
',

sXeyec,

Dual.
Plur.

Alagava,

Alagatam,
i?.ByETOV,

Alagatam,
iXeyeTTjv.

>

Alagama,
E?iEyOfJ.V :\

Alagata, ) tXiyere, J

Alagan,
sXsyov.

Reduplicated Preterit.
1st Person.

2d Person.
Lalagitha,

3d Person.
Lalaga,
)

Sing.

Lalaga,

Dual.
Plur.

Lalagiva,

Lalagltus,
'Ke^.exO'TOv \\
>
5

Lalaglma,

Lalaga,
"keXEXO-TE,

Lalagus,
^.E^Exaoi.

"kEMxafiEV, \

Potential Mood,
Present,
\st Person.

2d Person.
Lage,
Lagete,
)

3d Person.
Laget,
TiEyoL.

Sing.
Plur.

Lageam,
MyoLfj-L,

\
)
)

XiyoLQ, \
)

Lagema,
MyoiiiEv,

Lageyuh
TiEyouv.

TieyoLTE, \

Imperative.

2d Per.
Sing.

3i Per.
Lagatu, ) \
Tt^Eyiru. J

2d Per.
Plur.

Zd Per.
) )

Laga UyE,

) 5

Lagata,
TieyETE,

Lagantu,
Attic,

7\-EyovTuv, >

&c.

VL
verb
;

The
as,

supine of the Latin " alitum " cinciwm" " ;" sanitum, falitum, (old form cingiis

Sanscrit infinitive

preserved

in the first

tum").

Vn. The
gous

to that of the

present participle of the masculine gender Greek and Latin as,

;

is closely

analo-

Nom.
Sing.

Gen.
Lagatah,
j

Bat.

Ace.

Lagan Aeyuv

Lagate
TiEyOVTL

Lagantam,
T^eyovra,

MyovTog,
legentis,

>

l\ legens
N. and A.
Lagantas,
Plur.
TieyovTEr^

legenti

legentem,

Gen.
im, Lagatam,
J

Lagadbiah,
Tieyovai,,

uv, ?iiy6vTo)v
1

>
J

>
J

legentes,

ium, legentium

legentibus,

VERB.
VIII.

259
is

The

nearly the

same

present participle of the middle and passive voices in Sanscrit and Greek as,
;

also

Lagamanas,
7i.Ey6iJ.Evog,

>

Lagamanah,
lEyofiivr],

Lagamanam,
lEybjievov
.

)
)

And

the Sanscrit past participle has been preserved in Latin

as,

Lagatas,

Lagatah,
Icgata,

) ^

Lagatam,

>

legaius, ^

kgatum.
its

Verb AsMi,

"

am," and
Present.
In Sanscrit.

cognates.

1.

1st Per.

2d Per.

3d Per.

Sing.

260
between the

VERB.

different languages does not exceed such as exists between proximate dialects of the same speech.
II.

The

imperfect tense
:

is

not to be traced with so

much

regularity.

It is in Sanscrit as follows

Sing.
Plur.

asam, asma,

asis,

asit.

asta,

asan.

In Latin, esam was probably the old form of eram, since s was often changed into r, and esam would regularly form esscm in the subjunctive,

which

is

actually found.

Thus,
esas,
esatis,

Sing.
Plur.
III.

esam,

esat.

esamus,

esant.

The second form

Sanscrit grammarians,

is

of the verb, in the arrangement adopted by the the potential. The potential form of the verb
to the old potential

asmi bears a strong analogy

to the Gothic potential.

stem in Latin, and also

Thus we

have,

Singular.
Sanscrit.

VERB.
Sing. Plur.
asani,
aidhi,
sta,

261
astu,

asanya,
esto
;

santu.

Compare astu with laru,

sta with Ote, cstc, and santu with simto.

The second person

VII. There

aidhi bears a strong analogy to

some of

the modifi-

cations of the verb substantive in Celtic.

is also in

Sanscrit the verb bhavami, from the root bhu,

allied to the old Latin verb fuo,

this

and

in the

sense of

oriri, nasci.
lo be in

With

may be compared

the

Greek

(bvu,

and the verb

English, to-

gether with the Celtic bydh, the Russian budu, and the Persian budemi. The Sanscrit has preserved the whole of bhavami, whereas the cognate
verbs are defective in most other tongues.

Remarks on

the

Endings of Verbs.
its

First Person.
I. The characteristic of the first person, in Sanscrit as well for the plural as the singular. however, this changes to a v.

original shape, is
first

m in

In the

person dual,

expression of the ending of the first person singular, in the active voice, is mi, and this is found in all Sanscrit verbs without
II.
full

The

distinction.

In Greek, however, the number of verbs in fu

is

compara-

tively small, being only about 200.

The

rest of the

Greek verbs have

entirely suppressed this ending,

and

their final w, as well as the Latin o

such forms as conjugations, answers to the Sanscrit a, which a, in bodh-d-mi, tud-d-mi, &c., belongs neither to the root nor the personal
of
all

to which the verb belongs. ending, but characterizes merely the class

When this consists of a short a, or of a syllable ending in a, this a

ened before

is

length-

m and v

ii

a.

vowel

follow,

and hence

we have

bodh-d-mi,

bodh-d-vas, bodh-d-mas, but bodh-d-si, bodh-d-ti, bod-d-nli, &c. III. The Greek takes no part in this lengthening of the vowel, but
Sanscrit tarp-d-mas. gives TEpir-o-jisv as corresponding to the

In the

to tarp-d-mi, may persingular, however, the form Tip-n-u-fu, answering and, if so, it is very probable that the w became shorthaps have existed
;

ened

was
in

and middle voices by reason of the greater stress that on the ending of the verb. IV. The passive and middle ending in fiat clearly shows that all verbs
in the passive laid

Greek had

originally

fit

as the termination of the

first

person active,

iox fiai arises

TepTTo/xai.

from

[ii,

just as aai, rat, vrat,

do from

ai, tl, vtc,

and no

could ever have

come

into the language except

from a repKufic

or TEpnojj.1.

V.

We have, in

what has just been

said, a

remarkable conlinuation of

the fact that the different

members of

the great family of languages

mu-

262

VERB.

tually illustrate and complete each other, since the richest of them have not reached us in a perfect state. While the ending fiai still remains firm in the modern Greek passive, the corresponding Sanscrit form lay

already in ruins at the early period

while, on the other hand,

when

the

Vedas were composed

Homer employs

but seldom the form in

/xc,

out of which have arisen his numerous present and future forms in fiai, although it is universal in Sanscrit, and is even employed at the present " I " I am ;" dumi, day in many Lithuanian verbs such as esmi, give ;" "I " I eimi, place," &c. go ;" demi,
;

VI.

It

has been already remarked, that those tenses of the Sanscrit

to the verb

which have the augment prefixed

as in Greek, in a

have the personal endmgs,

these the ending

more contracted form.

With

mi be-

comes merely m, and

this curtailed termination

changes

in

Greek, by the

laws of euphony, to v. Thus we may compare the Sanscrit atarp-a-m with the Greek IrepTz-o-v ; adadd-m with kdidu-v and add-m with klu-v.
;

In So, again, dad-yam is analogous to 6l6o-t,7}v, and de-yam to So-ltjv. the first aorist active the Greek has lost entirely the characteristic of the

The earlier person as, edei^a, whereas in Sanscrit we have adiksam. form 'idei^av, of the first person, appears to have come from a still older
;

one, eSei^afi, as

is

indicated by the

first aorist

middle, kSei^u/i-riv.

shows a strong attachment to the ending in m; as, amabam, amem, amarem, dtc, all which point to the Traces of the existence, at one period of the language, of verbs in mi.
VII.
Latin, on the other hand,

The

termination in the present tense are

still

found in

the original forms of *hich were, undoubtedly,

sum and inquam, sumi and hiquami.

first

VIII.

As

regards the origin of the ending for the

is,

person,

it

may

be remarked that mi
ter

in all probability,

form

is,

in Sanscrit

and Zend, the

weakened from ma, which lattheme of the oblique cases of the

personal pronoun.

Hence

the syllable ml, in dadd-mi, bears the

same

analogy to ma that the i in cin, in the termination of the Latin tubi-cin, does to the a in the true form of the root, can, from ca7io. The change
is a still farther weakening, and would seem to have been from mi to occasioned by the stress of the voice, laid, in pronouncing, upon the aug-

ment
at

or

initial syllable.

IX. The Sanscrit ending mas, in the first person plural, connects itself once with the Latin mus ; as, ama-mus, amaba-mus, &c., and also
/zsf,

with the old Greek termination

ueg, for (pipo-/iev, 6i6o-/j.ev
;

for

lara-fiev.

^ev as, (jiepo-fiec, dido-fxe^, laraThis plural ending in mas is

;

equivalent to m-as, where

plural ending.

indicates the pronominal stem, and as the

X. In the dual the Sanscrit vas becomes va

in

in the

analogy with the plural endings

mas and ma.

augmented tenses, This v, in the dual, is

VERB.

263

a softening from m, and the change must have taken place at an early be traced in period, since the same peculiarity in the dual ending may
the Gothic, Slavonic, and Lithuanian.

Second Person.
I.

Its

Sanscrit pronominal stem tva or tve assumes different forms in combination with verbal themes. The t either remains unaltered, or

The

else

becomes
V,

th or

dh

or, like the

Greek
is

av, is converted into an s.

;

The

moreover, either remains or

is

dropped

while the a

is

retained

unaltered, or

weakened

to

i,

or else entirely disappears.

The pronom-

inal form appears fullest in the middle voice, since this part of the verb loves the weightier endings, and therefore avoids, more than any other, the curtailing of the pronouns.
II. The full ending of the second person present of the dual is tlias, and in the plural iha. But there are strong reasons for believing that the second person plural originally ended in thus, and that from this arose

the dual ending thds

plural dropped its *,
sition that the

and, farther, that in the course of time thas of the

its On the suppolong vowel. second person plural ended originally in thds, we can

and thds of the dual

readily see the analogy of the Latin

tis,

as well as the correctness of

Thiersch's remark in relation to the hiatus, namely, that for the ending T in Homer, in the second person plural, we ought to read reg, from the

analogy of /leg for fiev in the first person. III. The Lithuanian has preserved the ending si of the second person in the substantive verb, where singular, in common with the Greek, only
es-si

and the Doric kc-ai show clearly

their

common

lineage.

In the case

of other verbs, however, the two languages part company, the Lithuanian everywheie retaining the i but parting with the s, the Greek pursuing a The Latin and Gothic agi-ee with the Greek. directly opposite course.

Hence we may compare

the Slavonic da-si, the

the Lithuanian dud'-i with the Sanscrit dadd-si,

Greek

6l6u-c, the Latin da-s, the Gothic vigi-s.

it

With

in w, regard to Greek verbs

would seem

that the

of

cc, after

back and united itself to the preceding having been dropped, has gone and as, for example, yeviretpa comes from ycvETipia, and jiesyllable
;

?Miva from ixe?Mvia, fiei^uv from fxe^iuv, x^'P'^'^ from x^P'^'^v, u/ieivuv from afiEviuv, so also TspTv-ei-g is formed from rep-rt-e-ai, corresponding
to the Sanscrit tarp-d-si.
find also in Sanscrit two other endings of the second person, IV. dhi and tha, the former appearing in the imperative, the latter in the reThe first of these, namely, dhi, reminds us of the duplicated preterit.

We

termination
(j>d--&i,

i9t

in

Greek imperatives
presents, at

as,
first

la--&c,

KEKpax-'&i, uvo>x-'&i;

&.C.

The second

view, a striking analogy to

264
the Greek terii.ination -Sa, but

VERB.

it is in reality a deceptive one, since & on other occasions corresponds to the Sanscrit dh, and arises from the influence of the preceding a, just as, in the passive and middle, all the active

personal endings in r become & by the influence of the g preceding. V. The Sanscrit tha will remind us then of the Greek i?a, although
these two terminations are not in fact identical, since the Greek

&a comes

by the influence of a preceding c, just as the r of the active personal endings is converted The a of the into & in the passive and middle by the insertion of a. active voice, however, belongs to the root, and hence we must divide as
into a i^

from dha, and the d has been converted

follows

Tjc-^a, ola-'&a (for oid-d-a).

sli
i,

VI. In Latin the termination

tha, the

a being weakened
Latin.
dedi-sti,
steti-sti,

to

an

corresponds to the Sanscrit ending and an * being inserted before the t,

the following
:

the aspirate also disappearing.

Thus we may compare

dadi-lha.
tasthi-tha.

Sanscrit.

momord-isti,
tiitud-isti,

mamard-i-lha.
tutod-i-tha.

Third Person.
I. The pronominal stem ta has, after the analogy of the first and second persons, weakened its vowel to an i in the unaugmented tenses, and

in the

augmented ones has

laid

it

aside entirely.

The

t,

however, in

Sanscrit and Zend, undergoes, the termination us excepted, no change whatever, whereas the t of the second person becomes, as we have just
seen,
t,

th, dh,

or s.

The Greek, on
at, as in

the contrary, retains the t of the

third person only in the substantive verb tort, Sanscrit asti,

and on other

occasions either has

II.

diduai, or

el,

as in ripTiei.

The form

6i6uaL resembles more the Sanscrit second person dadd-

si than the third

person daddti, and it is only distinguished from its own second person diSug by the latter dropping the i. That originally, however, even in the w conjugation, the third person singular ended in ri,
is

same

proved by the middle and passive ending rai, since TspnErat bears the The form reprelation to TepTr-e-ri that dichrai. does to dlduri.
arises

Tret, in fact,

deri, 6i6oi
III.

from

dlSodi,

from the rejection of r, just as ridei comes from Kepa from niparL, oIkol from oIkoOl, &c.

rt-

entirely the

In the augmented tenses, on the other hand, the Greek lays aside T sound, and agrees in this with the Pracrit, the Gothic, and
;

Slavonic

whereas the Latin retains the

this, as in

many

other instances, displays far

throughout the verb, and in more of an Indian character

than the Greek.

VERB.

265

IV. For the purpose of making the plural, an n is inserted before the pronominal characteristic. After this n the Gothic places the middle

mute

d,

where other languages have the tenuis

t.

pare the Gothic siml with the Sanscrit santi, the

sunt, and the old

Hence we may comZend hend, the Latin

Greek form

(a) evt'l.

V. The Sanscrit always inserts an a before an n, miless an a already Hence we have exist there, from the verbal class or radical syllable.
tarp-a-nti, like TEpiv-o-vrc aai,
;

tisht-a-iiti, like laT-a-VTi.,

&c.

The Greek

from avTL, in such forms as dEiKvv-aaL, i-aau, Tids-aai, 6L66-aci, &c., finds here a remarkable support, since it is hardly possible to suppose

that these

were merely accidental anomalies.

dialects, still there
to

For, even

if

such forms

as TiQeavTi, 6i66avTC, lavri, SEiKvvavTt, remain at the present day in

none of the Greek

can be no doubt but that the a

v,

is

lengthened in order

supply the place of the rejected

and that ci

is

put for n, as everywhere in the third person. VI. Some Sanscrit verbs, on account of the weight^of the reduplication which they receive in vv'hat are called the special tenses, endeavour to
lighten their ending, and therefore throw out
plural, shortening, at the

n from

the third person

same time, a long a

in the root.

Hence we have

" There can be no doubt but they give ;" gahdli, they leave." that, in the earlier state of the language, these forms were dada-nti, gaha-nti, and that, therefore, the Doric 6i66-VTi., Tide-vri, &c., give us the
dadd-ti,

"

primitive forms of the

Greek tongue. Sanscrit verbs, moreover, not merely those of the reduplicated class, but those also of the second conjugation, corresponding to the Greek
VII.

The

verbs in

/ic,

throw away,

in the

middle voice, the n from the third person

plural, in order to give

more

stress to the personal ending.

Thus we

have cim-ate

for cim-ante.

This change has very much the appearance

of having taken place after the separation of the different tribes of the hu-

man

The Greek, for e.xample, preserves family from their common home. the old form, and retains the nasal letter as a badge of the plural, with
still more firmness in the middle and passive than in the active, giving not only TipTT-o-vrac for the Sanscrit tarp-a-nte, but also did-o-vrai, tWsThe Greek, however, has vrai, for the Sanscrit dadalc, gahate, &c.

found, by another process, the means of lightening the too great weight of the middle ending, by employing merely vrai where we would naturally look for avrai ; saying, for example, SeUvv-vrai, and not 6eikvvavrai, although ihiKvi-aa would lead us to expect this latter form. Vni. The rejection of a from such a form as 6EiKvv-{a)vTai,, is like the dropping of r] from the optative, where, on account of the weight of the personal ending, the passive and middle voices form from Sidoijiv of the active, not
didoirjfJiTjv,

but

didoi/xTjv.

The

Ionic dialect, however,

Aa

266

VERB.

has in the third person plural sacrificed the v to the a, and in this respect harmonizes closely with the Sanscrit. Hence we have arai in Ionic, formed from avrai., as in Sanscrit ale from a7ite.

IX. The Slavonic changes the nasal

in

many
Greek

of

its

verbs to a short u,

and
zut),

this u, coalescing

with a preceding vowel, forms ou or u, so that vee;(foi;(7<,

from vezontj,

is

surprisingly like the

from exovai

for

iXovTL.

The Bohemian wezau, on

u,

the other hand, has preserved the

old a of the Sanscrit vah-a-nli and Gothic vig-a-nd, which in the Latin

vehunt becomes a
the
i

through the influence of the nasal, in opposition to

of the other persons {vchis, vehit, &c.).

the

X. In
as
it

does from

augmented tenses the final vowel in nfi or ayiti disappears, just and with this vowel the personti, si, mi of the singular
;

accordance with a law of euphony, which forbids the union of two consonants at the end of a word. The

al characteristic t also disappears, in

Greek, which cannot endure a final r, goes on a step farther than the Sanscrit, and removes the t from the thu'd person singular also. Hence

we have IrepTV-e
more
clearly

answering

to atarp-a-t, and,

where the resemblance

is still

The

shown, Irepn-o-v agreeing with atarp-a-n (for atarp-a-nt). Greek aorists, however, which make av in the third person plural,

agree better with the Sanscrit form, since the sibilant has preserved the a from being converted into o. Thus we have i6ei^-av, corresponding to the Sanscrit adikshan.

XI. In the unaugmented tenses the Sanscrit terminates the dual

in the

in tas;

augmented ones,
;

in tdm.

The

former of these corresponds to the

Greek tov
which the

as,

has divided

itself in

first

The other ending, tdm, repn-e-Tov, Sanscrit tarp-a-tas. Greek into the two terminations ttjv and tuv, of is the more prevalent one, while the latter is confined to
Hence we have
to

the imperative.

ETepn-E-Tijv, corresponding to atarp-a-

tam

edeiK-Ga-Tijv
it

Hence
rrjv, is not,

but Tepir-i-Tuv to iarp-a-tam. ; follows that the distinction between tov on the one hand, and
adik-sha-tdm
other, in the dual

Tuv on the
as

number,

is

of very early origin, and

Buttmann Supposes, a later formation of the prose language. Four places occur in Homer, it is true, where tov takes the place of ttjv,
it is

but in three of these

occasioned by the metre, and the fourth

is,

therefore, only a solitary instance.

The same remark

will apply to the

it is

augment, which is not to be viewed merely as a later addition because sometimes suppressed in Homer, since it is common, in fact, to both
the

Greek and the

Sanscrit.

VERB.

267

Remarks on
I.

the

Passive and Middle Endings.

passive and middle endings distinguish themselves from those of the active by a greater degree of fulness, though the mode of forming them is not the same in all the sister tongues.
II.

The

The

Sanscrit, Zend,
tenses,

in the
[lat

unaugmented
/z,

and Greek agree in lengthening out a final {, by the insertion of an a, and form, therefore,
rat out of
Ti,

out of

aai out of

crt,

VTi.

In the Sanscrit and Zend the vowels a and

to the

and in the plural vrai out of i then coalesce into an e,

and has,
for

which answers
III.

Greek

at.
i

The Gothic

parts with the

out of the diphthong

;

ai,

therefore, in the third person, da for dai

in the second,

za (euphonic

so) for zai

and in the

third

person singular and the

iirst

The first person plural, 7tda for ndai. and second persons plural are lost, and were

supplied by the third. IV. The Sanscrit and Zend, in both the unaugmented and the augmented tenses, parted with the pronominal consonant of the first person
singular,

and along with

conjugation.
:

it

have also

lost the

a of the verb-class in words

of the

first

Hence we

find budc for bod-d-me.

Compare

the followins

268

VERB.

purpose of indicating the second person. Now, if this be so, either the first or the second of the personal nidications irnbodied in iha-s must have

been used
for

to designate the individual

it is

on

whom

the action

is

exerted or

performed, a meaning inseparably connected " with the middle voice. Hence, in the Sanscrit adat-tlid-s, thou gavest to thyself" (i. e., thou didst take), either th(i stands for " thou," and s or vice versa. If we allow and if in the indicates " to
thyself,"
this,

whose advantage

Greek
is,

person the v of the ending iirjv (Doric nuv) be organic, that not a later unmeaning appendage, but an expressive element bequeathed
first

by the
"
I

earliest periods of the language, then hdi^ou-qv properly signifies, to myself,"

be that the subjective relation is expressed complete the analogy, we may take for the third person the ending ta-t found in the Vedas, and where the person is doubly expressed. Regarding this remarkable ending as a middle one,

gave

whether

it

by

iirj

(ud) or by the v.

To

we

have the same resemblance between

it

and the Greek ending to as in

the case of repw-i-Tu and iarp-a-tat, edldu and adaddt, &c. ; and, to make the case still stronger, we may call in the aid of the Bantian inscription,

where the old Oscan imperatives end csto ; all which would tend to show
ending to was tot, and that the

in a d, as licicu-d for liceto, estu-d foi

that the primitive

form of the Greek

final

was

rejected for euphony.

The
upon

Sanscrit- Veda ending idt will express the action of the third person
himself, like the other endings in the case of the
first

and second persons.

VIII.
it

The

first

person plural in Sanscrit ends in make, but in

like the

Zend

terminates in maidhe, from which latter comes evidently the Greek

/isda,

ending IX.

which drops the

Gothic forms.

The second

person dual ends,

in the

unaugmented

tenses, in dike,

In the augmented tenses, on the other hand, the second There is every reason to supperson ends in dthdm, the third in dtdin. pose, however, that these endings were originally tdthe and tdic, tdtliam
the third in ate.

and tdldm.

The

initial

syllable ta

became a

in Greek,

and the follow-

ing t was converted into an aspirate through the influence of the a. Hence arose in this latter language such forms as diSo-a-6ov, tSich-tj-Oov, &c.

X. In the Latin verb, the

final r

of the passive voice would appear to

and to have been changed from s by a favourite principle of conversion. In those persons which end with a consonant, a connecting vowel was necessary, and the u was brought as in amatur, amantur. in, probably through the influence of the liquid

owe

its

origin to the reflexive pronoun,

The imperative forms amalo- r and amanto-r require no connecting vowel. In amamur the s of amamus disappears before the reflexive, and the
more
on
readily as
it

does not express any persona! indication.

is

In amer,

the other hand, the personal characteristic itself

given up, since

amemr

could not stand, and

amcmur was

required in the plural for ame-

VERB.
musr.

269

In amaris, ameris, &.C., we have either a metathesis for amasir, &c., or else the personal characteristic s could not withstand the strong and this having taken inclination to become an r between two vowels In the imperative place, the reriexive preserved unaltered its original s.
;

amare the reflexive has preserved its own vowel, and if we change r back So, also, again to s, we have in sc the accusative of the simple pronoun. the old infinitive amarier is nothing more than amarc-cr by metathesis for
amarc-re.
(i.

e.,

amare-se).

deviates from all analogy, as will readily be It is probable that perceived, and presents no small degree of difficulty. amamini is the nominative plural masculine of a passive participle, and

XL

The form amamini

was

joined to estis, so that

amamini stood

originally for

amamini
is

estis,

as in Greek

we have

rervfi/XEVOi, elai.

The

Latin suffix

-minus, and

Now when corresponds to the Greek -uevoq and the Sanscrit -mana-s. it were, out of its ordinary path, changed to amamini from amaminvs, this amamini, so employed in the second perthis participle, forced, as

son plural, appears to have remained in that person as a kind of unalterable form, and to have been regarded, in the ordinary usage of the Latin

The consequence was, that the tongue, as having a verbal termination. substantive verb was dropped, and amamini became employed for both In support of the opinion that amamcnus was originally a pasgenders.
sive participle,

we

Inay cite the forms alumnus and Vcrtmnnus, w'hich

(middle participle), the root femina, being fe, whence we have fetus, felura, and fecundus ; and, finally, gcm" ini for genimi, they who are bom at the same time." XII. But how are we to explain the imperative amaminorl Is the r

are both evidently of participial origin. So, also, terminus, " she that bears" over

"what

is

stepped

;"

identical with that in amor, amalor,

aman/or

The answer must

be in

the negative, since to express the passive or reflexive meaning here by appending a pronoun would be unnecessary, as the participial suffix has
this

employment. The best way is amaminor, as we did in amamini.

that the

to

seek for a plural case-ending in

it

Now

happens, luckily enough,

what we want, for we This plural ending in or agrees very well with the Sanscrit as {a-\-as) and Gothic vs, where-

Eugubian

inscriptions supply us with

there find subator for subacli, scrchilor for scripti.

its way in from the pronominal declension. nominative singular of the second declension masculine, in the Umbrian dialect, ended in o, and we still find orlo for orlus, and

as the Latin

has forced

Still farther, the

subalii for subalus.

Now

it

is

very remarkable that

we

find, in the re-

mains of early Latinity, imperatives singular ending in mino ; as, /amino We have also fruimino in an inin Festus, and prafamino in Cato.
scription given by Gruter,

"is cum agrum nei habeto nei J'ruimmo."

Y2

270
Here fruhnino

VERB.
indicates the third person, a circumstance

which tends

very clearly to prove it a participle that may be applied to either person. have now reached the limit which we had proposed to ourselves

We

in the prosecution of the present inquiry, and cannot but entertain the

hope that the result

will

prove satisfactory to every one who will bestow

upon the subject his candid attention. The analogies existing throughout the Indo-Germanic chain of languages are not the mere results of
accident.

To

assert this

on the contrary, the

affiliation that exists

would be the height of absurdity. They prove, between all these individual

tongues, as v/ell as their common descent from one parent source, whatever this source may have been, or in whatever region of the globe it

may have been

prevalent.

THE END.

CLASSICAL WORKS
PUBLISHED BY HARPER & BROTHERS, NEW-YORK.
ANTHON-'S SERIES OF CLASSICAL WORKS.
The following works, already published, may be regarded as specimens of the 'whole series, which will consist of about thirty volumes.

First Latin Lessons, containing the most important Parts of the Grammar of the Latin Language,
together with appropriate

Exer-

cises in the translatmg and writing of Latin, for the Use of Be-

ginners.

12mo.

First Greek Lessons, containing the most important Parts of the Grammar of the Greek Language,
together with appropriate Exercises in the translating and writing of Greek, for the Use of Be12mo. ginners. A Grammar of the Greek Language, for the Use of Schools and 12mo. Colleges. A System OF Greek Prosody and Metre, for the Use of Schools and Colleges together with the Choral Scanning of the Prometheus Vinctus of .iEschylus, and
;

Sallust's Jugurthine War and Conspiracy of Cataline, with an English Commentary, and Geographical and Historical Indexes.

the Ajax and CEdipus Tyrannus of Sophocles ; to which are appended Remarks on the Indo-Germanic Analogies. 12mo.

Sixth Edition, corrected

and enlarged. 12mo. Portrait. Caesar's Commentaries on the Gallic War with the first Book of the Greek Paraphrase with English Notes, critical and explanatory. Plans of Battles, Seiges, &c., and Historical, Geographical, and Archaeological Indexes. Map, Portrait, &c. 12mo. Select Orationsof Cicero, with an English Commentary, and Historical, Geographical, and Legal Indexes. 12mo. With a Portrait.
;
;

CLASSICAL LIBRARY.
With
Portraits on steel.

Bound

uni formly, but each

work

sold separately.

Xenophon.

The Orations
Sallust.

(Anabasis, translated by E. Spelman, Esq., Cyropathe Hon. M. A. Cooper.) dia, by

Ph^drus.

With

the Appendix of

of Demosthenes. Translated by Tliomas Leland. Translated by William Rose, M. A. With Improvements. CyESAR. Translated by William
a Portrait. Duncan. CicERO. The Orations translated by Duncan, the Offices by Cockman, and the Cato and Lselius by Melmoth. With a Portrait. Virgil. The Eclogues translated by Wrangham, the Georgics by Sotheby, and the .^Eneid by Dryden. Portrait. .iEscHVLUs. Translated by the Rev.

Gudius. Translated by Christopher Smart, A.M. Portrait. Thucidides. Translated by William Smith, A.M. Portrait. LiVY. Translated by George Baker,

A.M.

With

a Portrait.

With

Translated by the Rev. William Beloe. Portrait. Homer. Translated by Alexander Pope, Esq. With a Portrait. Juvenal. Translated by Charles Badham, M.D,F.R.S. New Ed-

Herodotus.

To which are added, the Satires of Perseus. Pindar. Translated by the Rev.
ition.

And C. A. Wheelwright. Anackeon. Translated by Thomas

Plutarch's
from the
Bourne, Esq. Lives.
original

Sophocles.
Euripides.

R. Potter, A.M. Translated by

Thom-

as Francklin, D.D.

Portrait.

Translated by the Rev. R. Potter, A.M. Portrait.

Translated Greek, with Notes, critical and historical, and a Life of Plutarch. By John

Ovid. Translated by Dryden, Pope, Congreve, Addison, and others. Horace. Translated by Philip With an AppenFrancis, D.D.
dix, containing translations of va-

Langhorne, D.D., and William Langhorne, A.M. A new Edition.

A Life

OF Washington. In Latin Prose. By Francis Glass, A.M., of Ohio. Edited by J. N. Reynolds.

rious Odes,

&c.

And

12mo.

Portrait,

f..

^r

'"^fj^

#
c=
:u.

6
University of Caiifornia

SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388

4 o
I
i

Return this material to the library from which it was borrowed.

iysl

Km

W' 24^000

tjff

^ICiC^

^y

'^^mhmi^
.^C.IIPD^DY/^,

'^'^ommn^'

^'-^OKmm^'

<^r

^\lu

l~

^^
CO
-<

3 1158 01166 4553

-^ "^a^AiNfi-awv
,.r\F.rA"-"^r'

UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY

i
5

AA

000 342 146 8^

:3:

i?

^^UIBRARYQ/: >i
'!

^lOSANCflfj>
.a:

<

CO
:5?

:33

<ril33NVS01^

t
%J13AINn]WV^

AOfCAllF0%,

^^V.^!JNiVER%

.3

^^
:^

^AJi3AINa-3WV

^lOSAVCElfT/

.^^llIBRARY<?/^_

-^^t-UBRARYQc

"^aaAiNfi-mv

^^'<!/0JI]V3JOV

^lOSANCafj>

,S;OFCAIIF0%

^OFCAliFOfi*^
OS

o
,i?

cc

<

=3

^.
%a3AiNa3i\v
^<?AHvaaiiiv^

^<9AaviiHn-i^'^

-v^lllBRARYQr

^.WFUNIVER^/^ <^

^lOSANCElfj> .^

'